JP7786738B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines that use images to create effects have existed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-13006 A

However, there was room for improvement in the entertainment value of conventional gaming machines.

The present invention aims to increase the enjoyment of games.

In a representative embodiment of the present invention, a gaming machine equipped with a presentation control means capable of executing presentations related to a game comprises an operation unit capable of receiving player operations, selection means for selecting one of a first presentation style, a second presentation style, and a third presentation style based on the operation received by the operation unit, and adjustment means for adjusting the volume output by a sound output means based on the operation received by the operation unit, wherein when one of the presentation styles is selected, the presentation control means displays a presentation according to the selected presentation style on the display means, and in the presentation according to the first presentation style, a first target image corresponding to the first presentation style can be displayed on the display means and a first target sound corresponding to the first presentation style can be output from the sound output means, and in the presentation according to the second presentation style, a second target image corresponding to the second presentation style can be displayed on the display means and a second target sound corresponding to the second presentation style can be output from the sound output means, and in the presentation according to the third presentation style, a third target image corresponding to the third presentation style can be displayed on the display means and a The sound output means can output a third target sound corresponding to the first target image corresponding to the first presentation style, and the presentation style selected based on the operation received by the operation unit can be reset; when resetting the presentation style selected based on the operation received by the operation unit, the volume adjusted based on the operation received by the operation unit is not reset; when a display presentation is executed in which a first target image corresponding to the first presentation style and a third target image corresponding to a third presentation style not selected by the selection means are displayed on the display means in a presentation using a first presentation style selected by the selection means, the sound output means outputs a first target sound corresponding to the first presentation style; and when a display presentation is executed in which a second target image corresponding to the second presentation style and at least one of a first target image corresponding to the first presentation style not selected by the selection means and a third target image corresponding to the third presentation style not selected by the selection means are displayed on the display means in a presentation using a second presentation style selected by the selection means, the sound output means outputs a second target sound corresponding to the second presentation style .

One aspect of the present invention can increase the enjoyment of the game.

FIG. 2 is an oblique view of the gaming machine from the front side. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control system of a gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a presentation control system of a gaming machine. 1 is a flowchart (part 1) showing a procedure of a main process. 10 is a second flowchart illustrating the procedure of the main process. 10 is a flowchart (part 3) illustrating the procedure of the main process. A diagram showing the RAM configuration of a gaming microcomputer. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device information initialization process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a performance display editing process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an output process. A flowchart showing the steps of the prize slot switch/status monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fraud and winning monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the number of winnings counter. A flowchart showing the steps of the probability setting change/confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special game processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the start port switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for common processing of the special chart start port switch. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart reservation information determination process. A flowchart showing the steps of the large prize entrance switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a specific area switch monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for special chart normal processing. This is a flowchart showing the steps for the special chart 1 change start processing. A flowchart showing the steps for starting the special chart 2 change process. A flowchart showing the steps for setting the jackpot flag 1. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart 2 stop pattern setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of the fluctuation start information setting process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during special chart changes. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a time-saving end determination process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a time-saving end setting process. A flowchart showing the steps of the presentation mode information check process. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the first half of the processing during special chart display. This is a flowchart showing the steps of the latter half of the processing during special chart display. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1. This is a flowchart showing the steps for setting the transition to processing during small win fanfare. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for a support operation setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of the special chart normal processing transition setting process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing during a small win fanfare. This is a flowchart showing the steps for processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the steps for the small hit operation transition setting process. This is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing remaining balls in a small win. This is a flowchart showing the steps for small win end processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fanfare/interval processing. This is a flowchart showing the steps of processing while the large prize opening is open. A flowchart showing the procedure for processing remaining balls in the large prize slot. This is a flowchart showing the steps for processing the end of a jackpot. A flowchart showing the steps of the jackpot end setting process. This is a time chart showing how the presence or absence of time reduction (i.e., the presence or absence of normal power support) changes in the case of a small hit (a big hit with a +V prize). This is a time chart showing how the presence or absence of time reduction (i.e., the presence or absence of normal power support) changes in the case of a direct hit jackpot (a jackpot that does not go through a small hit). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for general game processing. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of an external information editing process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second half of the external information editing process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device-related process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an outside-area integration process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a test signal output process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a performance display device control process. A flowchart showing the steps of the difference ball confirmation process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for a safety device operation monitoring process. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing a received command check process. 10 is a flowchart showing a received command analysis process. 10 is a flowchart showing a single command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading symbol command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a look-ahead variation command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a pattern command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable command process. 10 is a flowchart showing a variable performance setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing a hit-related command. 10 is a table showing the state of a performance-related device according to the state of a safety device. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of hall/player setting mode processing executed by the effect control device of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the display device in the player setting mode of the second embodiment. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device of the second embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition when a reach effect develops into an SP2 reach during a variable display game. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device of the second embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition when the game state transitions from a jackpot game to a time-saving state (specific game state, time-saving mode). This is a timing chart showing when a preview effect (confrontation preview effect) occurs in the first half of the change during the change display game of the second embodiment. This is a timing chart when the second half of the second embodiment causes a reach effect and develops into an SP2 reach. This is a timing chart when a preview effect (confrontation preview effect) occurs in the first half of the change during the change display game in the time-saving state of the second embodiment. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device of the second embodiment in chronological order, and is a modified example of the screen transition when a preview effect occurs in the first half of the change in the change display game. FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the layers of the display screen of the display device of the second embodiment, in which the display screen of (U4) in FIG. 76 is displayed divided into layers. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the display device in the player setting mode of the third embodiment. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device of the third embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition when a reach effect develops into an SP2 reach during a variable display game. This is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device of the third embodiment in chronological order, and is a modified example of the screen transition when the reach effect develops into an SP2 reach during a variable display game. This is a table showing the relationship between the presentation style of the third embodiment and the presentation to be executed. A figure showing an example of a pre-reading notice type (pre-reading notice mode) in the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-reading notice allocation (selection) table according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing the steps of the variable performance setting process according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a distribution table illustrating distribution of change scenarios in normal mode in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a distribution table illustrating the distribution of change scenarios in a specific character waiting mode in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a distribution table illustrating the distribution of the performance parameter change mode (first half change mode) of the first half variable section in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a distribution table illustrating the distribution of the performance parameter change modes (second-half change modes) in the second-half variable section in normal mode in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a distribution table illustrating the distribution of the performance parameter change mode (second half change mode) in the second half variable section in the specific character waiting mode in the fourth embodiment. This is a time chart showing the changes in the presentation parameters and the occurrence of a predetermined display presentation (tiger cut-in notice (TC)) in the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing a time series of display screens of a display device in the fourth embodiment (part 1); 13 is an example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing display screens of the display device in chronological order in the fourth embodiment (Part 2); 13 is an example (example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing a time series of display screens of the display device in the fourth embodiment (part 3); 13 is an example (Example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing a time series of display screens of the display device in the fourth embodiment. 13 is an example (Example 3) of a screen transition diagram showing a time series of display screens of a display device in the fourth embodiment. A figure showing examples 1 and 2 of step-up preview performances related to the fourth embodiment. A figure illustrating a predetermined display effect (tiger cut-in notice (TC)) in the fourth embodiment. This is a timetable showing the progress of the pre-reading performance (pre-reading preview performance) according to the fourth embodiment.

[First embodiment]
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS Preferred embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. In the description of the gaming machine, the terms front, back, left and right refer to directions as seen by a player playing a game.

[Overall view of the gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 is equipped with an opening/closing frame that is attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via hinges 16 and can be rotated open and closed. The opening/closing frame is composed of a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15 (front frame unit). The left end of the opening/closing frame is the shaft-mounted end attached to the hinge, and the right end is the open end that opens when rotated. The frame 11 and front frame 12 form an outer frame unit 17.

The game board 30 (see Figure 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that allows the game area 32 (see Figure 2) formed on the game board 30 to be viewed. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14. The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds the transparent member.

The front frame 12 and glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. Furthermore, by opening the front frame 12 without opening the glass frame 15, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see Figure 3) and other devices located on the back side of the game board 30.

Various frame components are arranged around the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

Decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c that can emit light depending on the game status are arranged in the upper center and on the right and left sides of the glass frame 15. Decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c house lighting elements such as LEDs inside and are used to emit light depending on the game status. The lighting elements arranged inside these decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c form part of the frame decorative device 18 (see Figure 4).

The decorative device 18a is a top unit that extends from the left to the right of the gaming machine 10 above the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame) and protrudes diagonally upward toward the front. The decorative device 18a has a generally flat front surface 456 that bears various markings such as the model name. In this embodiment, the decorative device 18a is fixed and does not move, but to reduce the sense of oppression felt by the player, it may protrude from its retracted initial position (normal position) to a forward, upward, or diagonal operating position only when necessary, or move forward and backward or up and down. When the decorative device 18a (here, the top unit) operates (moves), it becomes a frame effect device (movable gadget) that can move from its initial position to an operating position.

Decorative device 18b is a protruding performance unit (front frame light-emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. Decorative device 18c is a protruding performance unit (front frame light-emitting unit) that extends vertically on the left side of glass frame 15 and protrudes forward. Decorative devices 18b and 18c emit light toward the player toward the center (inside) of gaming machine 10, and light leaks out of gaming machine 10 through multiple openings.

Upper speakers 19a are located in the upper right and upper left corners of the glass frame 15. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speakers 19b are located in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speakers 19a and lower speakers 19b emit sound effects, alarms, notification sounds, etc. The left and right upper speakers 19a are covered by right and left speaker decorative members 470, respectively.

Attached to the bottom of the glass frame 15 is an upper tray unit 20 having an upper tray 21 capable of storing gaming balls (gaming media). The upper tray 21 is formed in a box shape with an opening at the top. The gaming balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to the ball launcher.

The upper tray unit 20 further includes a performance operation device that accepts input operations from the player, a ball dispensing operation device that accepts input operations from the player, and a decorative device 22 that produces lighting effects and other effects depending on the game status.

The effect operation device is an operation device including the effect button 25, the cross key switch 450, and the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and is located at the top center and to the left of the upper tray unit 20 for easy operation by the player. The effect button 25 is placed within the opening of the operation panel 490 so that it is surrounded by the operation panel 490. The operation panel 490 is capable of reflecting light by metal plating its surface or being made entirely of metal, and has a metallic luster, for example, a silver (silver) color. When the effect button 25 emits light, the light from the effect button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 490, creating an effective light-emitting effect for the effect button 25.

The effect button 25 may include a built-in effect button switch 25a and a touch panel 25b provided on the surface.

The volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b are located on the upper left side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20 and are used to increase or decrease (+/-) the volume of the speakers 19 (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b). The cross key switch 450 (cross key SW) is located on the upper left side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20 adjacent to the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b and is used to adjust, for example, the brightness of the LEDs for effects. The cross key switch 450 may also be called a directional key switch and may be a general type consisting of multiple (e.g., four) switches arranged in the front, back, left, right, etc. For example, in a specified state, such as while waiting for customers and/or during play (game), the volume of the speaker 19 may be adjusted by pressing the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and the light intensity (brightness, luminance) of the LEDs for effects may be adjusted by pressing the switches in front of or behind the cross key switch 450. It is also possible to adjust the volume of the speaker 19 by pressing the left or right switch of the cross key switch 450, without providing the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b.

By operating the effect operation device (particularly the effect button 25), the player can intervene in effects such as the special symbol variable display game displayed on the display device 41 (see Figure 2), allowing for player interaction. For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a preview effect that foretells the outcome of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes the special symbol variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special symbol variable display game.

In addition, the presentation pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being played, but also when the game is not being played, by the player operating the presentation operation device.

The game state when a variable display game is executed consists of multiple game states. The normal game state (normal state) is a game state in which no special game state occurs. Special game states include, for example, a time-saving state as a specific game state, a state in which the probability of a special result (e.g., a jackpot) occurring in a variable display game is high (probability variable state, probability variable state), a jackpot state (special game state), and a small jackpot game state (small jackpot state). In this way, the gaming machine 10 has multiple game states with different probabilities of special results occurring, and the game control device 100 (game state selection means, setting means) can select (set) one game state from the multiple game states to set it as the current game state.

Here, the probability change state (specific game state) can be one that continues until the next jackpot occurs (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games have been played (number-stop type, ST), or one that continues until a predetermined probability of falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not a special state will occur may not be determined by the jackpot symbol random number, but may be set so that a special state will always occur when a jackpot occurs.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing gaming balls, and is located on the upper right side of the operation panel 490 of the upper tray unit 20. The ball lending operation device is equipped with a balance display unit 490a, a ball lending button 27, and a return button 28. The balance display unit 490a is a display area that displays the balance of a prepaid card, etc. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by a player when borrowing gaming balls, and the return button 28 is a button operated by a player when ejecting a prepaid card, etc. from a card unit (not shown) located adjacent to the gaming machine 10.

The decorative device 22 houses lighting components such as LEDs inside and is a device that provides lighting effects depending on the game status, and is installed on the upper tray unit 20. The lighting components arranged inside the decorative device 22 form part of the frame decoration device 18 (see Figure 4).

Below the glass frame 15 containing the above-mentioned upper tray unit 20, etc., and at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is provided an operating handle 24 for controlling the operation of the ball launcher (not shown), and a lower tray unit 29 containing a lower tray 23, etc., in which game balls can be stored. The lower tray unit 29 and the upper tray unit 20 are compatible in shape and are arranged side by side, stacked vertically. By operating the upper tray operating part 435 of the upper tray unit 20, game balls on the upper tray 21 can be caused to flow down to the lower tray 23.

The operating handle 24 is located at the bottom right of the front frame 12, below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball launcher launches game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game balls launched from the ball launcher is set to increase as the rotation amount of the operating handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launcher can change the launch force, which is the force (speed) with which the game balls are launched into the game area 32, in response to the player's operation of the operating handle 24, and can launch game balls in various launch modes with different launch forces. Launch modes include a left hit (normal hit), in which the game balls flow down the left side of the game area 32, and a right hit, in which the game balls flow down the right side of the game area 32.

The lower tray 23 of the lower tray unit 29 is positioned below the upper tray unit 20 at a predetermined distance. The lower tray 23 has a ball ejection hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower tray 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball ejection hole 23a. By operating the opening/closing operation part 23b to open the ball ejection hole 23a, the player can eject the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 to the outside through the ball ejection hole 23a.

Also located behind the front frame 12 are a power supply unit 400 that supplies power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed on the island equipment, and a payout device (payout unit) that pays out game balls that flow down from the upper tank 448 onto the upper tray 21.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 30 comprises a flat gaming board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various components. The gaming board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a gaming area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front of the gaming board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured so that games are played by launching gaming balls from a ball launcher into the gaming area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31. The gaming area 32 is equipped with windmills, obstacle spikes, and other components that change the flow direction of the gaming balls, and the launched gaming balls flow down the gaming area 32 while changing their rolling direction due to these components.

Attached approximately in the center of the play area 32 is a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as the display area for the variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40 is a display device 41 that serves as a performance display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) multiple pieces of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, an LCD display, and is positioned so that the display content can be seen from the front side of the play board 30 through the window in the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to one that includes an LCD display, and may also include a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 has multiple variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that create the variable display game. In addition, the display screen displays images based on the progress of the game (jackpot display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.).

The center case 40 also has an inlet 40a to a warp passage 40e that guides game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the inside of the center case 40, and a stage section 40b on which game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. The stage section 40b of the center case 40 is located above the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, making it easier for game balls rolling on the stage section 40b to win the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37.

An upper performance unit 40c and a side performance unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper performance unit 40c and the side performance unit 40d form part of the board decoration device 46 (see Figure 4) and the board performance device 44 (see Figure 4).

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal symbol start gate 34 is a gate switch (SW) 34a (see Figure 3) for detecting game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start gate 34. When a game ball shot into the game area 32 passes through the normal symbol start gate 34, a normal symbol change display game is executed.

A general prize opening 35 (general prize area) is located in the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, and another general prize opening 35 is located in the game area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. The entry of game balls into these general prize openings 35 is detected by prize opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see Figure 3) provided on the general prize openings 35.

A start winning port (start winning port 1, first start winning area) 36 is provided in the game area 32 below the center case 40, which sets the conditions for starting the special symbol variable display game. In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric device, normal electric) equipped with a second start winning port (start winning port 2, second start winning area) is provided below the normal symbol start gate 34. The normal variable winning device 37 is equipped with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that rotates forward to change the state to make it easier for game balls to flow in. When the movable member 37b is in a closed state, game balls cannot win in the normal variable winning device 37. When a game ball wins the start winning port 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, the special symbol variable display game is played as an auxiliary game. Furthermore, game balls are more likely to enter the starting winning slot 36 when hit from the left, and game balls are more likely to enter the normal variable winning device 37 when hit from the right.

Moveable member 37b is a so-called tongue-type normal electric device that opens via normal solenoid 37c (see Figure 3) when the result of the normal variable display game reaches a predetermined stop display mode, changing to an open state (an easy-to-win state that is advantageous to the player) that makes it easier for game balls to flow into normal variable winning device 37. When movable member 37b is not in the open state (easy-to-win state), it changes to a closed state (a non-easy-to-win state, a difficult-to-win state) that makes it difficult for game balls to flow into normal variable winning device 37. Note that in this embodiment, unlike normal variable winning device 37, starting winning port 36 does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state), although a configuration with a movable member (opening/closing member) is also possible.

Moving member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100, which will be described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game or by making the winning probability of the normal map fluctuation display game higher than normal, or by lengthening the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state compared to the easy-to-win state that occurs in normal gameplay when no special play is performed, thereby generating the time-saving state (normal power support state) as the specific game state mentioned above. Note that the time-saving state (normal power support state) also occurs overlappingly in the probability variable state (excluding the latent probability variable state).

The game area 32 to the right of the starting prize opening 36 is equipped with a first special variable prize opening device 38 (special electric device) having an opening/closing door 38c that opens the lower large prize opening (lower large prize opening area) by retracting from the front to the back using a lower large prize opening solenoid 38b (see Figure 3). The first special variable prize opening device 38 converts the large prize opening from a closed state (a blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a game state advantageous to the player) based on the results of the special symbol variable display game, facilitating the flow of game balls into the lower large prize opening, thereby awarding the player a predetermined game value (e.g., prize balls or the number of time-saving/probable-change events after a jackpot). A lower large prize opening switch 38a (count switch) is provided within the lower large prize opening as a detection means for detecting game balls that enter the large prize opening. In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is more likely to have the game ball win when hit from the right.

Located in the game area 32 below the normal variable prize winning device 37 is a second special variable prize winning device 39. The second special variable prize winning device 39 has an opening/closing door 39c that opens the upper large prize winning port (upper large prize winning area) by pivoting its upper end to the right using an upper large prize winning port solenoid 39b (see Figure 3). Based on the results of the special variable prize display game, the second special variable prize winning device 39 converts the large prize winning port from a closed state (a blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player), facilitating the flow of game balls into the large prize winning port, thereby awarding the player a predetermined game value (e.g., prize balls or the number of time-saving/probable-change events after a jackpot). An upper large prize winning port switch 39a (count switch) (see Figure 3) is provided within the large prize winning port as a detection means for detecting game balls that enter the large prize winning port. In addition, the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for game balls to win when hit from the right. The lower large winning slot switch 38a and the upper large winning slot switch 39a are collectively referred to as the large winning slot switch 43.

A specific area 86 (so-called V entry port) is provided inside the second special variable winning device 39. A big win is confirmed when a gaming ball enters the specific area 86 (V entry port, V entry area) after the opening/closing door 39c is opened by a small win. The specific area 86 may be open for a long period of time only during a small win, allowing gaming balls to pass through easily. The gaming control device 100 can detect the passage of a gaming ball into the specific area 86 (V entry) via a sensor (specific area switch 72 described below), etc., and upon detecting a V entry, it determines that a transition to a big win state (V entry big win state) will occur after the small win ends, and sends information indicating a V entry (such as a specific area passage command) to the presentation control device 300 described below. The presentation control device 300 can then report the V entry on the display device 41, etc.

In other words, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called Type 1/Type 2 hybrid machine (Type 1+2 machine). In this embodiment, when a small win opens the second special variable winning device 39, the gaming ball V-enters a specific area 86 (V winning hole) within the second special variable winning device 39, resulting in a big win.

When a gaming ball enters a large winning slot of the general winning slot 35, the starting winning slot 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, the payout control device 200 (see Figure 3) discharges a number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning slot from the payout device to the upper tray 21. The lower gaming area 32 also has an outlet 30b for collecting gaming balls that do not enter a winning slot. The general winning slot 35, the starting winning slot 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39, or their vicinity, are also equipped with LEDs (part of the board decoration device 46, described below) that can emit light when a gaming ball enters a winning slot.

In addition, outside the play area 32, in the lower right corner of the playboard main body 30a, there is a collective display device 50 that runs the special chart change display game (special chart 1 change display game, special chart 2 change display game) and the regular chart change display game. The collective display device 50 is equipped with display units 51-60 made up of LED lamps (light-emitting units, light-emitting members) that display information such as the current game status.

The collective display device 50 has a first special chart change display unit 51 (special chart 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special chart change display unit 52 (special chart 2 display, lamp D2) for the change display game, which are composed of 7-segment displays (LED lamps), a change display unit 53 (normal chart display, lamps D8, D10, D18) for the normal chart change display game, and memory display units (special chart 1 hold display 54, special chart 2 hold display 55, normal chart hold display 56) for notifying the start (hold) memory number of each change display game. The special chart 1 hold display 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special chart 2 hold display 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The normal chart hold display 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

The collective display device 50 also has a first game status display unit 57 (first game status indicator, lamp D7) that indicates whether it is a right-hand hit (when a right-hand hit is required) or a left-hand hit (when a normal hit is required), a second game status display unit 58 (second game status indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when a time-saving state is activated to indicate the occurrence of the time-saving state, a third game status display unit 59 (third game status indicator, probability status display unit, lamp D9) that indicates that the probability state for a jackpot is high when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, and a round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D6) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable prize-winning devices 38, 39 are opened and closed, and the upper limit of the number of rounds).

In the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display that repeatedly turns on and off (flashes) the identification information (e.g., the center segment). Note that the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 are not limited to such segment-type displays, and may be composed of a collection of multiple LEDs. When executing the variable display, all LEDs provided as the display may be turned on and off (all LEDs flashing simultaneously), or may be circulating (starting with any one LED turning on and off in a predetermined sequence at predetermined intervals), or a predetermined number of LEDs among the multiple LEDs may be turned on and off (flashes) or circulate. In the normal chart display 53, the variable display game is also executed by a variable display (flashes) that repeatedly turns on and off lamps D10 and D18. The normal chart display 53 can also be configured appropriately in the same way as the special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52.

The lamp display device 80 has lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform variable display (flashing) by repeatedly turning on and off the symbols (the fourth special symbol and fourth symbol described below), and lamp display units 3-6 (LEDs) that notify the start (hold) and number of memories for each special symbol variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the performance control device 300 (described below).

Lamp display units 1 and 2 flash at a predetermined flashing cycle (e.g., 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. In other words, lamp display units 1 and 2 switch between turning on and off at half the flashing cycle (e.g., 100 msec). While the fluctuation time of the variable displays on special chart 1 display unit 51, special chart 2 display unit 52, and regular chart display unit 53 of the collective display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the fluctuation time of lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 is measured by the performance control device 300 (described below).

Lamp displays 3 and 4 (Special Chart 1 Pending LED 1, Special Chart 1 Pending LED 2) display the number of Special Chart 1 pending (first start memory number) through a combination of off, on, and flashing states. Similarly, lamp displays 5 and 6 (Special Chart 2 Pending LED 1, Special Chart 2 Pending LED 2) display the number of Special Chart 2 pending (second start memory number) through a combination of off, on, and flashing states. Lamp displays 3-6 stop displaying the pending number when a jackpot occurs, but continue to display the pending number when not in a jackpot state (including when a reach, as described below, occurs on display device 41).

Next, we will explain the game flow on the gaming machine 10, as well as details of the regular chart change display game and the special chart change display game.

In gaming machine 10, games are played by launching gaming balls from a ball launcher (not shown) toward gaming area 32. The launched gaming balls flow down gaming area 32, changing their rolling direction due to obstacles and windmills placed throughout gaming area 32, and either win or enter a normal start gate 34, a normal winning opening 35, a start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, or flow into outlet 30b located at the bottom of gaming area 32 and are discharged from gaming area 32. When a gaming ball wins a normal winning opening 35, a start winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, or a special variable winning device 38, 39, a number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning opening are discharged into upper tray 21 via a payout device.

The normal map start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see Figure 3) that detects game balls that have passed through the normal map start gate 34. When a game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and a normal map variation display game is executed based on the result of the random number value for winning determination extracted at this time.

When the normal map variation display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variation display game is already being played and has not finished, or when the normal map variation display game has resulted in a win and the normal variation winning device 37 has been converted to an open state, if the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 34, and the normal map start memory number (normal map reserve number) is less than the upper limit, the memory number will be incremented (+1).

The normal map start memory (normal map reserve) stores a random number value for determining whether the normal map fluctuation display game is a win or a loss. If this random number value for determining whether the game is a win or a loss matches the judgment value, the normal map fluctuation display game is a win and a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The normal map variation display game is executed on the normal map display device 53 provided on the collective display device 50. The normal map display device 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a win when lit as normal identification information (normal map) and a loss when unlit; the LED flashes to display variations in the normal identification information, and after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed, the LED is turned on or off to display the result.

If the normal symbol random number value extracted when passing through the normal symbol start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol (normal symbol) displayed on the normal symbol display 53 stops in a winning state, indicating a winning state. At this time, the normal symbol solenoid 37c (see Figure 3) is driven, converting the movable member 37b to an open state for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds x 2 times), allowing the game ball to enter the normal variable winning device 37.

The entry of game balls into the start entry slot 36 and the entry of game balls into the normal variable entry device 37 are detected by the start entry slot 1 switch 36a (see Figure 3) and the start entry slot 2 switch 37a (see Figure 3). Game balls that enter the start entry slot 36 are detected as start entry balls for the special chart 1 variable display game and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit, while game balls that enter the normal variable entry device 37 are detected as start entry balls for the special chart 2 variable display game and are stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

When the starting winning ball of the special symbol variation display game is detected, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random number value, the random number values for each variation pattern, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored a predetermined number of times (for example, up to a maximum of eight times) as special symbol starting winning memories in the special symbol reserve memory area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100. The number of special symbol starting winning memories stored is displayed on the special symbol 1 reserve indicator 54 and the special symbol 2 reserve indicator 55, which are used to notify the number of starting winnings on the collective display device 50, and is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

The gaming control device 100 executes a special symbol 1 variable display game on the special symbol 1 display 51 based on a win in the start winning slot 36 or the first start memory (special symbol 1 start memory, special symbol 1 reserve). The gaming control device 100 also executes a special symbol 2 variable display game on the special symbol 2 display 52 based on a win in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second start memory (special symbol 2 start memory, special symbol 2 reserve).

The special symbol 1 variable display game (first special symbol variable display game) and the special symbol 2 variable display game (second special symbol variable display game) are played by displaying the identification information (special symbol, special symbol) on the special symbol 1 display 51 and the special symbol 2 display 52 in a variable manner, followed by a fixed display of a predetermined result pattern.

In addition, the display device 41 runs a decorative special symbol variable display game that displays multiple types of identification information (e.g., numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner corresponding to each special symbol variable display game.

The decorative special symbol variation display game on display device 41 begins by displaying (scrolling) the decorative special symbols (identification information, decorative special symbols) composed of the aforementioned numbers and other elements in the order of left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and center (third special symbol). After a predetermined time, the varying symbols are stopped sequentially to display the results of the special symbol variation display game. Display device 41 also displays a variety of effects, such as the appearance of characters, to enhance entertainment value. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variation display game, another decorative special symbol (identification information) is the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol), which varies by repeatedly turning on and off (flashing) in lamp display units 1 and 2 of lamp display device 80. After a predetermined time from the start of the display, the varying display on lamp display units 1 and 2 stops at "off" if there is a miss, or "on" if there is a big win or small win.

When a game ball enters the start entry slot 36 or the normal variable entry device 37 at the specified timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of entry detection is a jackpot value), a specific result state (special result state) is derived from the displayed symbols as the result of the special symbol variable display game, and a jackpot state (special game state) is entered. Correspondingly, the display state of the display device 41 becomes a special result state (for example, a state in which the numbers "7, 7, 7" are lined up).

At this time, the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 convert the large prize opening from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) by energizing the large prize opening solenoid (38b, 39b) (see Figure 3). In other words, the large prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 opens wide for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls have entered, granting the player the privilege of winning many game balls during this time.

When a game ball enters the first start entry slot 36 or the normal variable entry device 37 at the specified timing (when the jackpot random number value at the time of entry detection is a small jackpot value), a specific result mode (small jackpot result mode) is derived from the displayed symbols as the result of the special symbol variable display game, and a small jackpot state is reached. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes the small jackpot result mode. Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a small jackpot, but the small jackpot value (small jackpot determination value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot determination value).

At this time, the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 convert the large prize opening from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined short period of time by energizing the large prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b (see Figure 3). Note that the full open time of the large prize opening is shorter in the small win state (small win game state) than in the big win state (special game state), so the player can acquire less game value (number of balls acquired) in the small win state than in the big win state. Note that while the large prize opening is open in both the small win state and the big win state, the big win state may be referred to as the first special game state, and the small win state as the second special game state. For simplicity, this embodiment describes a configuration in which only the special variable prize winning device 39 (upper large prize opening) is converted to an open state in the small win state, and only the special variable prize winning device 38 (lower large prize opening) is converted to an open state in the big win state (including the big win state due to V entry during a small win).

Here, we will explain the difference between a big hit and a small hit.

A jackpot is a special result that accompanies the activation of a conditional device, while a small jackpot is a specific result that does not accompany the activation of a conditional device. The conditional device is activated when a jackpot occurs in a special variable display game (when the jackpot symbol stops displaying). The activation of the conditional device means, for example, that a jackpot state occurs and a specific flag is set to activate the special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39, which are special electric devices. The activation of the conditional device may also mean that a game ball has passed through the specific area 86 (V prize). The non-activation of the conditional device means that the specific flag described above is not set, for example, when a small jackpot lottery is won. However, as described later in this embodiment, the conditional device will be activated if a V prize occurs during a small jackpot state. The "conditional device" may be a software means, such as a flag that is turned on and off by software, or a hardware means, such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Furthermore, the term "conditioning device" is commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines to refer to a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of an electric device, and is used in this specification as a term with the same meaning.

Specifically, in the case of a big win, the big win flag is set and the special variable prize winning device is opened, whereas in the case of a small win, the small win flag is set and the special variable prize winning device is opened.

The special chart 1 display 51 and the special chart 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or as the same display, but are set so that the special chart change display games are not executed simultaneously. The special chart 2 change display game is executed with priority over the special chart 1 change display game, and there is a start memory for the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game. When the special chart change display game is ready to be executed, the special chart 2 change display game is executed (special chart 2 reserved consumption priority, special chart 2 change priority).

With regard to the decorative special chart change display game on the display device 41, the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or may be executed on the same display device or display area. In this case, the decorative special chart change display games corresponding to the special chart 1 change display game and the special chart 2 change display game may not be executed simultaneously.

In the following explanation, when there is no distinction between the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game, they will simply be referred to as the special chart variable display game.

In addition, although not limited to these, the start slot 1 switch 36a in the start slot 36, the start slot 2 switch 37a in the normal variable slot 37, the gate switch 34a, the slot switch 35a, and the count switches (38a, 39a) use non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) that have a magnetic detection coil and detect game balls by utilizing the phenomenon in which the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. In addition, microswitches with mechanical contacts can be used for the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, etc., and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12, etc.

[Game control device]
3 is a block diagram of the gaming control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is equipped with a gaming control device 100 (main board), which is a main control device (main board) that controls the overall game, and is composed of a CPU section 110 having a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111, an input section 120 having input ports, an output section 130 having output ports, drivers, etc., and a data bus 140 that connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130.

The CPU section 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111, also known as an amusement chip (IC), and an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113, which is equipped with an oscillator such as a quartz crystal resonator and generates the CPU's operating clock, timer interrupts, and the clock that serves as the reference for the random number generation circuit. The gaming control device 100 and electronic components driven by the gaming control device 100, such as solenoids and motors, are powered by a DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as DC 32V, DC 12V, or DC 5V, generated by the power supply unit 400, enabling them to operate.

The power supply unit 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 that includes an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power supply and a DC-DC converter that generates lower level DC voltages such as DC 12V or DC 5V from DC 32V; a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power outage; and a control signal generation unit 430 that includes a power outage monitoring circuit and generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and control signal generation unit 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrated with the game control device 100, i.e., on the main board. Since the game board 30 and game control device 100 are subject to replacement when changing models, by providing the backup power supply unit 420 and control signal generation unit 430 on a board separate from the power supply unit 400 or the main board, as in this embodiment, they are not subject to replacement, thereby reducing costs.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of a single large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control device 100, so that data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the 32V voltage generated by the normal power supply unit 410, and if it drops below 17V, for example, detects a power outage and changes the power outage monitoring signal, while outputting a reset signal after a predetermined time has passed. It also outputs a reset signal after a predetermined time has passed from the time the power is turned on or when the power is restored.

The gaming control device 100 is also provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process is performed to forcibly initialize the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Although not limited to this, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power outage monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game control device 100 (main board) also includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93, when turned on by the operator through a rotation operation or the like, enables the probability setting value (setting value) corresponding to the settings related to the game conditions (game) to be changed. The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value in response to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the probability of winning, such as the probability of a big win or a small win. However, other game conditions (such as effects) other than probability can also be changed according to the probability setting value. For example, the higher the probability setting value, the higher the probability of winning. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting change means (setting change device 42, setting means) that can change the settings related to the game conditions (probability setting value). Instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the setting value change switch, or a dedicated setting value change switch may be provided.

The setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are located on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, and are therefore positioned in an inaccessible position where they cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. In other words, ordinary players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (recovered from a power outage, power restored), the gaming machine 10 can transition to various states, such as a setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed (set), and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, depending on the on/off state of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112.

In this embodiment, the probability setting values are defined in six stages, for example: probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the setting that is most unfavorable to the player, and setting 6 is the setting that is most favorable to the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

During the probability setting change process, each time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the working setting value (setting) in the working setting value area is changed as follows: setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2, probability setting value 2) → setting value 2 (setting 3, probability setting value 3) → setting value 3 (setting 4, probability setting value 4) → setting value 4 (setting 5, probability setting value 5) → setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6) → setting value 0 (setting 1) → setting value 1 (setting 2) → ... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, during the setting change state (setting change mode), working setting values 0-5 are set to correspond to probability setting values 1-6, respectively; however, the working setting values and probability setting values may be treated as the same by aligning them to the same numerical range (i.e., 0-5 or 1-6) (making the working setting value and probability setting value the same numerical value).

In addition, instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position. The probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected working setting value of 0 to 5 is displayed on the performance display device 152, which is, for example, a four-digit, seven-segment display (eight-segment display including the dot Dp). Information about setting values such as the display probability setting value (for example, a display that can read probability setting values 1 to 6) may also be displayed on the front of the gaming machine (for example, the collective display device 50). Information about setting values such as the display probability setting value may also be displayed on the front of the gaming machine (for example, the collective display device 50) not only during the setting variable state or setting confirmation state, but also during game control execution (during execution of the game processing described below).

The gaming microcomputer 111 is equipped with a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

ROM 111b stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) in a non-volatile manner. RAM 111c is used as a working area for CPU 111a during game control and as a storage area for various signals and random numbers. It stores information related to games (game information) and serves as a storage means that can retain stored information even in the event of a power outage. ROM 111b or RAM 111c may be an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM.

ROM 111b also stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that stipulates, for example, the execution time of the special chart variation display game, the presentation content, and whether or not a reach state occurs. The variation pattern table is a table that CPU 111a uses to determine a variation pattern by referencing variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start memory. The variation pattern table also includes a miss variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a miss, and a jackpot variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot. These pattern tables also include tables (such as a second-half variation group table and a second-half variation pattern selection table) for determining second-half variation patterns, which are variation patterns after a reach state is reached, and tables (such as a first-half variation group table and a first-half variation pattern selection table) for determining first-half variation patterns, which are variation patterns before a reach state is reached.

Here, "reach" (reach state) refers to a display state in a gaming machine 10 that has a display device with a variable display state, which derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and in which the gaming state becomes advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the multiple display results become a predetermined special result pattern. This state refers to a display state in which the display results already derived and displayed satisfy the conditions for becoming a special result pattern, even when some of the multiple display results have not yet been derived and displayed. Alternatively, a "reach state" refers to a display state in which the display device's variable display control has progressed to a stage just before the display results are derived and displayed, but still meets the display conditions for becoming a special result pattern. For example, a "reach state" also includes a state in which multiple variable display areas are displayed while maintaining a set of special result patterns (a so-called "full rotation reach"). Additionally, a reach state refers to the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to a stage just before the display result is derived and displayed, and when at least some of the display results of the multiple variable display areas determined before the display result is derived and displayed meet the conditions for a special result mode.

So, for example, if a decorative special symbol variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special symbol variable display game displays multiple identification information for a predetermined period of time in each of the left, center, and right variable display areas on the display device, and then stops the display in the order of left, right, and center to display the result state, the reach state will be a state in which the left and right variable display areas stop displaying the information when the conditions for a special result state are met (for example, the same identification information) in the left and right variable display areas. Alternatively, once the display of all variable display areas has been stopped, the reach state may be a state in which the conditions for a special result state are met in any two of the left, center, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information, excluding the special result state), and the remaining variable display area may be displayed from the reach state.

The reach state includes multiple reach effects, and the reach effects have different possibilities (different expectations) for leading to a special result mode (jackpot mode), and are classified as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premium reach. The expectation (expectation, expected value) for a jackpot increases in the following order: no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach < premium reach. The reach state is included in the variable display modes when a special result mode is derived (a jackpot occurs) at least in the special chart variable display game. In other words, it may also be included in the variable display modes when it is determined that a special result mode will not be derived in the special chart variable display game (a miss occurs). Therefore, a state in which a reach state has occurred is more likely to result in a jackpot than when a reach state does not occur.

The expected degree (expectation) of a presentation (notice) indicates the probability of a jackpot if that presentation is selected, and can be calculated based on the selection rate of that presentation when there is a jackpot and the selection rate of that presentation when there is no jackpot (when there is a miss).

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoids and display devices, thereby controlling the entire gaming machine 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is equipped with a random number generation circuit for generating a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in the special symbol variable display game, a special symbol pattern random number for determining a jackpot pattern (a symbol that stops for a jackpot), a small symbol (a symbol that stops for a small symbol), and a time-saving symbol (a symbol that stops for a support hit, a symbol that stops for a support hit), and a variable pattern random number for determining a variable pattern in the special symbol variable display game (including the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display of various reaches and no reaches), and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that provides update timing for the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.

In addition, in processing related to the special chart variation display game, CPU 111a acquires one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b. Specifically, CPU 111a selects and acquires one of the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the game result of the special chart variation display game (jackpot or loss), the probability state of the special chart variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the number of start memories, etc. Here, when playing the special chart variation display game, CPU 111a serves as a variation allocation information acquisition means that acquires one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111b.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and controls the drive of the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to pay out prize balls in accordance with prize ball payout commands (commands and data) from the game control device 100. The payout control device 200 also controls the drive of the payout motor 91 of the payout unit to pay out prize balls based on a ball loan request signal from the card unit 600.

The input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 is connected to a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) that detects radio waves emitted to the gaming machine, the gate switch 34a of the normal start gate 34, the start gate 1 switch 36a in the first start entry gate 36, the start gate 2 switch 37a in the second start entry gate 37 (normal variable entry device), the entry gate switch 35a of the normal entry gate 35, and the large entry gate switches 43 (lower large entry gate switch 38a, upper large entry gate switch 39a) of the special variable entry devices 38, 39. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided that receives negative logic signals, such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V, supplied from these switches and converts them into positive logic signals of 0V-5V.

Furthermore, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball outlet switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects the passage (V entry) of a game ball into the specific area 86 (V entry port). The remaining ball outlet switch 73 detects game balls that have passed through the remaining ball outlet, which discharges game balls from the special variable entry devices 38, 39. The out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls that have been launched into the game area and have finished playing (i.e., all game balls that have passed through the entry port or out port 30b).

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the prize port switch 35a, and the large prize port switch 43 are input to the third input port 124.

Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in the sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, remaining ball outlet switch 73, or out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

In addition, the second input port 123 receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud, which is provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10; a signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10; a signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) or the like; and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibrations of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, the second input port 123 receives a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Furthermore, of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As mentioned above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. To enable this level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply unit 400 in addition to the voltage, such as 5 V, required for normal IC operation.

The data held in the third input port 124 can be read by the gaming microcontroller 111 asserting (changing to an active level) the enable signal CE2 by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 (described below).

The input unit 120 also has a first input port 122 that receives signals output from the payout control device 200, such as an invalid frame radio signal, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, an overflow switch signal indicating an overflow, a touch switch signal based on input from a touch switch provided on the operating handle 24, and a signal from the RAM initialization switch 112, and supplies these signals to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the lower tray 23 has more than a predetermined amount of game balls stored therein (is full). The invalid frame radio signal is a signal that is output when a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main frame) detects radio waves, and the payout busy signal is a signal that indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands.

The input unit 120 is also provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply unit 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc. The Schmitt buffer 125 has the function of removing noise from these input signals. The power outage monitoring signal from the power supply unit 400 is first input to the first input port 122 and then taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches mentioned above. This is because there are restrictions on the number of terminals on the gaming microcomputer 111 that can receive external signals.

Meanwhile, the reset signal RST, from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125, is input directly to the reset terminal provided on the gaming microcontroller 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Furthermore, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test firing signal held in a port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing device.

The reset signal RST may also be configured to be output to the test firing device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set by the gaming microcomputer 111 to each port of the output unit 130 immediately before the reset signal RST is received must be reset to prevent system malfunction, but the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is received is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the presentation control device 300 and the communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is sent from the gaming control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 and the payout control device 200 via serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication, preventing signals from being input from the presentation control device 300 to the gaming control device 100.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is configured to be able to mount a buffer 133 that is connected to the data bus 140 and outputs data informing the certification agency's test firing device (not shown) of special symbol information for the variable display game, signals indicating the probability of a jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the actual pachinko gaming machine (mass-produced product) installed in an amusement parlor. Note that detection signals from switches that do not require processing, such as the start switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 are supplied to the test firing device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied directly to the test firing device, such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and radio wave sensor 62, are first taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, and then supplied to the test firing device from the data bus 140 via the buffer 133 and relay board 70 as an error signal indicating, for example, that the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot be controlled.

The relay board 70 is also provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing device, as well as a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without passing through the buffer. The port on the relay board 70 is also supplied with the chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111, and the signal from the port selected and controlled by this signal CE is supplied to the test firing device.

The output unit 130 also has a second output port 134 for outputting opening/closing data for the solenoid (normal solenoid) 37c connected to the data bus 140 and opening the normal variable prize winning device 37, the lower large prize winning port solenoid 38b (large prize winning port solenoid 1) opening the first special variable prize winning device 38, the upper large prize winning port solenoid 39b (large prize winning port solenoid 2) opening the second special variable prize winning device 39, and the lever solenoid 86b operating the lever to open the specific area 86.

The output unit 130 also has a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data for the segment lines to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected, depending on the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50, and a fourth output port 136 for outputting on/off data for the digit lines to which the cathode terminals of the LEDs of the collective display device 50 are connected.

The output unit 130 also has a sixth output port 141 for outputting on/off data for the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected, depending on the content to be displayed on the performance display device 152, and a seventh output port 142 for outputting on/off data for the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the performance display device 152 is connected.

The output unit 130 also has a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10, such as jackpot information, to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is equipped with a photorelay and can be connected to an external device installed in the gaming facility (such as an information collection terminal or an internal gaming facility management device (hall computer)), so that information about the gaming machine 10 can be supplied to the external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a launch permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

The output unit 130 further includes a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals from the regular solenoid 37c and the special prize slot solenoids 38b and 39b output from the second output port 134, generates and outputs solenoid drive signals, a second driver 138b that outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment lines on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, a third driver 138c that outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit lines on the current draw side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71 to be supplied to an external device such as a management device.

Furthermore, the output section 130 is provided with a performance display segment driver 150a that outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the performance display device 152 output from the sixth output port 141, and a performance display digit driver 150b that outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current sink side of the performance display device 152 output from the seventh output port 142.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply unit 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The second driver 138b, which drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50, is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to the display data, so the power supply voltage can be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b, which outputs 12V, injects current into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c, which outputs ground potential, extracts current from the cathode terminal via the digit line, allowing power supply voltage to flow through the LEDs selected sequentially by dynamic drive in the collective display device 50, lighting them up. The performance display segment driver 150a, which outputs 12V, injects current into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the performance display digit driver 150b, which outputs ground potential, extracts current from the cathode terminal via the digit line, allowing power supply voltage to flow through the LEDs selected sequentially by dynamic drive in the performance display device 152, lighting them up. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs an external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a 12V level. The buffer 133, second output port 134, first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, i.e., on the relay board 70 side, rather than on the main board.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to enable two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data via serial communication with the inspection device 500. Note that this data transmission and reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111, just like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore no ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are provided.

In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 consists of multiple (four) 7-segment (8-segment including dot Dp) displays (LED lamps), and the performance display drivers 150a and 150b are LED drivers, but this is not limited to this.

The performance display device 152 is installed on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be installed elsewhere. For example, the performance display device 152 can display the display probability setting value, the ratio of special features, the payout rate, and the number of balls dispensed.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls), and is the sum of the number of game balls that passed through the winning opening (number of winnings) and the number of game balls that passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls can be obtained by counting signals from the out ball detection switch 74, etc. In this embodiment, the winning openings include the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start opening 1), the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start opening 2), and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (large winning openings).

The payout rate is the ratio (proportion) of the total number of prize balls to the number of dispensed balls (or the number of shot balls introduced into the play area 32), and is calculated as (number of acquired balls ÷ number of dispensed balls) x 100 (%). In other words, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls (total number of prize balls) per 100 dispensed balls.

For example, the role ratio is the percentage (%) (= so-called continuous role ratio) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by each role) acquired by winning a large prize slot during a jackpot state out of the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) acquired by winning a prize slot during a specified period (e.g., from when the gaming machine 10 was powered on to the present). The role ratio may also be the percentage (= large prize slot ratio) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot (during a jackpot state and a small prize state) out of the total number of prize balls, or it may also be the percentage (= commonly used role ratio (total role ratio)) of the number of prize balls acquired by winning a large prize slot and a regular variable prize slot 37 (second start prize slot).

The game control device 100 also functions as a safety device. The safety device is a game stopping means (stopping means) that, when activation conditions (predetermined conditions) based on the number of safe balls and the number of ejected balls are met, can generate a game stop state (a state where play is not possible, a state where play is prohibited) in which games such as the special symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, and round play (play during a big win or small win) cannot be played. In the game stop state, new special symbol variation display games and new normal symbol variation display games cannot be started. The safety device can take appropriate countermeasures against fraud in cases where the number of safe balls is abnormally high due to fraud, and may also be able to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. When addiction is reduced, players can play with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the safety device is a function implemented by software (program) in the game control device 100, and is also called a complete function (or ending function, stop function). Of course, the safety device may also be provided as hardware such as an electrical circuit or circuit board.

In this embodiment, the activation conditions for the safety device are (1) the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls reaches a ball difference reference value (a predetermined value), and (2) neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot is occurring. The difference is calculated by subtracting the number of discharged balls from the number of safe balls (difference in balls = number of safe balls - number of discharged balls). Thus, the activation conditions for the safety device consist of two conditions (1) and (2). As primarily described in this embodiment, the difference in balls for condition (1) can be simply the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of discharged balls from the time of power-on to the present, with the value at zero at the time of power-on. However, the difference in balls for condition (1) can be the difference in balls over a predetermined period from the time of the lowest difference in balls to the present, i.e., the difference in balls based on the minimum value (the increase in the number of balls from the minimum value), or it can correspond to the maximum increase in the difference in balls during a single day of operation (so-called MY). Other activation conditions are also possible. For example, condition (1) can be configured as the number of safe balls reaching a predetermined value. Condition (2) can also be configured to mean that the special variable prize device is not operating, or that the large prize opening is not open.

In this embodiment, the number of safe balls is the total number of prize balls (number of acquired balls, number of paid balls) that have been determined to be paid out during a specified period (for example, the period from when the power is turned on to the present). If there is an error in the payment of prize balls (game balls), the total number of prize balls that have been determined to be paid out will not be equal to the total number of prize balls that have actually been paid out to the upper tray 21 via the payout device; however, the total number of prize balls that have actually been paid out can be measured using a detection switch or the like and used as the number of safe balls. In addition, the number of discharged balls (number of out balls) is the number of game balls that have been discharged from the game area 32 during a specified period, and can be counted by counting the signal from the out ball detection switch 74.

In addition, the number of fired balls, which is the number of fired balls that were fired and introduced into the play area 32, may be used instead of the number of ejected balls, and the difference in the number of fired balls may be calculated as the number of safe balls minus the number of fired balls. The number of fired game balls and the number of ejected balls may be collectively referred to as the number of used balls (difference in the number of used balls = number of safe balls - number of used balls). Foul balls that were fired by the ball launcher but did not reach the play area 32 are excluded from the number of fired balls, and the difference in the number of used balls is decremented by -1 for each game ball fired by the ball launcher and incremented by +1 for each foul ball. A detection switch (detection sensor) for counting the number of fired balls may be provided at the entrance of the game balls to the play area 32, i.e., near the top end of the guide path for launched game balls on the game board 30.

[Performance control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram of the effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The performance control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311, which is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111; a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312, which acts as a graphics processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311; and a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output to play various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 19.

Connected to the main control microcomputer 311 are program ROM 321, which consists of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, RAM 322, which provides a working area, FeRAM 323, which can retain stored contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage, and RTC (real-time clock) 338, which serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.). The main control microcomputer 311 also has an internal RAM that provides a working area.

The main control microcomputer 311 is also connected to a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the display content, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, as well as instructing the sound source LSI 314 on the sound to be played, turning on decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing the presentation time.

VDP 312 is equipped with RAM 312a, which provides a working area, and a scaler 312b, which enlarges and reduces images. Also connected to VDP 312 is an image ROM 325, which stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 326, which is used to expand and process image data such as characters read from image ROM 325.

Although not limited to this, the main control microcomputer 311 and VDP 312 are configured to send and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

The VDP 312 inputs to the main control microcomputer 311 a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC, which synchronizes the image on the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps on the glass frame 15 and game board 30, and a synchronization signal STS, which indicates the timing of data transmission. The VDP 312 also inputs to the main control microcomputer 311 interrupt signals INT0-n, which notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing to VRAM, and a wait signal WAIT, which notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands or data.

The performance control device 300 is equipped with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude digital signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 consisting of an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided in the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided in the front frame 12, and the audio generated by the sound source LSI 314 is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

The presentation control device 300 is also provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands sent from the game control device 100. Commands for the number of decorative special symbols on hold, commands for decorative special symbols, fluctuation commands, stop information commands, etc. sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 are received via the command I/F 331 as presentation control command signals (presentation commands). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates on DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the presentation control device 300 operates on DC 3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The presentation control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 equipped with LEDs (light-emitting diodes) on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (such as frame decoration device 18) equipped with LEDs (light-emitting diodes) on the glass frame 15, and a board presentation movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls a board presentation device 44 (such as a movable gadget that enhances the presentation effect in cooperation with the presentation display on the display device 41) on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

These control circuits 332-334, which drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc., are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. In addition, a frame effect movable body control circuit may be provided to drive and control the frame effect device (e.g., the top unit) of the motor, etc., provided in the glass frame 15 (such as the motor that moves the top unit).

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 has the function of detecting the on/off state of the performance button switch 25a built into the performance button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the performance button 25, the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and the performance element switch 47 (performance motor switch) which detects the initial position of the motor within the board performance device 44, and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. The performance control device 300 is also provided with a switch input circuit 336 which detects the state of the volume adjustment switch 335 provided on the performance control device 300 and inputs the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply unit 400 is configured to generate DC 32V to drive motors and solenoids, DC 12V to drive the display device 41 consisting of an LCD panel, motors and LEDs, DC 5V as the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and DC 15V to drive motors, LEDs and speakers in order to supply the desired level of DC voltage to the performance control device 300 configured as described above and the electronic components controlled by it.

Furthermore, if an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC-DC converter for generating DC 3.3V or DC 1.2V based on DC 5V is provided in the performance control device 300. Note that the DC-DC converter may also be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply unit 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, resetting the device. It is also output from the main control microcomputer 311 to the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRETSET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., resetting them. A cooling fan 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is also connected to the presentation control device 300, and is designed to operate when the presentation control device 300 is powered on.

Next, we will explain the game control performed by these control circuits. The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for determining whether the normal game is a hit based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided on the normal game start gate 34, compares it with the determination value stored in ROM 111b, and determines whether the normal game is a hit or a miss in the normal game change display game.

Then, the normal map display 53 displays a normal map variation display game in which the identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then a stationary display is displayed. If the result of the normal map variation display game is a win, a special result pattern is displayed on the normal map display 53, and the normal power solenoid 37c is operated, and control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds x 2 times) as described above. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a loss result pattern on the normal map display 53.

In addition, a start winning (start memory) is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start winning port 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning port 36, and based on the start memory, a random number value for determining a jackpot in the special chart 1 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in ROM 111b to determine whether the special chart 1 variable display game has been a win or a miss.

In addition, a start memory is stored based on the input of a game ball detection signal from the start port 2 switch 37a provided on the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the start memory, a random number value for determining a jackpot in the special chart 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in ROM 111b to determine whether the special chart 2 variable display game has been a win or a miss.

The CPU 111a of the game control device 100 then outputs a control signal (presentation control command) including the determination results of the special symbol 1 variable display game and the special symbol 2 variable display game to the presentation control device 300. The special symbol 1 display 51 and the special symbol 2 display 52 then display a special symbol variable display game in which the identification symbol is displayed variably for a predetermined period of time, and then displayed stationary. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on the game ball flowing down the game area 32 winning in the start winning area (first start winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37).

In addition, the presentation control device 300 displays a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game on the display device 41 based on a control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the presentation control device 300 performs processing such as setting the presentation state, outputting sound from speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the illumination of various LEDs based on a control signal from the game control device 100. In other words, the presentation control device 300 serves as a presentation control means for controlling presentations related to games (variable display games, etc.).

If the result of the special symbol variable display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result status on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52 and generates a special game state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control, for example, to open the opening/closing door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 using the large prize opening solenoid 39b, allowing game balls to flow into the large prize opening.

Then, one round (R) is defined as the process of opening the large prize opening until either a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10) enter the large prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (e.g., 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened. This is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (e.g., 15, 11, or 2 times) (cycle play). In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a large prize opening opening/closing control means that controls the opening and closing of the large prize opening when the stop result pattern becomes a special result pattern. Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol variation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the loss result pattern on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result status of the special chart variable display game. A high probability state (probability variable state) is a state in which the probability of a winning result in the special chart variable display game is higher than in the normal probability state. Furthermore, whether the high probability state is reached based on the result status of either the special chart 1 variable display game or the special chart 2 variable display game, both the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game will be in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the outcome of the special game variation display game. In the time-saving state, the normal game variation display game and the normal game variation winning device 37 may be controlled to be in a time-saving operating state, and the normal game variation winning device 37 is controlled so that the open time per unit time is substantially longer than in the normal game state where no special game is performed, resulting in a normal power support state. Note that even in high-probability states (normal probability variable states) other than the latent probability variable state, the time-saving state is overlapped and normal power support is executed.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the execution time of the special chart change display game (special chart change time) can be shortened more than usual, and time-shortened changes in the special chart change display game can also be implemented.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state, for one winning result of the normal map variable display game, the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 opens (normal power opening number) can be set to a second opening number (e.g., four times) that is greater than the first opening number (e.g., two times). Also, in the time-saving state, the probability of a winning result in the normal map variable display game (normal map probability, normal map winning probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time-saving state, the time required for the normal variable winning device 37 to switch to the open state is extended by changing one or more of the normal symbol variation time, normal symbol stop time, normal power release count, normal power release time, and normal symbol probability. This makes it easier to win the normal variable winning device 37 in the time-saving state than in the normal game state where no special play is performed, allowing for a higher number of special symbol variation display games per unit time than in the normal game state, and shortening the interval between special symbol variation display games. It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states that vary in what is changed. The movable member 37b may be set not to open in the normal operation state (normal symbol probability is 0). When a win occurs, either the first or second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probability for the first and second opening modes may be different. The high-probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently, and both may occur simultaneously, or only one may occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on or off, and the device transitions to one of four states (modes).

When the power is turned on, if the RAM initialization switch 112 and setting key switch 93 are turned on, the system will transition to a setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (settable) (see A1030-A1039 in Figure 5B and Figure 14).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, the system will transition to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (see A1034-A1039 in Figure 5B and Figure 14).

Also, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the device will enter the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode), the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) will be executed, and the RAM 111c will be initialized (see A1045-A1047 in Figure 5B).

If the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the device will enter the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode), in which power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
The control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of a main process shown in Figures 5A, 5B, and 5C, and a timer interrupt process shown in Figure 9, which is performed at a predetermined time interval (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. Figures 5A, 5B, and 5C are flowcharts showing the procedure for the main processing by the game control device 100. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In the flowcharts of the processing executed by the game control device 100, the step symbols (numbers) are represented as "A****".

As shown in Figure 5A, when the game control device 100 starts the main processing, it first executes processing to prohibit interrupts (A1001). It then executes stack pointer setting processing to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area where values of registers, etc. are saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

Next, register bank 0 is specified as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a specified register (A1004). For example, if the RAM address is in the range 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a launch prohibition signal and sets the launch permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch prohibition signal, and the launch of game balls from the ball launcher is prohibited. The game control device 100 then reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). In other words, it reads the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 sets a power delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value for the power delay timer, a standby time (e.g., 3 seconds) is set for the slave control means (e.g., the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the gaming control device 100, which constitutes the master control means, to wait until their programs are properly started. This prevents the slave control devices (e.g., the payout control device 200 and the presentation control device 300) from failing to receive the command if the gaming control device 100 starts up first when the power is turned on and sends a command to the slave control devices before they start up. In other words, the gaming control device 100 serves as standby means that delays the start-up of the master control means (gaming control device 100) when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined standby time for the slave control devices (e.g., the payout control device 200, the presentation control device 300, etc.) to start up.

In addition, the power delay timer is timed using a memory area (such as a RAM area or register not subject to validity check) that is not subject to RAM validity check (checksum calculation). This eliminates the need to exclude part of the RAM area when calculating check data such as a checksum for the RAM area, preventing complicated control when powering on.

Furthermore, by reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 before the standby time begins, it is possible to reliably detect operation of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112. In other words, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 were read after the standby time had elapsed, it would be necessary to wait for the standby time to elapse before operating the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112, or to continue operating the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 from power-on until the standby time had elapsed. However, by reading the states before the standby time begins, it is possible to avoid such cumbersome operations and prevent situations where operation of the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112 performed when powering on is not accepted.

When the power delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 performs processing to measure the standby time and monitor for the occurrence of a power outage during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power outage monitoring process begins, the gaming control device 100 first determines whether a power outage has occurred by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and data bus (A1008). If a power outage has occurred (the result of A1008 is "Y"), the gaming machine waits until its power supply is cut off.

If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009) and determines whether the timer value is 0 (A1010). If the timer value is not 0 (the result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the game control device 100 returns to processing in step A1008.

In other words, the gaming control device 100 acts as a power outage monitoring means that monitors for power outages during a specified standby time. This makes it possible to respond to power outages that occur during the period when the startup of the gaming control device 100, which serves as the main control means, is delayed, and allows for appropriate handling of malfunctions when the power is turned on. Furthermore, because access to RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time and the contents stored at the time of the previous power outage remain retained, there is no need to perform backup processing if a power outage occurs at this time. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, reducing the burden on control.

On the other hand, if the timer value is 0 (the result of A1010 is "Y"), that is, if the waiting time has ended, the game control device 100 allows access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (A1011) and outputs off data to all output ports (setting them to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets up a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which in this embodiment is used for communication with the presentation control device 300 and payout control device 200) (A1013).

Next, the gaming control device 100 activates the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency divider circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (e.g., 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the frequency-divided signal, and a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c) (A1015). Here, a flag indicating an abnormality is temporarily set in a specified register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (the result of A1016 is "Y"), it determines whether the value of power outage inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of power outage inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a checksum calculation process (A1018) to calculate a checksum of a specified area within the RWM (for example, the work area within the area), and determines whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at the time of power outage (A1019). If the checksums match (the result of A1019 is "Y"), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating a RAM abnormality is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Furthermore, if the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is "N" or the result of A1017 is "N"), or if the checksums do not match (the result of A1019 is "N"), it proceeds to processing of step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). If both switches are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 transitions to a setting variable state (setting change mode) and executes the processing during the probability setting change in steps A1030-A1040.

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM (here, RAM 111c) is set (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), it determines whether the probability setting change flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting change flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), it executes the probability setting confirmation processing (in setting confirmation state, in setting confirmation mode) of steps A1034-A1040, the RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) of steps A1044-A1047, or the normal power-on (power restoration) processing of steps A1044, A1048-A1051.

When the probability setting change in progress flag is set (result of A1023 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sends a main abnormality error notification command to the presentation control device 300 to notify that there has been an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main circuit board) (A1024). Upon receiving the main abnormality error notification command, the presentation control device 300 notifies that there has been an abnormality in the game control device 100.

The game control device 100 then outputs the 7-segment display data ("E1" error display data) at the time of game stop to the drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 to display on the performance display device 152 (A1025). It then outputs security signal ON data to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device (such as the amusement facility internal management device (hall computer) or information collection terminal) of the abnormality (A1026). Even if information about the jackpot remains in RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, remain OFF. It then waits, repeating the processing of steps A1025 and A1026, and again performs a setting change operation (turns on both the setting key switch 93 and RAM initialization switch 112) to wait for the power to be turned on. Furthermore, while the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting occurs, interrupts remain prohibited (A1001), and the timer interrupt processing (Figure 9) that can execute special chart game processing and regular chart game processing cannot be executed, so games (special chart variable display game, regular chart variable display game, round game, etc.) cannot be executed.

In this way, if the probability setting change in progress flag is set even though no setting change operation has been performed (both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 have been turned on), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and processing A1024-A1026 is executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is complete), the probability setting change in progress flag may be set even though no setting change operation has been performed.

On the other hand, even if the RAM abnormality flag is set (result of A1022 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sends a main abnormality error notification command to the presentation control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board) (A1024), outputs the 7-segment display data at the time of game stop (data displaying the "E1" error) to drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 (A1025), and outputs security signal ON data to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). As mentioned above, even if information related to a jackpot remains in RAM 111c, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state.

Then, it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (A1027), and if no power outage has occurred (the result of A1027 is "N"), the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and the machine waits. On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has occurred (the result of A1027 is "Y"), off data is output to all output ports (A1028), and access to readable and writable RWMs (read/write memories) such as RAM and EEPROM is prohibited (A1029). The machine then waits until the power to the gaming machine is cut off.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is "Y"), the game control device 100 begins processing during the probability setting change (setting variable state) and first determines whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1030). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1030 is "Y"), it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct. Therefore, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of RAM 111c is cleared to its initial value (e.g., the minimum setting value "1") (A1031), and then the probability setting change in progress flag is set (A1032), indicating that the probability setting is being changed. If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1030 is "N"), the probability setting value is not cleared, and the probability setting change in progress flag is set (A1032). Next, a command during the probability setting change is sent to the presentation control device 300 (presentation control board) (A1033), and processing proceeds to step A1037. When the performance control device 300 receives a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed, it notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the RAM abnormality flag is not set (the result of A1022 is "N"), and the probability setting change in progress flag is not set (the result of A1023 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1034). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1034 is "Y"), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation (setting confirmation state) process begins, setting the probability setting confirmation in progress flag (A1035), indicating that the probability setting is being confirmed. Then, a probability setting confirmation command is sent to the presentation control device 300 (presentation control board) (A1036), and processing proceeds to step A1037. Upon receiving the probability setting change in progress command, the presentation control device 300 notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1033 or step A1036, the game control device 100 executes steps A1037 to A1043 as common processing during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (a predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area (A1037) in order to output a security signal while the probability setting is being changed and while the probability setting is being confirmed. Note that the counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (Figure 14) described below, but if the probability setting change or probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1318). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms while the probability setting is being changed and while the probability setting is being confirmed.

Next, the game control device 100 permits an interrupt (A1038). This allows the timer interrupt process (Figure 9) to be executed. Then, it determines whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1039). If the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1039 is "N"), it determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1040). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1040 is "N"), the process returns to step A1039. On the other hand, if a power outage has occurred (the result of A1040 is "Y"), the process for when a power outage occurs, steps A1063-A1069, is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and there is no power outage, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed, will continue.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1039 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1041) and sends a command to end the notification to the presentation control device 300 (presentation control board) (A1042). Upon receiving the command to end the notification, the presentation control device 300 ends the notification that the probability setting is being checked or that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting change in progress flag is set, i.e., whether the probability setting has been in the process of being changed (A1043). If the probability setting change in progress flag is set (the result of A1043 is "Y"), i.e., if the probability setting has been in the process of being changed, it executes the RAM initialization process (described below) of steps A1045-A1047. On the other hand, if the probability setting change in progress flag is not set (the result of A1043 is "N"), i.e., if the probability setting has been in the process of being confirmed, it executes the normal process when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) from step A1048 onwards.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1034 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1044). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1044 is "Y"), RAM areas in RAM 111c other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value are cleared to zero (A1045). That is, the game information stored in RAM 111c is cleared to zero, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. The aforementioned probability setting change flag is also cleared here. The acquired game ball count area, which stores the number of acquired game balls (the total number of prize balls acquired within a predetermined time period (here, within one timer interrupt), is also cleared to zero. The safety device activation flag area, which stores the safety device activation flag indicating whether the safety device (described above) is activated, is also cleared to zero (safety device activation flag = 0), and the safety device is deactivated. In step A1045, the safety device is deactivated by clearing the safety device activation flag area to 0 in either the case of RAM clearing with a setting change (when the result of A1043 is "Y") or without a setting change (when the result of A1044 is "Y"), but deactivation of the safety device may be limited to one of the two cases. In other words, when clearing RAM in step A1045, the safety device activation flag area may not be cleared to 0.

In addition, here, in addition to the probability setting value area, it is possible to configure the stack area and unused area not to be cleared, and it is also possible to not clear the performance display work area (part of the out-of-area work area) and stack area (out-of-area stack area) related to performance information and its display (performance display). Note that performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and includes, for example, the payout rate, base value (payout rate in normal gameplay), feature ratio, and number of balls dispensed.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial values used at RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1046). Then, it sends the RAM initialization command to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1047) and proceeds to processing in step A1052. Note that areas not cleared to 0 in step A1045 are excluded from the areas to be initialized.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1044 is "N"), the game control device 100 starts normal power-on processing (when power is restored after a power outage) because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off, and saves the initial values for when power is restored (when power is restored) in the areas to be initialized as part of the power outage recovery processing (A1048). The areas to be initialized here include the power outage inspection area 1, power outage inspection area 2, and checksum area in the in-area work area (Figure 6). In addition, because all errors are re-monitored during normal power-on, the areas to be initialized include areas related to errors or error monitoring (such as areas for test signal output data related to errors) in both the in-area work area and the out-area work area (Figure 6). The aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared (initialized) here. Additional areas to be initialized in step A1048 may be added as needed. Unlike when RAM is initialized, when the power is turned on normally, the safety device activation flag area in the internal work area (Figure 6) is not cleared (initialized) and its value is maintained so that the safety device is not deactivated.

In addition, the safety device-related work areas related to safety devices in the outside work area (safety device counter area, safety device activation information area, and previous activation information area, described below) are not initialized in step A1048, but are initialized in the safety device information initialization process (A1053), described below. Note that by initializing the safety device counter value (information related to the difference in the number of balls) in the safety device counter area, it is possible to increase the margin (tolerance for the difference in the number of balls, limit on the difference in the number of balls) before the safety device is activated (occurrence of a game stop state) in terms of the difference in the number of balls. The work area for performance display in the outside work area is also not initialized in step A1048, but may be initialized in the performance display editing process (A1059), described below.

In addition, in step A1048 during normal power-on without RAM initialization (when power is restored after a power outage), the ceiling counter area (described below) in which the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special chart variable display game has been executed in a state other than the special chart variable state after power-on or the end of a jackpot is stored may also be maintained without being cleared (initialized) so as not to disadvantage the player. As described below, when the ceiling counter value reaches the ceiling number of times, the time-shortened state is entered (Figure 34B), but by not clearing (initializing) the ceiling counter value, the number of games remaining (up to the ceiling number of times) until the time-shortened state occurs does not change when power is turned on, and the player is not disadvantaged.

When this execution count (i.e., ceiling counter value) or the remaining number of games until the ceiling (ceiling count - execution count) is displayed on the display device 41 using the variable count display, the performance control device 300 may, upon normal power-on, align the variable count display with the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area, or may display the variable count display as the initial value of 0 without aligning them. When no alignment is achieved, the variable count display will display a value that does not reflect the ceiling counter value.

Similarly, in step A1048, to avoid any disadvantage to the gaming parlor (amusement store), the time-saving variation count 1 area, which stores time-saving variation count 1 (described below) corresponding to the remaining number of runs of the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) in the time-saving state, and the time-saving variation count 2 area, which stores time-saving variation count 2 (described below) corresponding to the remaining number of runs of the special chart 2 variation display game in the time-saving state, may be maintained without being cleared (initialized). Furthermore, in machines with a limited-time (ST) probability variable state, to avoid any disadvantage to the gaming parlor, the high-probability variation count area (ST counter), which stores the high-probability variation count corresponding to the remaining number of runs of the special chart variation display game (special chart 1 variation display game and special chart 2 variation display game) in the probability variable state, may be maintained without being cleared (initialized). Additionally, in machines where a limit is placed on the number of consecutive jackpots (which may be the number of consecutive wins, as described below), the jackpot count area, which stores the number of consecutive jackpots, may be left unchanged without being cleared (initialized), so as not to disadvantage the gaming facility.

Next, a command for when power is restored corresponding to the processing number prepared to rationally execute the special game processing described below is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1049), and processing proceeds to step A1050.

The commands sent during RAM initialization in step A1047 and during power recovery in step A1049 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command and a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command indicating the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2, a probability information command indicating the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) and whether or not a time-saving state is in effect, a performance count information command indicating the number of times a special chart variation display game has been executed in a specified performance mode, and a power recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on.

Furthermore, the commands for RAM initialization and power outage recovery include setting value information commands (probability setting value information commands) that indicate setting value information (setting information), which is information on the probability setting values (setting values) of the gaming machine 10. The gaming control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the presentation control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter the presentation control device 300 can refer to the setting value information stored therein to control the presentation.

The command for RAM initialization also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). When the performance control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command, it will, for example, display a customer waiting demo on the display device 41 and issue a RAM initialization (RAM clear) notification for 30 seconds using the LEDs and speaker of the board decoration device 46, etc. The command for power recovery also includes a screen designation command that specifies the content to be displayed on the screen of the display device 41. The screen designation command is a customer waiting demo command when normal processing is in progress for both special charts 1 and 2 (when neither a variation nor a win has occurred), and can be a recovery screen command at all other times. The command for power recovery may also include a command indicating the ceiling counter value in order to align the variation count display with the ceiling counter value, as described above.

Next, it is determined whether the safety device is in operation (A1050). For example, if the safety device in operation flag "1", indicating that the safety device is in operation, is saved in the safety device in operation flag area, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation (safety device in operation flag = 1). If the safety device is in operation (the result of A1050 is "Y"), a safety device in operation command indicating that the safety device is in operation is sent to the performance control device 300 (performance control board) (A1051), and processing proceeds to step A1052. If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A1050 is "N"), processing proceeds directly to step A1052.

Then, the information (value) of the flag register is pushed to the internal stack area (A1052), and a safety device information initialization process is executed (A1053) to initialize safety device information related to the safety devices (such as the safety device counter value, safety device activation information, and old activation information, which will be described later). The information in the flag register is then restored (POP) (A1054). Note that, except when game play is stopped due to a RAM abnormality (A1025-A1026), safety device information (such as the safety device counter value) is unconditionally initialized (cleared) when the power is turned on; however, if a count continuation switch is provided and the power is turned on while pressing the count continuation switch, the safety device information does not need to be initialized (cleared).

As described below, when transitioning to the safety device information initialization process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-area stack area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (performance information display). At this time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer storage area of RAM 111c, the flag register information is saved in advance in step A1052. The flag register is an 8-bit flag, with each bit taking a value of 0 or 1. Flag registers that can be used include those disclosed in JP 2013-233299 A, JP 2018-94101 A, etc.

Next, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1055). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) to activate the random number generation circuit in a specified register (CTC update permission register) within the random number generation circuit. It also sets the bit transposition pattern of the hard random numbers generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit. In this embodiment, the random number generation circuit generates the jackpot random number, special symbol random number, normal symbol winning random number, and variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 as random numbers that are updated only by hardware. These random numbers may be so-called "high-speed counters" that are updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the operating clock.

A bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines how the bit arrangement of an extracted random number (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) is rearranged in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row).

In this embodiment, by swapping the bits of the random numbers according to a bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers and increase the confidentiality of the random numbers. The bit permutation pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from multiple patterns prepared in advance. It may also be possible for the user to set the pattern as desired.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interrupts (A1056) and determines whether gameplay is currently stopped (A1057). It can be determined that gameplay is currently stopped if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 (described below) has occurred that requires gameplay (such as a special game with a variable display, a regular game with a variable display, or a round game) to be stopped.

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1057 is "N"), the game control device 100 pushes (PUSHes) the flag register information (value) to the in-area stack area (A1058) and executes a performance display editing process to calculate performance information such as the base value (ball payout rate) (A1059). Here, performance information (such as the ratio of game devices and ball payout rate) may be calculated. Furthermore, if there is an abnormality in the performance display work area (part of the out-of-area work area) related to the performance information or its display (performance display), this may be cleared. The flag register information is then restored (POP) (A1060) and an interrupt is permitted (A1061). In addition to when no error has occurred, if an error other than strong error 2, such as a weak error (described below) or strong error 1 (described below), has occurred, game play is not stopped, and steps A1058-A1060, including the performance display editing process, are executed. It is also possible to configure the system so that steps A1058-A1060 are not executed if a weak error or strong error 1 occurs.

As described below, when transitioning to the performance display editing process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-of-area stack area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). At this time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) will change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer save area of RAM 111c, the flag register information is saved in advance in step A1058.

On the other hand, when game play is stopped (the result of A1057 is "Y"), the game control device 100 allows an interrupt (A1061) without executing the performance display editing process, etc. In other words, when the safety device is activated or when strong error 2 occurs, the performance display editing process (particularly the base value calculation process during the performance display editing process) is not executed, so performance information such as base values is not newly calculated and remains unchanged. Note that it is also possible to configure the device to execute the performance display editing process, etc., without stopping game play, even when strong error 2 occurs. Furthermore, allowing an interrupt makes it possible to execute the timer interrupt process (Figure 9).

In this embodiment, errors are categorized into three types: weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2. When the performance control device 300 receives an error/illegal command, it can set and execute error notifications of different strengths corresponding to weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2 in the error/illegal setting process (B1316).

For example, the presentation control device 300 may increase the volume of the error notification sound from the speaker or the brightness (brightness) of the LED (the presentation LED of the board decoration device 46 or frame decoration device 18) that lights up to notify errors in the order of weak error < strong error 1 ≦ strong error 2. The speaker volume or LED brightness for strong error 1 and strong error 2 may be the same. Furthermore, the presentation control device 300 may set the volume of the notification sound to the volume adjusted in the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011) (below the maximum volume) when a weak error occurs, and set the volume of the notification sound to the maximum volume when strong error 1 or strong error 2 occurs.

Weak errors include a shoot ball out error, in which a shoot ball out switch signal is generated in response to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow error, in which an overflow switch signal is generated in response to the lower tray 23 being full. In the case of a weak error, an external information signal is not output to the external information terminal 71 (see Figure 51A). Weak errors may also include a switch abnormality error and a payout abnormality error, in which a status signal indicating a payout abnormality is generated.

Strong error 1 is a frame opening error related to frame opening, and includes a glass frame opening error and a main frame opening error (front frame opening error). In the case of strong error 1, a door/frame opening signal (A9305) is output to the external information terminal 71 as an external information signal (see Figure 51A).

Strong Error 2 is a fraud-related error that preferably results in game suspension, and includes magnetic fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal ejection error, V-pass error, large prize slot fraud, and regular power fraud. Strong Error 2 causes a security signal (A9322) to be output to the external information terminal 71 as an external information signal (see Figure 51A). Strong Error 2 may also include a remaining ball error. When Strong Error 2 occurs, gameplay (special chart change display game, regular chart change display game, round play, etc.) is suspended, and it can be determined that gameplay is suspended (A1057). Furthermore, when Strong Error 2 occurs, a game suspension state (unplayable state, play prohibited state) can be generated in which games such as special chart change display game, regular chart change display game, and round play (play during a jackpot or small jackpot) cannot be performed, just as when a safety device is activated.

After step A1061, the game control device 100 determines whether a power outage has occurred (A1062). If a power outage has not occurred (the result of A1062 is "N"), the process returns to step A1056. This causes the loop processing of steps A1056-A1062 to be repeated until a power outage occurs. Until a power outage occurs, performance information such as base values can be repeatedly calculated in the performance display editing process (A1059) unless game play is stopped, i.e., unless a safety device is activated or severe error 2 occurs.

The repetition period of the loop process is much shorter than the timer interrupt period (a predetermined time period, for example, 4 msec), so the performance display editing process is executed multiple times during the interrupt period. Therefore, if a game ball wins or the number of balls ejected changes (a game ball entering the outlet 30b), performance information such as base values can change immediately.

When a power outage occurs (the result of A1062 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 starts processing for when a power outage occurs, temporarily prohibits interrupts (A1063), and outputs off data to all output ports (A1064). It then saves power outage inspection area check data 1 in power outage inspection area 1 (A1065) and power outage inspection area check data 2 in power outage inspection area 2 (A1066). It then executes a checksum calculation process to calculate a checksum when the RWM is powered off (A1067), and then saves the calculated checksum in the checksum area (A1068). Finally, it executes processing to prohibit access to the RWM (A1069) and waits until the gaming machine's power is cut off.

In this way, by saving check data in the power outage inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power outage, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power outage has been correctly backed up when the power is turned back on.

The main processing has been described above, but for example, if the setting key switch and RAM initialization switch are turned on during the processing of steps A1056-A1062, a determination process similar to step A1021 may be performed, and the probability setting change flag may be set as in step A1032, making it possible to switch to the setting variable state (setting change mode) any number of times while the gaming machine 10 is running.

[Example of RAM area configuration]
6 is a diagram showing the configuration (memory map in address space) of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 6, the following are arranged in the address space starting from the starting address of the RAM 111c: an in-area work area, an unused area, an in-area stack area, an unused area, an out-area work area, an unused area, and an out-area stack area. The unused area between the in-area work area and the in-area stack area (gaming control stack area, in-area stack area) and the unused area between the out-area work area and the out-area stack area (out-area stack area) may not be necessary.

The RAM's in-area work area (game control work area, first area) is a work area for game control that is read and written by in-area programs and read by out-area programs. The in-area work area includes a probability setting value area, test signal output data area (including the area for error-related test signal output data), random number area, switch control area, segment area, power outage inspection area 1, power outage inspection area 2, checksum area, etc., as well as a safety device activation flag area that indicates whether the safety device is activated (or has activated), and a number of acquired game balls area that stores the number of game balls acquired as prize balls within one timer interrupt (e.g., 4 msec).

The RAM's out-of-area work area (second area) is an area that is read and written by out-of-area programs and read by in-area programs. The out-of-area work area includes a safety device counter area that stores the safety device counter value (difference in balls + initial value) corresponding to the difference in balls, a safety device activation information area that stores safety device activation information corresponding to the safety device state, and a previous activation information area that stores previous activation information, and is capable of storing safety device information related to the safety device. The safety device counter area (3 bytes in size) is generally not read by in-area programs, but may be read and referenced by in-area programs when the safety device counter value or information on the difference in balls is sent to the performance control device 300 using a difference in ball command. In this embodiment, the safety device counter value is a value obtained by adding a predetermined initial value (100,000) to the difference in balls, in proportion to the difference in balls (safety device counter value = difference in balls + 100,000). However, the safety device counter value is not limited to this, as long as it is associated with the difference in balls and indicates the difference in balls. Furthermore, by separating the external work area from the internal work area, program development efficiency can be improved and it becomes easier to initialize these areas separately.

Furthermore, the out-of-area work area includes a performance display work area related to performance information and performance display, and can store information related to performance information and performance display. The out-of-area work area may also store information related to test signals and information related to error monitoring. In the out-of-area work area, the safety device-related work area related to safety device information (including the safety device counter area, safety device activation information area, and previous activation information area) and the performance display work area related to performance information and performance display may be clearly separated or may be mixed.

The external stack area is shared when processing performance information and performance displays, and when processing safety devices. The external stack area is also used when processing test signals and error monitoring.

Note that in-area programs (in-area processing programs) and out-area programs (out-area processing programs) are arranged in this order from the top address in the address space of ROM 111b, and are distinguished by an unused area between the in-area program area and the out-area program area. ROM in-area programs consist of game control programs and game control data, etc., and include a main program corresponding to the main processing (Figures 5A-5C) and an interrupt processing program corresponding to the timer interrupt processing described below. An unused area may be arranged between the game control program area and the game control data area (data area). Subroutines of the main program or interrupt processing program are generally in-area programs (unless otherwise specified), but may exceptionally be out-area programs. ROM out-area programs include a safety device information initialization program corresponding to the safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program corresponding to the performance display editing processing, and an out-area integration processing program corresponding to the out-area integration processing described below.

[Safety device information initialization process]
Next, the safety device information initialization process (A1053) in the main process will be described in detail. Fig. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device information initialization process. In the safety device information initialization process, the safety device counter area, the safety device activation information area, and the old activation information area are initialized or cleared, and safety device information such as the safety device counter value, safety device activation information, and old activation information is set to its initial value (initial information). Note that the safety device activation information is information indicating the current state, and the old activation information indicates the state from the previous time (mainly one interrupt before).

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (A1101), and then sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) to the stack pointer as the value of the external stack area (external stack area) (A1102). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) to the external stack area (A1103). Only the registers to be protected (registers used in the safety device information initialization process) may be saved, or all general-purpose registers may be saved. To save all general-purpose registers, save (PUSH) them to both register bank 0 and register bank 1.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value (100,000) in the safety device counter area, and the safety device counter value becomes the initial value (A1104). Because the safety device counter value (= difference in balls + initial value) may become smaller than the initial value if the difference in balls decreases from 0, such as when no jackpot occurs, the initial value is set to a value greater than 0, but may be a value other than 100,000. Note that, as described above, the safety device counter value is initialized (cleared) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on) to prevent any disadvantage to the player. However, the ceiling counter value, which indicates the number of times the special chart variable display game has been executed outside of the special chart variable state, does not need to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored unless the RAM initialization switch 112 is on. When the safety device counter value (information regarding the difference in balls) is initialized (cleared), the margin (tolerance and limit of the difference in balls) before the safety device is activated (the game stops) regarding the difference in balls can be increased, to the player's benefit. On the other hand, as mentioned above, because the ceiling counter value is not cleared (initialized) when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the number of games remaining (up to the ceiling number) before the time-saving state occurs does not change when the power is turned on, resulting in a profit for the player. Then, safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to the safety device's non-operation state (normal state) is saved as safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (A1105). Furthermore, safety device non-operation information (value 0) is saved as old operation information in the old operation information area (A1106).

Next, the game control device 100 restores the saved registers (A1107), loads them from the stack pointer storage area, sets the stack pointer (A1108), and ends the safety device information initialization process. The set stack pointer will indicate the address of the stack area within the area.

In the above safety device information initialization process, if information is written directly to RAM without using a register, the register is not saved/restored. In this case, the register is not saved to RAM, so stack pointer-related processing (A1101, A1102, A1103, A1107, A1108) is also unnecessary. In addition, saving/restoring the flag register (A1052, A1054) before and after the safety device information initialization process is also unnecessary.

In this embodiment, when the safety device counter value is 0 to 189,999 (safety device counter = 0 to 189,999), the safety device activation information becomes safety device non-activation information (value 0), which corresponds to an inactive state in which the safety device is not activated (normally) (activation notice state, activation warning state, or normal state where the safety device is not activated). When the safety device counter value is 190,000 to 194,999 (safety device counter = 190,000 to 194,999), the safety device activation information becomes safety device activation notice information (value 1), which corresponds to an activation notice state that warns of the safety device activation.

Also, if the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value of 195,000 (safety device counter = 195,000) but is not yet in a state where gameplay can be stopped, the safety device activation information becomes safety device activation warning information (value 2), which corresponds to an activation warning state that warns of the activation of the safety device. In this case, even if the difference in number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) reaches the difference in ball reference value of 95,000, the player is in a big win or small win, so this corresponds to a case where the aforementioned condition (1) is met but condition (2) is not met, and the activation condition for the safety device is not met.

Furthermore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 (safety device counter = 195,000) and gameplay is stopped, the safety device activation information becomes safety device activation information (value 3), which corresponds to the activation state in which the safety device is activated (activated state). In this case, the difference in number of balls has reached the difference in ball reference value of 95,000, and the game is neither a big hit nor a small hit, so both of the above-mentioned conditions (1) and (2) are met, which corresponds to a case in which the activation conditions for the safety device are met.

[Performance display editing process]
Next, the performance display editing process (A1059) in the main process will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (A1201), and then sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) as the external stack area value in the stack pointer (A1202). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the external stack area (A1203). It is preferable to save all general-purpose registers here. Then, a validity check is performed to determine the validity of the performance display work area within the external work area. If the work area is invalid and abnormal, the performance display work area is initialized (including setting the initial value) (A1204).

The validity assessment can determine that a value stored in the performance display work area is invalid if it is a value that is not possible in the design or deviates from the design value (if it is outside a specified range). For example, it determines whether a specific value (e.g., 5Ah) is stored in the performance display RAM initialization flag, which indicates that the performance display work area has been initialized; determines whether the number managing the progress of the division process used to calculate the base value is within a specified range; determines whether the switch counter value is within a range equal to or less than the number of monitored switches; determines whether the display period management number indicating the current display period is within the range of the number of periods (0-3); and determines whether the time interval number indicating the current time interval is within the range of the number of intervals (0-4). In this way, the validity assessment preferably determines whether the value of the area used as a pointer to the data table is within a specified range. This prevents the program from running out of control by obtaining an out-of-range value. It is also effective because the validity assessment is performed for each performance display editing process.

In addition, a validity check is performed each time the performance display editing process is executed, so if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be immediately initialized, preventing abnormal performance displays (such as the display of abnormal base values) as much as possible.

In addition, when initializing the work area for performance display (including setting initial values), the area other than the stack pointer storage area is initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. In this embodiment, the out-of-area stack area is not initialized, but it may be initialized. Even when initializing the out-of-area stack area, the register values saved in the out-of-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the work area for performance display is performed separately from the initialization of the in-area work area (work area for game control) and the in-area stack area (stack area for game control), so it does not affect the in-area work area or the in-area stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether it is time to switch the counting period for counting the data (such as the number of normal balls out and the number of normal prize balls) that is the basis for calculating the base value (ball payout rate) (A1205). A counting period is set for the total number of balls out (total number of dispensed balls, total number of outs) since the power was turned on, and the counting period is switched every time the total number of balls out reaches one of several predetermined numbers (for example, every time it increases by 60,000).

For example, the timing for switching time windows is when the total number of balls out since power-on reaches a predetermined number: 300, 60,300, 120,300, 180,300, etc. That is, the width of each time window is generally 60,000, except for the first time window, where the first time window is 0-300, the second time window is 300-60,300, the third time window is 60,300-120,300, the fourth time window is 120,300-180,300, the fifth time window is 180,300-240,300, etc. The time window numbers for the first through fifth time windows are 0-4, respectively, and the time window number remains at 4 for the sixth time window and beyond. The current time window number is stored in the performance display work area.

When it is time to switch counting intervals (the result of A1205 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the counting interval to switch (A1206). When setting the counting interval to switch, the game control device 100 clears the total out counter, which counts the total number of out balls (total outs), the normal out counter, which counts the number of normal out balls (normal outs), which is the number of out balls (number of discharged balls) within each counting interval, and the normal prize ball counter, which counts the number of normal prize balls, which is the total number of prize balls (number of acquired balls) within each counting interval, and shifts (moves) the final base value (or latest base value) of each counting interval to the base value storage area of the adjacent counting interval.

If it is not time to switch the counting period (the result of A1205 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a switch input to the input port being monitored (A1207). In this embodiment, the input ports being monitored are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 (see Figure 3).

Here, the switch rising edge information copied to the performance display work area for each monitored input port (copied in step A9603 in Figure 55) is checked. For each monitored input port, there is an 8-bit area for storing the copied switch rising edge information. If the switch rising edge information for all monitored input ports is all 0, it can be determined that there is no input; in all other cases, it can be determined that there is input. Note that, unless masked during copying, the switch rising edge information has a bit set to 1 corresponding to a switch that has received new input (detection) in the input process (A1303), and a bit set to 0 corresponding to a switch that has not received new input.

When there is a switch input to the monitored input port (the result of A1207 is "Y"), the game control device 100 checks the input of the switch (target switch) corresponding to the switch counter and obtains the input information (A1208). The target switches in this case include the lower large prize entrance switch 38a of the first special variable prize entry device 38, the upper large prize entrance switch 39a of the second special variable prize entry device 39, the start entrance 1 switch 36a of the first start prize entry device 36, the start entrance 2 switch 37a of the second start prize entry device 37 (normal variable prize entry device), the prize entrance switch 35a (left prize entrance switch, right prize entrance switch) of the general prize entry device 35, and the out ball detection switch 74, which can change the base value (or ball payout rate) based on the detection of game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the target switch is in its valid period (A1209). Note that if a special prize slot or regular power slot fraud occurs and a win at the special prize slot or second start prize slot 37 is invalid, that is, the special prize slot switches 38a, 39a and start slot 2 switch 37a are invalid, the switch may not be valid. There are also switches that are always valid, such as the first start prize slot 36 and the out ball detection switch 74.

If the target switch is in its valid period (the result of A1209 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the target switch corresponding to the switch counter (A1210). If the target switch is not in its valid period (the result of A1209 is "N") or if there is no input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A1218.

When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A1210 is "Y"), the game control device 100 clears the input information (1 bit) of the bit corresponding to the target switch (A1211) and determines whether or not it is in the normal base state (A1212). The normal base state (low base state) is a period during which the base value can be calculated and updated, and is the normal game state in this embodiment.

When the game control device 100 is in the normal base state (normal game state) (the result of A1212 is "Y") and the target switch is a switch that awards prize balls, it updates the normal prize ball count, which is the total number of prize balls within the counting period, by adding the number of prize balls corresponding to the target switch (A1213). Next, if the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, it updates the normal out ball count (normal out count, normal discharged ball count), which is the number of out balls within the counting period, by adding 1 (A1214). Next, if the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, it updates the total out ball count (total out count, total discharged balls) by adding 1 (A1215).

In this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 74 detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32 (i.e., all game balls that pass through the winning opening or the out opening 30b). Not only game balls that enter the out opening 30b, but also game balls that enter the winning openings (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37, large winning opening, or general winning opening 35) are guided to the out ball detection switch 74 via a passageway or the like (not shown) and detected.

When the game control device 100 is not in the normal base state, which is the normal game state (the result of A1212 is "N"), it updates only the total number of out balls (A1215) without updating either the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls. Therefore, in a high base state that is not the normal base state (second game state, time-saving state, special game state, or special game state), neither the number of normal prize balls nor the number of normal out balls are updated, and the base value calculated from the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls (number of normal prize balls ÷ number of normal out balls) is not updated and remains unchanged. It is also possible to eliminate the determination process regarding the normal base state in step A1212 and make the base value updateable (changeable) as the ball payout rate in all game states.

Next, the game control device 100 increments the switch counter by +1 (A1216) to change the target switch to the next one in the next performance display editing process. Note that due to the loop processing in the main processing, the performance display editing process is executed at intervals (e.g., several microseconds) that are significantly shorter than the timer interrupt period (predetermined time period, e.g., 4 msec). Therefore, the performance display editing process is repeatedly executed during the interrupt period, and the switch counter (e.g., 0 to 7) covers all switch bits (e.g., bits 0 to 7) for each monitored input port. Furthermore, the switch counter is updated to 0 after the final value (e.g., 7), and the switch input for the next monitored input port begins to be checked. For example, the switch input for the third input port 124 is first checked, and then the switch input for the fourth input port 126 is checked.

On the other hand, if there is no switch input to any of the monitored input ports (the result of A1207 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a base value calculation process (predetermined process) to calculate a base value (A1217). Note that there may be no switch input to any of the monitored input ports from the beginning. On the other hand, even if there is initially a switch input to some or all of the monitored input ports, after the switch input has been checked for all monitored input ports, the input information for the target switches that have had an input is cleared (A1211), so there will be no switch input to any of the monitored input ports.

In the base value calculation process, the base value is the ratio of the number of normal prize balls to the number of normal out balls, and is calculated as the number of normal prize balls divided by the number of normal out balls. Therefore, when a ball lands in the starting prize slot (starting prize slot 36, normal variable prize slot 37), the large prize slot, or the general prize slot 35, in the first stage, the number of normal prize balls is updated and changed by input (detection) from the switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, and 39a of the prize slot to which the prize ball is awarded, thereby changing the base value. In the second stage, the number of normal out balls is updated and changed by input (detection) from the out ball detection switch 74, thereby changing the base value. In other words, when one game ball lands in a prize slot, the base value changes (is affected) in two stages. When a ball lands in the out slot 30b, which opens into the game board 30, the number of normal out balls is updated and changed by input (detection) from the out ball detection switch 74, thereby changing the base value. On the other hand, if a ball lands at the normal start gate 34, the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated or changed by the ball itself, so the base value remains unchanged. Even if a ball lands at the normal start gate 34, no prize balls are awarded, so the number of normal prize balls is not updated.

Regardless of whether the base value has changed, the processing of steps A1619-A1625 of the output process will output the base value as a performance display on the performance display device 152. However, if the safety device is activated and game play is stopped, or if a strong error 2 occurs and game play is stopped, the performance display device 152 will output off data and turn off.

As a special example, the base value may be calculated only during the real-time value display period when the real-time value (bL.) of the base value is displayed. In this special example, the normal number of winning balls and the normal number of out balls are updated until the real-time value display period arrives, but the base value is not calculated and does not change.

After step A1216 or A1217, the game control device 100 restores the saved registers (A1218), loads from the stack pointer storage area, sets the stack pointer (A1219), and terminates the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer will indicate the address of the stack area within the area.

In addition, in Figure 8, it is also possible to configure the processing of step A1217 to be performed immediately after step A1214, so that the base value calculation processing is performed immediately after the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls is updated, without waiting for the input check of all switches of the monitored input port.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. Figure 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer interrupt process (interrupt process program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process is started.

When timer interrupt processing begins, the game control device 100 first specifies register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301) and sets the upper address of the RAM starting address in a specified register (A1302). By switching from register bank 0 used in the main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing, this is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing begins, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing to receive inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, i.e., to read the status of each input port (A1303). Next, it determines whether the probability setting is being changed or confirmed based on the probability setting change flag and the probability setting confirmation flag (A1304). If the probability setting is being changed or confirmed (the result of A1304 is "Y"), it executes probability setting change/confirmation processing to change or confirm the probability setting value (A1305).

When the game control device 100 is neither changing nor checking the probability setting (the result of A1304 is "N"), it executes output processing (A1306) to perform drive control of actuators such as solenoids (e.g., the large prize opening solenoid 39b) and drive control (light emission control) of LEDs based on the output data set in various processes. Note that if a launch prohibition signal was output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, this output processing can output a launch permission signal, and the launch permission signal can be set to the permitted state.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process (A1307) that outputs commands (such as payout commands) that have been set in the transmission buffer during various processes to the payout control device 200. After that, it executes a payout port switch/status monitoring process (A1308) that monitors whether normal signals are being input from the start port 1 switch 36a, start port 2 switch 37a, prize port switch 35a, and large prize port switch 39a, and monitors for errors (such as whether the front frame or glass frame is open).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether game play is currently stopped (A1309). It can determine that game play is currently stopped if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 has occurred that requires game play to be stopped.

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1309 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes special game processing (A1310), regular game processing (A1311), and segment LED editing processing (A1312). It then executes the processing from step A1313 onwards. In addition to when no errors have occurred, the game control device 100 also executes special game processing (A1310), regular game processing (A1311), and segment LED editing processing (A1312) when a weak error or strong error 1 has occurred.

The segment LED editing process executes settings related to the operation of some of the segment LEDs that make up the collective display device 50 (such as the memory display section and round display section: LED lamps D3-D7, D11-D17). Settings related to the operation of other parts of the collective display device 50 (variation display section: LED lamps D1, D2, D8, D10, D18) are executed in the pattern variation control process (A2621, A2623, A7615). Settings related to the operation of another part of the collective display device 50 (probability status display section: LED lamp D9) are executed in the power outage recovery process (A1048), etc.

When game play is stopped (the result of A1309 is "Y"), the game control device 100 proceeds to step A1313 and subsequent steps without executing the special game process (A1310), normal game process (A1311), or segment LED editing process (A1312). In this way, when the safety device is activated or when game play is stopped due to a strong error 2, the special game process (A1310) and normal game process (A1311) are not executed, so the number of reserved special games (A2906, A4611) and the number of reserved normal games do not change. On the other hand, when a weak error or strong error 1 occurs, game play is not stopped and the special game process (A1310) and normal game process (A1311) are executed, so the number of reserved special games (A2906, A4611) and the number of reserved normal games can be changed by updating by +1 (when a reserve is created) or -1 (when a reserve is consumed).

It is also possible to configure the system to execute some of the special game processing (A1310), normal game processing (A1311), and segment LED editing processing (A1312) while not executing the others, depending on the type of error, such as weak error, strong error 1, or strong error 2. For example, if strong error 2 occurs, only the segment LED editing processing may be executed.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes safety device-related processing, which can send safety device activation information corresponding to the state of the safety device to the performance control device 300 as a performance command and set a safety device activation flag (A1313). It then executes magnet fraud monitoring processing, which checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there are any abnormalities (A1314). It also executes radio wave fraud monitoring processing (board radio wave fraud monitoring processing), which checks the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there are any abnormalities (A1315).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process that monitors for fraud caused by vibration based on input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1316). Next, it executes an abnormal discharge monitoring process that monitors for abnormal discharge from the large prize opening (A1317). The abnormal discharge monitoring process monitors for abnormal discharge from the special variable prize winning device 39 based on input from the large prize opening switch 39a, specific area switch 72 (V prize opening switch), and remaining ball discharge opening switch 73 in the special variable prize winning device 39, and sets an abnormal discharge flag if an abnormal discharge occurs. Game balls that pass through the large prize opening switch 39a of the special variable prize winning device 39 are discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V prize opening switch) or remaining ball discharge opening switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process that sets signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1318). Then, as in step A1309, it determines whether game play is stopped (A1319).

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1319 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the flag register to the in-area stack area (A1320) and executes out-of-area integration processing (A1321), which updates the safety device counter value (calculates the difference in the number of balls) and controls the display of the performance display device 152. The flag register is then restored (A1322), and the timer interrupt processing ends. When the safety device is not activated and strong error 2 has not occurred, game play is not stopped and steps A1320-A1322, including out-of-area integration processing, are executed.

As described below, when transitioning to the out-of-area integration process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-of-area stack area. At this time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer save area of RAM 111c, the flag register is saved in advance in step A1320.

On the other hand, when game play is stopped (the result of A1319 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the timer interrupt process without executing the out-of-area integration process, etc. In other words, when the safety device is activated (when the safety device activated flag = 1) or when strong error 2 occurs, the out-of-area integration process is not executed, so the safety device counter value is not updated and the displayed contents of the performance display, such as the base value, are not updated. This makes it possible to eliminate unnecessary control while game play is stopped.

In contrast to the above, even if a strong error 2 occurs, it is also possible to configure the system so that game play does not stop, but instead executes special game processing (A1310), regular game processing (A1311), and segment LED editing processing (A1312). It is also possible to configure the system so that, even if a strong error 2 occurs, outside-area integration processing, etc. is executed.

In addition, when the timer interrupt processing returns, the interrupt disable state and register bank designation are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, processing to enable interrupts and to return the register bank designation to register bank 0 may also be performed after the external information editing processing.

[Output processing]
Next, the output process (A1306) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described in detail. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

The game control device 100 first outputs off data to the output port 135 (segment output port) (see Figure 3) that outputs segment data for the collective display device (LED) 50, resetting the output port 135 (A1601). Next, it sets off output data for all solenoids (large prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 86b, and normal power solenoid 37c) (A1602). Then, as in step A1309, it determines whether game play is currently stopped (A1603). It can determine that game play is currently stopped if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag = 1) or if a severe error 2 has occurred that requires game play to be stopped.

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1603 is "N"), the game control device 100 combines the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134, which outputs data for the special prize opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 86b, and the normal power solenoid 37c (A1604). Then, it outputs the data to the solenoid output port 134 (A1605). When game play is stopped (the result of A1603 is "Y"), it does nothing and proceeds to processing in step A1605, outputting off data (A1602) to the solenoid output port 134. As a result, when game play is stopped, the operation of all solenoids stops, and the special prize opening, specific area 86, normal variable prize opening 37, etc. are closed and enter a closed state. In this way, when game play is stopped, the special prize opening is closed, and round play (play during a jackpot or small jackpot) cannot be performed.

The game control device 100 then updates the value of the digit counter, which is used to sequentially scan the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50, by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (it only adds 1, but updates to 0 after 3) (A1606). Furthermore, it acquires the digit output data for the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value (A1607). It then combines the acquired digit output data with the external information data (A1608) and outputs the combined data to the digit output/external information output port 136 (A1609).

Next, the game control device 100 sets off data as the segment output data for the segment line (A1610). Then, it sets output data prohibiting firing (A1611). Furthermore, as in step A1603, etc., it determines whether game play is stopped (A1612).

When game play is not stopped (the result of A1612 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads segment output data from the segment area in RAM 111c corresponding to the value of the digit counter to the segment line (A1613), sets the output data for firing permission (A1614), and outputs the loaded segment output data to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615). Note that this segment area may be included in the in-area work area (game control work area).

In this way, when game play is not stopped, each time the digit counter value is incremented by +1 within the range of 0 to 3, a new digit line is selected and segment output data is output to the eight segment lines of the digit to which this digit line is connected. Digits 0 to 3 (digits 0 to 3) are selected sequentially, realizing a dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting control) for the collective display device 50.

On the other hand, when game play is stopped (the result of A1612 is "Y"), the game control device 100 outputs off data (A1610) to the output port 135 for segment output (A1615) without processing steps A1613 and A1614. As a result, when the safety device is activated (when the safety device activation flag = 1) or when game play is stopped and strong error 2 has occurred, the collective display device 50 turns off. As a result, the special chart variation display game and the regular chart variation display game cannot be executed when game play is stopped. Then, a player who looks at the collective display device 50 can recognize that game play is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that strong error 2 (an illegal error) has occurred.

The game control device 100 then loads and combines the external information data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1616), then combines the combined external information data with the launch permission or launch prohibition output data (A1617), and finally outputs the combined data to the external information/launch permission signal output port 137 (A1618). Note that if game play is not stopped, the output data becomes launch permission data (A1614), and if game play is stopped, the output data becomes launch prohibition (launch stop) data (A1611). This prevents the ball launcher from launching game balls in a game stop state when the safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 occurs, while allowing the ball to be launched from the ball launcher when game play is not stopped. Note that it is also possible to configure the ball launcher to allow the ball to be launched from the ball launcher even in a game stop state, without prohibiting (stopping) launching.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs off data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2), which outputs segment data for the performance display device (LED) 152, and resets the output port 141 (A1619). Next, it updates the value of digit counter 2, which is used to sequentially scan the digit lines of the performance display device 152, by +1 within the range of 0 to 3 (it adds 1, but after 3 it is updated to 0) (A1620). Furthermore, it acquires the digit output data for the LED digit line corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (A1621). It then outputs the acquired digit output data to output port 142 (digit output port 2) (A1622).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether game play is currently stopped (A1623), as in step A1603 etc. If game play is not currently stopped (the result of A1623 is "N"), it loads segment output data from the performance display device segment area in RAM 111c corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (A1624). The performance display device segment area is included in the performance display work area related to performance information and its display (performance display). The loaded segment output data is then output to output port 141 (segment output port 2) for the performance display device 152 (A1625), after which the output process ends.

On the other hand, if game play is stopped (the result of A1623 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the output processing without executing the processing of steps A1624 and A1625. Therefore, if the safety device has been activated and game play is stopped (if the safety device activated flag = 1) or if game play is stopped due to the occurrence of strong error 2, the segment output data of the performance display device segment area cannot be output to output port 141, so the off data of step A1619 is output directly to output port 141 for the performance display device 152. In this case, when the value of digit counter 2 cycles through the range of 0 to 3, all LEDs on the performance display device 152 are forcibly turned off and the display becomes invisible, allowing the amusement facility manager or staff member who sees the performance display device 152 to recognize that game play is stopped, that the safety device has been activated, or that strong error 2 (a fraudulent error) has occurred.

It is also possible to configure the system so that even if strong error 2 occurs, the game does not stop, but steps A1624 and A1625 are executed instead.

[Winning port switch/status monitoring process]
Next, the details of the winning slot switch/status monitoring process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be explained. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first clears the acquired game ball count area included in the in-area work area to 0 (A2001). As a result, the acquired game ball count area becomes an area that stores the acquired game ball count, which is the total number of prize balls acquired within one interrupt (within a specified time period). The number of acquired game balls is equal to the increase in the number of safe balls within one interrupt. Next, a prize opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper large prize opening switch 39a in the upper large prize opening (special variable prize opening device 39) is prepared (A2002). Then, even though the upper large prize opening is not open, the system executes an illegal and winning monitoring process that monitors for illegal winnings at the upper large prize opening and detects normal winnings (A2003).

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a prize opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower large prize opening switch 38a in the lower large prize opening (special variable prize opening device 38) (A2004). Then, even though the lower large prize opening is not open, it monitors for any illegal prizes at the lower large prize opening and executes an illegal/winning monitoring process to detect legitimate prizes (A2005).

The game control device 100 then prepares a prize slot monitoring table corresponding to the start slot 2 switch 37a in the normal variable prize slot device 37 (A2006). It then executes a fraudulent and prize slot monitoring process to monitor for fraudulent prize slots and detect normal prize slots (A2007). Next, it prepares a prize slot monitoring table for prize slot switches that allow prize slots at all times and do not require fraud monitoring (A2008). Prize slot switches that allow prize slots at all times include the start slot 1 switch 36a and the general prize slot 35.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a win count counter update process to update the number of wins (A2009). Then, it updates a status scan counter to specify, in order, which of the multiple switches and signals whose states should be monitored will be the target of this monitoring (A2010). The status scan counter is updated within the range of 0 to 3.

Then, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2011). Then, it executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2012).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the status scan counter value is 0, monitoring of the status (switch abnormality error) based on the abnormality detection signal output when a switch connector becomes unplugged, etc. is set; if the status scan counter value is 1, monitoring of the status (shoot ball out error) based on the chute ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. If the status scan counter value is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set; and if the status scan counter value is 3, monitoring of the status (payout abnormality error) based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. In this way, weak errors are monitored in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares a gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (A2013). Then, it executes a gaming machine status check process to determine the status, such as whether an error has occurred (A2014).

By referencing the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch (glass frame open error) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch (main frame open error, front frame open error) is set. Also, if the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the frame radio wave illegal signal (frame radio wave illegal) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (A2015). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2015 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A2017.

Furthermore, if the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2015 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process (A2016) to set the busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 is able to start payout control, and proceeds to processing of step A2017.

Note that step A2016 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter, which is updated with each timer interrupt, is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. In other words, if a timer interrupt occurs every 4 ms, step A2016 is executed every 16 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a V-passing timing monitoring process to monitor whether the game ball has passed through the specific area switch 72 at an inappropriate timing (A2017). In the V-passing timing monitoring process, if a detection signal for the specific area switch 72 is generated at an inappropriate timing, a V-passing error is detected.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a remaining ball monitoring process to monitor whether any game balls remain in the specific area switch 72 (A2018), and then ends the winning slot switch/status monitoring process.

Note that the V-pass timing monitoring process and remaining ball monitoring process in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process are necessary for so-called Type 1/Type 2 mixed machines (Type 1+Type 2 machines) like this embodiment, and may not be necessary for regular Type 1 pachinko machines.

The gaming machine status check process, which is executed in steps A2012, A2014, etc. in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process, obtains the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter, and if the signal to be checked is off, obtains the target status off command and sends it to the performance control device 300 as a performance command. The gaming machine status check process, which is executed in steps A2012, A2014, etc. in the winning slot switch/status monitoring process, obtains the target status on command and sends it to the performance control device 300 as a performance command if the signal to be checked is on.

If the status-on command is an error-related command, it causes the performance control device 300 to start issuing an error alert. Status-on commands that cause the performance control device 300 to start issuing error alerts include commands that correspond to payout errors (included in weak errors) related to the payout of game balls, such as a shot ball out error, overflow error, or abnormal payout error, as well as commands that correspond to frame open errors (included in strong error 1), such as a glass frame open error or main frame open error, and commands that correspond to frame radio wave irregularity errors (included in strong error 2).

[Fraud and winning monitoring processing]
12 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the fraud and winning monitoring process, which is executed in steps A2003, A2005, and A2007 of the winning port switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG.

The fraud and winning monitoring process is performed on the lower large winning slot switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning slot switch 39a in the special variable winning device 39, and the winning slot switch (starting slot 2 switch 37a) in the regular variable winning device 37. The second starting winning slot (regular variable winning device 37) and the large winning slot (special variable winning devices 38, 39) are prone to fraud, whereby the opening and closing member is forcibly opened to insert game balls and pay out prize balls, so in addition to detecting winnings, they are also monitored for fraud.

The game control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the prize entry switch being monitored for errors (A2101) and determines whether or not it is currently in a fraud monitoring period (A2102). For example, a fraud monitoring period is a period during which the prize entry switch being monitored for errors would not normally detect game balls, and is a period other than the special game state in which the special variable prize entry device 38 is opened when the prize entry switch is the lower large prize entry switch 38a.

If it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the target winning slot switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2103 is "N"), it loads the target alarm timer update information (A2112). Also, if there is an input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2103 is "Y"), it updates the target number of fraudulent wins by +1 (A2104), and determines whether the number of fraudulent wins after the increment is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrences to be monitored (for example, 5) (A2105).

The reason for setting the number of judgments to five is to prevent fraud from being judged as occurring in cases such as when a game ball gets caught in the door member of the large prize opening when the opening is switched from an open state to a closed state, and the game ball enters the game after the count switch's validity period has expired, or when noise is present in the signal, and to prevent fraud from being easily judged as an error even when there is no fraud.

If the number of illegal wins is less than the number of determinations (the result of A2105 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a winning slot monitoring table for the target winning slot switch (A2110). If the number of illegal wins is greater than the number of determinations (the result of A2105 is "Y"), the game control device 100 keeps the number of illegal wins at the number of illegal wins determined (A2106) and saves an initial value (e.g., 60,000 ms) in the target illegal win notification timer area (A2107).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraud occurrence command as a presentation command (A2108), and further prepares a fraud win occurrence flag as a fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is "N"), it prepares the winning slot monitoring table for the target winning slot switch (A2110) and executes the winning slot counter update process to set the prize balls (A2111). Details of the winning slot counter update process will be described later.

The game control device 100 then loads the target alarm timer update information (A2112) and determines whether or not the alarm timer is permitted to be updated (A2113). If the alarm timer is not permitted to be updated (the result of A2113 is "N"), the fraud and winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the alarm timer is permitted to be updated (the result of A2113 is "Y"), the target alarm timer is updated by -1 if it is not 0 (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the alarm timer is set to 0.

Updating the alarm timer is permitted if the prize slot switch being monitored for errors is the prize slot switch (starting slot 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable prize slot device 37. Also, if there are two prize slot switches in one special variable prize slot device (large prize slot), updating the alarm timer is permitted if one of the prize slot switches is being monitored for errors, but not permitted if the other prize slot switch is being monitored for errors. This prevents the alarm timer from being updated twice as frequently for an incorrect notification for one special variable prize slot device, causing it to time out in half the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms).

The game control device 100 then determines whether the value of the alarm timer is 0 (A2115), and if the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), i.e., if the timer has not yet run out, ends the fraud and winning monitoring process. Also, if the value of the alarm timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is "Y"), i.e., if the timer has run out or has already run out, it prepares the target fraud release command as a presentation command (A2116) and prepares an fraud win release flag as a fraud flag (A2117). It then determines whether the moment has come when the value of the alarm timer reached 0 (A2118).

When the value of the alarm timer reaches 0 (the result of A2118 is "Y"), that is, when the value of the alarm timer reaches 0 during this fraud and winning monitoring process, the game control device 100 clears the number of fraudulent winnings (A2119).

Furthermore, after the processing of step A2119 is completed, or if the value of the alarm timer has not reached 0 (the result of A2118 is "N"), that is, if the value of the alarm timer reached 0 during the previous or previous fraud and winning monitoring process, the game control device 100 compares the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value in the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "Y"), the game control device 100 ends the fraud and winning monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared fraud flag does not match the value in the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the prepared fraud flag in the target fraud flag area (A2121) and executes the effect command setting process (A2122). Then, the fraud and winning monitoring process ends.

Through the above processing, a fraud occurrence command is sent to the performance control device 300 when fraud occurs, and a fraud cancellation command is sent to the performance control device 300 when fraud is cleared, thereby setting the start and end of fraud notification.

[Winning number counter update process]
13 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the winning number counter. The winning number counter update process is executed in step A2009 of the winning port switch/status monitoring process shown in FIG. 11 and in step A2111 of the fraud and winning monitoring process shown in FIG. 12.

The game control device 100 first determines whether game play is currently stopped (A2201). It can determine that game play is currently stopped if the safety device is activated (if the safety device activation flag is 1) or if a severe error 2 has occurred that requires game play to be stopped.

When game play is not stopped (result of A2201 is "N"), the game control device 100 obtains the number of winning slot switches to be monitored from the winning slot monitoring table (A2202) and determines whether there is an input to the target winning slot switch (A2203). The winning table in the winning slot monitoring table defines the number of prize balls, the address of winning slot counter area 1, the address of winning slot counter area 2, etc. for each winning slot switch to be monitored. If there is no input (result of A2203 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2215) and a determination is made as to whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2216).

On the other hand, if there is an input to the target winning slot switch (the result of A2203 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the number of acquired game balls from the acquired game ball count area (A2204), adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the target winning slot switch to the number of acquired game balls (A2205), and saves the added value in the acquired game ball count area (A2206). As a result, the number of acquired game balls stored in the acquired game ball count area is updated for each winning slot switch, and the number of acquired game balls ultimately becomes the number of prize balls acquired within one interrupt (total).

The area for the number of winning game balls is located in the work area within the area, and is written by the program for updating the winning number counter (part of the program within the area), and is only read by the program for checking the difference in balls (described below) (part of the program outside the area). Even if input is made to all winning slot switches at the same time, the total number of winning balls will not reach 255 (1 byte), so no upper limit check is made on the number of winning game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2207) and updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208). It then determines whether an overflow will occur due to the updated value (A2209). The winning number counter area 1 is 2 bytes in size (0 to 65535).

If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2209 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in prize count counter area 1 (A2210). After processing step A2210 is completed, or if an overflow has occurred (the result of A2209 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target prize count counter area 2 (A2211).

Then, the gaming control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2212) and determines whether the updated value will cause an overflow (A2213). If an overflow will not occur (the result of A2213 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the number of wins counter area 2 (A2214). The number of wins counter area 2 is 1 byte (0-255) in size.

After completing step A2214, or if an overflow occurs (the result of A2213 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the table address to the address of the next record (A2215). Then, it determines whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (A2216).

If the game control device 100 has not finished monitoring all switches (the result of A2216 is "N"), it returns to step A2203, which determines whether there is an input to the target winning slot switch. If the monitoring of all switches has finished (the result of A2216 is "Y"), it ends the winning number counter update process. As a result, steps A2203-A2216 are repeated until the monitoring of all switches has finished, obtaining the number of acquired game balls, which is the total number of prize balls acquired within one interruption. Winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winnings at each winning slot (each winning area) within one interruption, and winning information is stored.

When game play is stopped (the result of A2201 is "Y"), the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the winning number counter update process. As a result, while game play is stopped, the detection of game balls by the winning slot switch is disabled, the number of acquired game balls is not updated, and winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are not updated, so winning information is not stored and no prize balls are obtained (paid out). Note that the payout of prize balls based on winning information stored before the game stopped (i.e., when game ball detection by the winning slot switch was valid) continues even while game play is stopped.

The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to send payout commands (prize ball commands) to the payout control device 200 to instruct the payout of prize balls, and stores winning data corresponding to prize balls for which a payout command has not yet been sent. In other words, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter that can store information related to prize ball commands.

The winning number counter area 2 is an area used to transmit a main prize ball signal to an external device each time the number of prize balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning balls entering the winning slot reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case), and stores winning data corresponding to prize balls for which the main prize ball signal generation process has not been performed. In other words, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main prize ball signal counter that can store information related to the main prize ball signal.

Each of these winning number counter areas has a winning number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each winning slot (for example, 1 prize ball, 6 prize balls, 15 prize balls), and the count in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the number of prizes won at the winning slot. In other words, winning information can be stored per prize win at the winning slot. Winning number counter area 1 (2 bytes) is allocated a larger area than winning number counter area 2 (1 byte), allowing for the storage of more winning data. This is because, while the main prize ball signal can be sent regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200, which is the destination, resulting in the accumulation of a large amount of unsent data.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the probability setting change/confirmation process. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area included in the work area within RAM 111c.

If the probability setting value is within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402) and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via drivers 150a and 150b (A2404). If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (the result of A2401 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the light-off data as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via drivers 150a and 150b (A2404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data on the display probability setting value displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. Note that, to prevent confusion among hall personnel such as the amusement facility manager or attendants, even if the probability setting values are different, as long as the jackpot probability (and small hit probability) is the same, the display probability setting value may be made the same in correspondence with the jackpot probability (and small hit probability). In other words, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is set to 128 ms (predetermined time) in step A1037. Next, it outputs security signal ON data to the external information terminal 71 to notify an external device (such as the gaming facility internal management device (hall computer)) of an abnormality (A2406). Note that at this time, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as a jackpot signal, are maintained in the OFF state.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the probability setting change in progress flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting change in progress flag is not set (the result of A2407 is "N"), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the game control device 100 ends the probability setting change/confirmation process without doing anything.

When the probability setting change in progress flag is set (the result of A2407 is "Y"), i.e., when the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 determines whether this is the first timer interrupt processing since power-on (A2408). If this is the first timer interrupt processing since power-on (the result of A2408 is "Y"), the probability setting change/confirmation processing ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated if the RAM initialization switch 112 is held down.

If this is not the first timer interrupt process since power-on (the result of A2408 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there has been input to the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409). If there has been no input to the RAM initialization switch (the result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (the result of A2409 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the working setting value in the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or register) by +1 within the possible range, and updates the probability setting value in the probability setting value area by +1 corresponding to the working setting value (A2410). As a result, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by 1 each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. The probability setting change/confirmation process then terminates. Note that when entering setting change mode, the working setting value area (in RAM 111c or register) that stores the working setting value may store a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the probability setting value). Note that if the working setting value is updated by +1 when it is 5 (probability setting value 6), it can return to working setting value 0 (probability setting value 1). Therefore, probability setting values 1 to 6 can be switched by repeatedly updating by +1. Additionally, the possible range of the working setting value is, for example, 0-1 or 0-5 in the case of a multi-stage setting where there are multiple probability setting values, but only 0 in the case of a single-stage setting. In the case of a multi-stage setting, the working setting value and probability setting value are updated to different values each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but in the case of a single-stage setting, they remain the same even when updated (they are updated to the same value).

Furthermore, a command (setting value information command) informing the presentation control device 300 of the setting value may be sent each time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc. Similarly, a test signal may be output to an external test firing device each time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the game state is switched to a setting variable state, etc. It is preferable to suspend these transmissions and outputs if there is an abnormality in the game control device 100, such as a main abnormality. In addition, a command (setting value information command) informing the presentation control device 300 of the setting value may be sent when the game state is switched to a probability variable state, time-saving state, jackpot state, etc., or at the start of a special chart variable display game, or a test signal may be output to an external test firing device.

In the above, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the working setting value each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated. However, it is also possible to store the probability setting value (working setting value) during the setting change in the working setting value area of RAM 111c, and when the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change operation is completed (the result of A1039 is "Y"), the value corresponding to the working setting value in the working setting value area is stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs during the setting change (the result of A1040 is "Y"), it is possible to prevent the probability setting value (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, presentation control, etc. from being changed to an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be explained. Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol game processing. In the special symbol game processing, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire processing related to the special symbol variable display game is controlled, and the display of the special symbol is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a start port switch monitoring process (A2601) to monitor the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37, which constitutes the start winning port 36 or the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and a game result advance determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning before the start of the special chart variable display game based on the winning. Details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special prize opening switch monitoring process (A2602). The special prize opening switch monitoring process monitors the detection of game balls at the special prize opening switches 43 (lower special prize opening switch 38a, upper special prize opening switch 39a).

Next, a specific area switch monitoring process is executed to monitor the entry (entry) of a game ball into the specific area 86 (V entry port) (A2603). Details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, if the special symbol game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (subtracts 1) (A2604). By updating it by -1, the special symbol game processing timer will count only the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process. Note that the minimum value of the special symbol game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special symbol game processing timer is 0 (A2605). If the special symbol game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2605 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2620.

If the special game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2605 is "Y"), i.e., if the timer is up or has already been up, the game control device 100 sets in a register a special game sequence branch table to be referenced for branching to the processing corresponding to the special game processing number (A2606). Furthermore, the game control device 100 obtains the branch destination address of the processing corresponding to the special game processing number using the special game sequence branch table (A2607). Next, it makes a subroutine call using the special game processing number and executes the game branch processing corresponding to the special game processing number (A2608).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A2608, the game control device 100 monitors the start of the special chart change display game, and executes the special chart normal processing (A2609), which sets the start of the special chart change display game, sets the effects, and sets the information necessary to perform special chart change processing. Details of the special chart normal processing will be described later.

If the game processing number is "1" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes special pattern change processing (A2610), which sets the stop display time of the special pattern and sets information necessary for performing processing while the special pattern is displayed. For example, the special pattern change processing sets necessary information such as the pattern stop command indicating the stop of the special pattern and the stop display time corresponding to the stopped pattern pattern, and sets the processing number "2" for the special pattern change processing and saves it in the special pattern game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes special chart display processing, which sets the information necessary to transition to a big win state or a small win state (A2611). For example, in the special chart display processing, if the result of the special chart variation display game is a big win, necessary information such as the big win fanfare command and big win fanfare time is set, processing number "7" is set, and this is saved in the special chart game processing number area. If the result of the special chart variation display game is a small win, necessary information such as the small win fanfare command and small win fanfare time is set, processing number "3" for processing during the small win fanfare is set, and this is saved in the special chart game processing number area. If the result of the special chart variation display game is a miss, processing number "0" for special chart normal processing is set, and this is saved in the special chart game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes small win fanfare processing (A2612). For example, in the small win fanfare processing, the processing number for the small win opening processing is set to "4" and saved in the special game processing number area, the opening time of the large prize opening due to a small win (small prize opening time) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and on data is saved in the upper large prize opening solenoid output data area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes small win release processing (A2613). For example, in the small win release processing, the small win remaining ball processing time (e.g., 0.9 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number for small win remaining ball processing, "5," is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes small win remaining ball processing (A2614). For example, in the small win remaining ball processing, the processing number "6" related to the small win end processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area, and the small win ending time is saved in the special game processing timer area.

If the game processing number is "6" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes small win end processing (A2615). For example, in the small win end processing, if the gaming ball passes through specific area 86 (the so-called V entry port), necessary information such as the jackpot fanfare command and jackpot fanfare time is set, and processing number "7" for fanfare/interval processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area; if the gaming ball does not pass through specific area 86, processing number "0" for special normal processing is set and saved in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "7" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes fanfare/interval processing (A2616), which sets the opening time of the special prize opening, updates the number of times it is opened (number of rounds), and sets information necessary for performing processing while the special prize opening is in progress. For example, the fanfare/interval processing sets necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round game being executed and the opening time of the special prize opening, and then sets the processing number "8" for the processing while the special prize opening is in progress and saves it in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "8" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes the large prize opening process (A2617), which sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, or an ending command if it is the final round, and sets the information necessary to process the remaining balls in the large prize opening. For example, the large prize opening process sets the necessary information, such as the interval command and ending command, and sets the processing number "9" for the remaining balls in the large prize opening and saves it in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "9" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes the remaining balls in the large prize opening processing (A2618), which sets the time for the remaining balls in the large prize opening to be ejected if the jackpot round is the final round, and sets the information necessary for jackpot termination processing. For example, in the remaining balls in the large prize opening processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special prize game processing timer area, and processing number "7" for the fanfare/interval processing is set and saved in the special prize game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special prize game processing timer area, and processing number "10" for the jackpot termination processing is set and saved in the special prize game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "10" in step A2608, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process (A2619) that sets the information necessary to execute the special chart normal processing. For example, the jackpot end process sets the necessary information, such as the normal power support state (time-saving state) after the jackpot state ends, and sets the processing number "0" for the special chart normal processing and saves it in the special chart game processing number area.

When processing based on the special symbol game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special symbol 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations in the special symbol 1 display 51 (A2620), and then executes pattern fluctuation control processing related to the special symbol 1 display 51 (A2621). Then, after preparing a special symbol 2 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations in the special symbol 2 display 52 (A2622), it executes pattern fluctuation control processing related to the special symbol 2 display 52 (A2623). Next, it executes lever solenoid control processing (A2624) that controls the opening operation of the lever solenoid 86b so that it is opened during a small win, and then ends the special symbol game processing.

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special game process will be described. Fig. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the start winning slot 36 (starting slot 1) (A2701), executes a hardware random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether there has been a winning at the start winning slot 36 (A2703). If there has been no winning at the start winning slot 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), it executes the process from step A2709 onwards. On the other hand, if there has been a winning at the start winning slot 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it determines whether the game is in a right-hit state (A2704).

If the game control device 100 determines that the game state is not for right-hitting (the result of A2704 is "N"), it executes the processing from step A2707 onwards. On the other hand, if the game state is for right-hitting (the result of A2704 is "Y"), it prepares a right-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A2705) and executes presentation command setting processing (A2706). In the presentation command setting processing, the presentation command is written to the serial transmission buffer and transmitted to the presentation control device 300.

In other words, in the normal power support state (time-saving state), regardless of the probability state of the variable display game (high probability state/low probability state), a right-hit instruction notification command is prepared and the presentation command setting process is executed. In this embodiment, left-handed hits are more likely to win at the start winning slot 36, while right-handed hits are required to win at the normal variable winning device 37. Furthermore, the game ball will not pass through the normal game start gate 34 unless it is hit with the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time-saving state), right-handed hits are more advantageous than left-handed hits, but if a win occurs at the start winning slot 36 during the normal power support state (i.e., if a left-handed hit is made during the normal power support state), a right-hit instruction notification command is sent to the presentation control device 300, and the presentation control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to hit with the right on the display device 41, etc., via a right-hit instruction display.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting hold information from the start winning slot 36 (starting slot 1) (A2707), and then executes the special starting slot switch common processing (A2708). Then, it prepares a winning monitoring table for the second starting slot (normal variable winning device 37) (A2709), executes the hard random number acquisition processing (A2710), and determines whether or not there has been a winning at the second starting slot (A2711). If there has been no winning at the second starting slot (the result of A2711 is "N"), it terminates the starting slot switch monitoring processing.

On the other hand, if there is a win in the second start winning slot (the result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the normal electric device (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is, whether the normal variable winning device 37 is in an open state allowing game balls to win (A2712). If the normal electric device is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, if the normal electric device is not in operation (the result of A2712 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether normal power fraud is occurring (A2713). It determines that normal power fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent wins into the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). When the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, game balls cannot win; game balls can only win when it is in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, this indicates that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there are game balls that win in such a closed state, the number of such game balls is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, if the number of fraudulent wins counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined fraud determination number (upper limit), it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If normal power fraud is not occurring (the result of A2713 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting hold information by the second start winning port (normal variable winning device 37) (A2714), then executes special chart start port switch common processing (A2715), and terminates the start port switch monitoring processing. Also, if A2713 determines that normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the start port switch monitoring processing is terminated. In other words, no further second start memories are generated.

[Hardware random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (A2702, A2710) in the start port switch monitoring process will be explained. Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hard random number acquisition process.

The game control device 100 first sets start port no-win information indicating that there has been no start port win (A2801). Next, it determines whether there has been an input to the target switch (A2802), and if there has been no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "N"), it terminates the hard random number acquisition process. Note that the target switch in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702 is the start port 1 switch 36a, and in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710 is the start port 2 switch 37a.

When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is "Y"), the game control device 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register) and determines whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is "N"), the hard random number acquisition process ends.

If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is "Y"), the game control device 100 loads the extracted jackpot random number into the target hard random number latch register and prepares it (A2805), loads the extracted special chart pattern random number into the target hard random number latch register and prepares it (A2806), and sets start port winning information indicating that a start port winning has occurred (A2807). The prepared jackpot random number is used in the special chart start port switch common processing.

[Special diagram starter switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special drawing start port switch common processing (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring processing will be explained. Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special drawing start port switch common processing. The special drawing start port switch common processing is a process that is performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

The gaming control device 100 first loads the start gate signal output count, which is the number of times information regarding the number of wins on the monitored start gate switch, either the start gate 1 switch 36a or the start gate 2 switch 37a, is output to an external management device of the gaming machine 10 (A2901), updates the loaded value by +1 (A2902), and determines whether the output count will overflow (A2903). If the output count will not overflow (the result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the start gate signal output count field of the RWM (A2904), and processing proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count will overflow (the result of A2903 is "Y"), processing proceeds to step A2905. In this embodiment, the start gate signal output count field can store values from "0" to "255." If the loaded value is "255," the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the output count will overflow.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols to be updated (start memory number) corresponding to the monitored start symbol switch, between the start symbol 1 switch 36a and the start symbol 2 switch 37a, is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (A2905). If the number of reserved special symbols to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special symbol start symbol switch common processing is terminated. Also, if the number of reserved special symbols to be updated is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of reserved special symbols to be updated (the number of reserved special symbols 1 or the number of reserved special symbols 2) is updated by +1 (A2906), and the target start symbol winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start switch and the number of reserved special symbols to be monitored (A2908), and saves the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (A2909). Next, it saves the special symbol pattern random number prepared in step A2806 in the special symbol pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2910).

The special symbol random number is used in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process and special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process described below to determine the stop symbol number for a small win, the stop symbol number for a support win, or the stop symbol number for a big win, as well as the small win stop symbol pattern, support win stop symbol pattern, or big win stop symbol pattern corresponding to these stop symbol numbers.

In this embodiment, in order to reduce the random number storage area of the RWM, a single random number (common random number) is used to share the special symbol random number and allocate the small win symbols (symbol number that stops when a small win occurs, symbol pattern that stops when a small win occurs), the support symbol (symbol number that stops when a support win occurs, symbol pattern that stops when a support win occurs), and the jackpot symbol (symbol number that stops when a jackpot occurs, symbol pattern that stops when a jackpot occurs). That is, when determining the small win symbol, the range of the special symbol random number is divided and assigned to each small win symbol; when determining the support win symbol, the range of the special symbol random number is divided and assigned to each support win symbol; and when determining the jackpot symbol, the range of the special symbol random number is divided and assigned to each jackpot symbol. Here, the divisions are made non-overlapping. In addition, instead of a shared special symbol random number, a small win symbol random number for determining the small win symbol, a support win symbol random number for determining the time-saving symbol (support win symbol, support win stop symbol), and a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol may each be set independently.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2911) and executes a special symbol pending information determination process (pre-determination process, pre-reading process) that allows the outcome of the fluctuation display game (game result) to be determined in advance (A2912). In the special symbol pending information determination process, pre-reading stop symbol commands corresponding to stop symbol information (jackpot stop symbol, minor jackpot stop symbol, time-saving stop symbol, miss stop symbol) based on the saved jackpot random number and special symbol pattern random number, etc., and pre-reading change pattern commands corresponding to the first half change number (pre-reach change number) and second half change number (post-reach change number) based on the saved fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are set as presentation commands. A decorative special symbol pending number command corresponding to the monitored start port switch and special symbol pending number is then prepared as a presentation command (A2913), and the presentation command setting process (A2914) is executed, thereby terminating the special symbol start port switch common processing. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes a pre-determination means that can determine the outcome of a variable display game before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) serves as a start memory means that extracts predetermined random numbers based on the flow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning slot 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and stores the extracted random numbers up to a predetermined number as start memory, which constitutes the right to play the variable display game. The start memory means (game control device 100) also stores various random number values extracted based on the entry of game balls into the first start winning slot (start winning slot 36) up to a predetermined number as first start memory, and stores various random number values extracted based on the entry of game balls into the second start winning slot (normal variable winning device 37) up to a predetermined number as second start memory.

[Special drawing reservation information determination processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol reserved information determination process (A2912) in the start port switch common process will be described. Figure 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol reserved information determination process. The special symbol reserved information determination process is a pre-reading (pre-determination) process that determines the result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special symbol variable display game based on the corresponding start memory.

The gaming control device 100 first determines whether the preliminary determination of this special symbol hold information determination process is a determination regarding the hold of special symbol 2 (A3001). If a table for setting hold information by start winning port 36 (start winning port 1) is prepared in step A2707, the determination is regarding the hold of special symbol 1. If a table for setting hold information by the second start winning port (start winning port 2, normal variable winning device 37) is prepared in step A2714, the determination is regarding the hold of special symbol 2.

If the determination is regarding the reservation of special chart 1 (the result of A3001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not a jackpot is currently being achieved (A3002). If the jackpot is not currently being achieved (the result of A3002 is "N"), it determines whether or not normal power support is currently being achieved (A3003).

The game control device 100 terminates the special chart reserved information determination process if a jackpot is occurring (the result of A3002 is "Y") or if normal power support is occurring (the result of A3003 is "Y"). As a result, no pre-reading (pre-determination) regarding special chart 1 reserved is performed during a jackpot or normal power support.

If the determination is regarding the special chart 2 reservation (the result of A3001 is "Y") or normal power support is not in progress (the result of A3003 is "N"), the game control device 100 begins processing from step A3004 onwards, and first executes a jackpot determination process to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on whether the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3004). This allows for pre-reading (pre-determination) regarding the special chart 1 reservation to be performed in a state that is neither a jackpot nor normal power support, such as in a normal game state or a small jackpot state. Furthermore, pre-reading (pre-determination) regarding the special chart 2 reservation can be performed regardless of the game state.

If the determination result is a jackpot (the result of A3005 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the jackpot pattern check table corresponding to the target start port switch (A3006), obtains the stop pattern information corresponding to the prepared special pattern random number from the jackpot pattern check table (A3007), and proceeds to processing in step A3015.

If the determination result is not a jackpot (the result of A3005 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a small jackpot determination process (A3008) to determine whether it is a small jackpot based on whether the jackpot random number value matches the small jackpot determination value. If the determination result is a small jackpot (the result of A3009 is "Y"), it sets a small jackpot pattern check table (A3010), obtains the stop pattern information corresponding to the prepared special pattern random number from the small jackpot pattern check table (A3007), and proceeds to processing in step A3015.

If the judgment result is not a small win (the result of A3009 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes a support win judgment process (A3011) to determine whether or not there is a support win (a win on the time-saving symbol, a time-saving win) based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the support win judgment value. If the judgment result is a support win (the result of A3012 is "Y"), it sets a support win symbol check table (A3013), obtains stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared special symbol random number from the support win symbol check table (A3007), and proceeds to processing in step A3015.

If the determination result is not a support win (the result of A3012 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets the stopping symbol information for a loss (A3014) and proceeds to processing in step A3015.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a pre-reading stop pattern command corresponding to the target start switch and stop pattern information as a presentation command (A3015), and executes a presentation command setting process (A3016). Next, it executes a special chart information setting process (A3017) to set special chart information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, and executes a variation pattern setting process (A3018) to set the variation mode of the special chart variation display game.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares, as a presentation command, a predictive variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special chart variation display game (A3019), performs a presentation command setting process (A3020), and terminates the special chart pending information determination process. Note that the special chart information setting process in step A3017 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3018 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special chart variation display game in the special chart normal processing. In the presentation command setting process, the presentation command is written to the serial transmission buffer, and the presentation command is sent to the presentation control device 300.

Through the above processing, a pre-read symbol command containing the result of the special symbol variation display game based on the start memory to be pre-read, and a pre-read variation pattern command containing information on the variation pattern in the special symbol variation display game based on that start memory are prepared and sent to the presentation control device 300. This makes it possible to notify the presentation control device 300 of the judgment result (pre-read result) of result-related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a jackpot or not, and the type of variation pattern) prior to the start timing of the special symbol variation display game based on the corresponding start memory, and in particular, by changing the decorative special symbol start memory display displayed on the display device 41, it becomes possible to notify the player of the result-related information prior to the start timing of the special symbol variation display game.

In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a pre-determination means for determining the random number stored as a start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on that start memory (for example, determining whether a special result will result). Note that the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory may be determined in advance not only at the time of the start winning when that start memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on that start memory is executed.

Note that the jackpot determination process, small hit determination process, and support hit determination process described above are processes common to the jackpot determination process, small hit determination process, and support hit determination process in other processes executed during timer interrupt processing. When the jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value, small hit determination value, or support hit determination value, it is determined to be a jackpot, small hit, or support hit, respectively. For example, the hit determination value is a series of multiple values that are greater than or equal to the lower limit determination value and less than or equal to the upper limit determination value, and the hit probability can be (upper limit determination value - lower limit determination value + 1) / (range of jackpot random number).

Naturally, to prevent the results of the same special chart variable display game from simultaneously resulting in two or more jackpots (jackpot, small jackpot, and support jackpot), the ranges of jackpot determination values, small jackpot determination value ranges, and support jackpot determination value ranges do not overlap. Note that in this embodiment, no unique small jackpot random numbers or support jackpot random numbers are set, and the jackpot random numbers are used for small jackpot and support jackpot determination as well, but it is also possible to set unique small jackpot random numbers and support jackpot random numbers.

The probability of a jackpot, small hit, or support hit may differ between the low probability state (normal probability state other than the special probability state) and the high probability state (special probability state), or may differ depending on the probability setting value. It is also possible to configure the jackpot probability, small hit probability, or support hit probability to be the same even if the probability setting value is different.

[Big prize slot switch monitoring process]
Next, the special prize opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special game process will be described in detail. Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special prize opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the value of the special game processing number is "8", i.e., whether the large prize opening is currently being processed (A3101). If the large prize opening is currently being processed (the result of A3101 is "Y"), it proceeds to processing in step A3105. If the large prize opening is not currently being processed (the result of A3101 is "N"), it determines whether the value of the special game processing number is "9", i.e., whether the remaining balls in the large prize opening are currently being processed (A3102).

If the game control device 100 is currently processing the remaining balls in the large prize slot (the result of A3102 is "Y"), it proceeds to processing in step A3105. If the game control device 100 is not currently processing the remaining balls in the large prize slot (the result of A3102 is "N"), it determines whether the value of the special game processing number is "4", i.e., whether a small prize opening is being processed (A3103). If the game control device 100 is currently processing the small prize opening (the result of A3103 is "Y"), it proceeds to processing in step A3105. If the game control device 100 is not currently processing the small prize opening (the result of A3103 is "N"), it determines whether the value of the special game processing number is "5", i.e., whether a small prize remaining ball is being processed (A3104). The special game processing number does not proceed to the next number until the special game processing timer reaches 0, so the progress of the game can be checked using the special game processing number in this way.

If the game control device 100 is not currently processing the remaining small win balls (the result of A3104 is "N"), it ends the large win slot switch monitoring process. If the game control device 100 is currently processing the remaining small win balls (the result of A3104 is "Y"), it proceeds to step A3105. It then determines whether there is an input to the large win slot switch 43 (lower large win slot switch 38a, upper large win slot switch 39a) (A3105).

When there is an input to the special prize slot switch 43 (the result of A3105 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a special prize slot count command as a presentation command (A3106) and executes the presentation command setting process (A3107). It then determines whether or not the remaining balls in the special prize slot are being processed (A3108). If the remaining balls in the special prize slot are being processed (the result of A3108 is "Y"), it ends the special prize slot switch monitoring process. If the remaining balls in the special prize slot are not being processed (the result of A3108 is "N"), it determines whether or not the remaining balls in the special prize slot are being processed (A3109).

If the game control device 100 is currently processing the remaining small win balls (the result of A3109 is "Y"), it terminates the large win slot switch monitoring process; if it is not currently processing the remaining small win balls (the result of A3109 is "N"), it updates the large win slot count by +1 (A3110) and determines whether the large win slot count has reached or exceeded the upper limit (the number of game balls that can win in one round, for example, 10) (A3111).

If the large prize slot count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (result of A3111 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the large prize slot switch monitoring process. Also, if the large prize slot count is equal to or greater than the upper limit (result of A3111 is "Y"), the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3112). This closes the large prize slot, ending one round. Next, it determines whether the small prize slot opening process is in progress (A3113).

If the game control device 100 is not currently processing a small win opening (the result of A3113 is "N"), it terminates the large prize opening switch monitoring process. If it is currently processing a small win opening (the result of A3113 is "Y"), it saves the value of the end of the small win opening operation in the large prize opening control pointer area (A3114) and terminates the large prize opening switch monitoring process. Note that in this embodiment, since the large prize opening may be opened multiple times during a small win opening for a single small win, the value of the end of the small win opening operation is saved in the large prize opening control pointer area here. If the large prize opening is configured to be opened multiple times during a single jackpot opening, the value of the end of the jackpot opening operation may similarly be saved in the large prize opening control pointer area when processing a jackpot opening.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
Next, the specific area switch monitoring process (A2603) in the special game process will be described in detail. Fig. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the specific area switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a small win is occurring (A3201). For example, if the special game processing number is "3", "4", or "5", it can be determined that a small win is occurring. If a small win is occurring (the result of A3201 is "Y"), it determines whether the specific area has been passed (A3202). If normal passage information or abnormal passage information is saved in the specific area passage information area, it can be determined that the specific area has been passed.

If the game ball has not yet passed through the specific area (the result of A3202 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (A3203). If there is an input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3203 is "Y"), that is, if there is a win in the specific area 86 (V win), a specific area pass command is prepared as a presentation command (A3204) and presentation command setting processing is performed (A3205). Furthermore, at this point, a specific area pass flag indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area may be set to the specific area pass area.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 is not in a small win state (the result of A3201 is "N"), if the specific area has already been passed (the result of A3202 is "Y"), or if there is no input to the specific area switch 72 (the result of A3203 is "N"), it will end the specific area switch monitoring process without doing anything.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not this is an irregular V win (A3206). In this embodiment, if the result of the special chart 1 variable display game is a small win (special chart 1 small win), or if the result of the special chart 2 variable display game related to a reserve other than a remaining reserve in the normal game state is a small win (special chart 2 small win), this is an irregular V win. In other words, in this embodiment, if a special chart 2 small win occurs in the specific game state (time-shortened state), or if a special chart 2 small win occurs in the special chart 2 variable display game related to a remaining reserve, this is a normal V win.

If the V win is not an irregular one, i.e., if the V win is normal (the result of A3206 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves normal passage information in the specific area passage information area (A3207). If the V win is irregular (the result of A3206 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves abnormal passage information in the specific area passage information area (A3208). Then, it sets the round number upper limit value table (A3209).

Next, the game control device 100 obtains the round number upper limit value (e.g., 3 or 10) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information and saves it in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (A3210). The round number upper limit value is the upper limit value for the number of rounds and corresponds to the number of rounds of the final round. Next, the game control device 100 obtains the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information and saves it in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A3211).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of a jackpot in the external information output data area of the RWM (A3212). For example, the signal related to the start of a jackpot is ON data for the jackpot 1 signal (ON for a jackpot or a small jackpot on special chart 2), ON data for the jackpot 2 signal (ON for a jackpot, a small jackpot on special chart 2, the time-saving mode, or the remaining reserved consumption period of special chart 2), or ON data for the jackpot 3 signal (ON for a jackpot or a small jackpot on special chart 2). Note that the signals related to the start of a jackpot (ON/OFF of the jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, etc.) may be defined by the machine type. Then, test signals related to the start of a jackpot (for example, ON for the condition device operating signal, ON for the special device continuous operation device operating signal, OFF for the condition device operation area 1 active signal, and OFF for the special device continuous operation device operation area 1 active signal) are saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A3213).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the time-saving state in the test signal output data area (A3214), saves a normal symbol no support flag in the normal symbol game mode flag area (A3215), clears the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A3216), and saves a special symbol low probability & no time-saving flag in the special symbol game mode flag area (A3217). Then, it saves a probability information command (special symbol low probability & no time-saving) in the power outage recovery transmission command area, which saves commands output to the performance control device 300 when the power outage is restored (A3218).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the time-saving variation count 1 area, which corresponds to the remaining number of times the special symbol variation display game will be executed in the time-saving state (A3219), and clears the time-saving variation count 2 area, which corresponds to the remaining number of times the special symbol variation display game will be executed in the time-saving state (A3220). Then, it clears the ceiling counter area, which indicates the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been executed in a state other than the probability variation state (A3221), clears the ceiling time-saving activation flag area, in which the ceiling time-saving activation flag is stored (A3222), and clears the ceiling reached flag area, in which the ceiling reached flag is stored (A3223).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves the number of presentation mode 1 in the presentation mode number area (A3224), clears the remaining presentation spin count area (A3225), saves a no-update code in the next mode transition information area (A3226), saves information other than the normal base state in the normal base state determination area (A3227), and ends the specific area switch monitoring process. In this way, presentation mode 1 during the jackpot state is set before the jackpot state begins.

[Special chart normal processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol normal processing (A2609) in the special symbol game processing will be described. Fig. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the remaining ball counter for the special prize opening is 0 (A3301). If the remaining ball counter for the special prize opening is not 0 (the result of A3301 is "N"), the special chart change display game is not started and the process proceeds to step A3314.

When the remaining ball counter for the large prize slot is 0 (the result of A3301 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the number of reserved special symbols 2 (second start memory number) is 0 (A3302). When the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 (the result of A3302 is "Y"), it determines whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 (first start memory number) is 0 (A3306). Then, when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 0 (the result of A3306 is "Y"), it determines whether the customer waiting demo has started (A3310), and if the customer waiting demo has not started (the result of A3310 is "N"), it sets the customer waiting demo in progress flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3311).

The game control device 100 then prepares a customer waiting demo command as a presentation command (A3312), performs presentation command setting processing (A3313), and proceeds to processing in step A3314. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A3310 (the result of A3310 is "Y"), the processing number is set to "0" for the special game normal processing (A3314), the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (A3315), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3316). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large prize slot fraud monitoring period flag area (A3317), and the special game normal processing ends.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 is not 0 (the result of A3302 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol reserve number command (decorative special symbol 2 reserve number command) corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 2 as a presentation command (A3303), and executes presentation command setting processing (A3304). Note that the decorative special symbol reserve number command here may include information corresponding to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current number of reserved special symbols 2, taking into account that the number of reserved special symbols 2 will decrease by 1 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is started later. Alternatively, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 managed by the presentation control device 300 will decrease by 1 when the special symbol 2 variable display game is started, the decorative special symbol reserve number command here may include information corresponding to the current number of reserved special symbols 2. Thereafter, the special symbol 2 variable start processing is executed (A3305), and the normal special symbol processing ends.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is not 0 (the result of A3306 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol reserve number command (decorative special symbol 1 reserve number command) corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 1 as a presentation command (A3307), and executes presentation command setting processing (A3308). Note that the decorative special symbol reserve number command here may include information corresponding to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current number of reserved special symbols 1, taking into account that the number of reserved special symbols 1 will decrease by 1 when the special symbol 1 variable display game is later started. Alternatively, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 managed by the presentation control device 300 will decrease by 1 when the special symbol 1 variable display game is started, the decorative special symbol reserve number command here may include information corresponding to the current number of reserved special symbols 1. Thereafter, the special symbol 1 variable start processing is executed (A3309), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

In this way, by checking the number of reserved special charts 2 before checking the number of reserved special charts 1, if the reserved special chart 2 number is not 0, the special chart 2 variation start process (A3305) will be executed. In other words, the special chart 2 variation display game will be executed in priority over the special chart 1 variation display game (special chart 2 reservation priority consumption). In other words, if the second start memory is stored in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the gaming control device 100 serves as a priority control means that executes the variation display game based on the second start memory in priority over the variation display game based on the first start memory.

[Special Chart 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 variation start process (A3309) in the special chart normal process will be explained. Figure 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 variation start process. The special chart 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special symbol 1 change flag, which indicates the type of special symbol change display game to be executed (special symbol 1 in this case), in the change symbol discrimination area (A3401). Next, it executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402), which sets miss information or jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 to determine whether the special symbol 1 change display game is a jackpot. Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) to set the special symbol 1 stop symbol (symbol information) for the special symbol 1 variable display game. The special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process saves the stop symbol number for a miss, a support hit, a small hit, or a big hit, and the miss stop symbol pattern, support hit stop symbol pattern, small hit stop symbol pattern, or big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number. The stop symbol numbers for a support hit, a small hit, or a big hit are each determined in accordance with the special symbol pattern random number.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special chart information setting process to set special chart information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special chart 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table containing information for referencing various information related to setting the variation pattern of the special chart 1 variation display game (A3405).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process (A3406) that assigns and sets a variation pattern (variation pattern number), which is the variation mode in the special chart 1 variation display game. In this embodiment, the variation pattern consists of a first half variation pattern, which is the variation mode from the start of the special chart variation display game until the reach state is reached, and a second half variation pattern, which is the variation mode from the reach state is reached until the end of the special chart variation display game. The variation pattern setting process obtains the first half variation number corresponding to the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number corresponding to the second half variation pattern, and saves them in the first half variation number area and the second half variation number area, respectively. Note that a configuration in which the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern are not distinguished is also possible.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process to set fluctuation start information for the special chart 1 fluctuation display game (A3407). In the fluctuation start information setting process, a fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is obtained and saved in the special chart game processing timer area. Then, a fluctuation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is prepared as a presentation command, and the presentation command setting process is performed. In addition, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the number of reserved special charts related to the special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2) of the special chart fluctuation display game that is about to start is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "1" for processing during special chart fluctuation (A3408) and saves the processing number in the special chart game processing number area (A3409).

The game control device 100 then clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410) and saves a signal related to the start of special symbol 1 fluctuation (turning on the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) in the test signal output data area (A3411). It then saves a fluctuation flag in the special symbol 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412) and sets an initial value (e.g., 100 ms) for the blinking control timer (a timer for the blinking period of the special symbol 1 display 51) in the special symbol 1 blinking control timer area (A3413). It then saves an initial value (e.g., 0) in the special symbol 1 variable symbol number area (A3414), and ends the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process.

In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability) and the presence or absence of a time-saving state (with/without time-saving) do not directly affect the allocation of variation patterns; the presentation mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the allocation of variations. One presentation mode is set from multiple presentation modes depending on the probability state, the presence or absence of a time-saving state, the progress of the special chart variation display game, etc. Variations may also be allocated directly based on the probability state, the presence or absence of a time-saving state, the progress of the special chart variation display game, etc.

[Special Chart 2 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 variation start process (A3305) in the special chart normal process will be explained. Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 variation start process. The special chart 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special chart 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special chart 1 variation start process shown in Figure 23, but for the second start memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the special symbol 2 variable flag, which indicates the type of special symbol variable display game to be executed (special symbol 2 in this case), in the variable symbol discrimination area (A3501). Next, it executes the jackpot flag 2 setting process, which sets miss information or jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 to determine whether the special symbol 2 variable display game is a jackpot or not (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special chart 2 stop pattern setting process to set the special chart 2 stop pattern (pattern information) for the special chart 2 variable display game (A3503). Furthermore, it executes a special chart information setting process to set the special chart information, which is a parameter for setting the variable pattern (A3504). Next, it prepares a special chart 2 variable pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information is set for referencing various information related to setting the variable pattern of the special chart 2 variable display game (A3505).

Then, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process to set the variation pattern of the special chart 2 variation display game by allocation (A3506). Then, it executes a variation start information setting process to set information on the start of variation in the special chart 2 variation display game (A3507).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "1" for processing during special chart fluctuation (A3508) and saves the processing number in the special chart game processing number area (A3509).

The game control device 100 then clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510) and saves a signal related to the start of special symbol 2 fluctuation (turning on the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal) in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, it saves the fluctuation flag in the special symbol 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512) and sets the initial value (e.g., 100 ms) of the flashing control timer (the timer for the flashing period of the special symbol 2 display 52) in the special symbol 2 flashing control timer area (A3513). Next, it saves the initial value (e.g., 0) in the special symbol 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3514), and ends the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process.

[Jackpot flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special chart 1 variation start process will be described. Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves miss information in the jackpot flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the support hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, it loads and prepares a jackpot random number from the RWM's special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A3602), and clears the special chart 1 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A3603). Note that reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special chart start memory that is first in the consumption order (here, the first of special chart 1). It then executes a jackpot determination process that determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3604).

If the result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3601 (A3606), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is not a jackpot (the result of A3605 is "N"), a small jackpot determination process is executed (A3608), which determines whether or not there is a small jackpot depending on whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the small jackpot determination value. In this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a small jackpot. If the result of the small jackpot determination process (A3607) is a small jackpot (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the small jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the small jackpot flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3601 (A3709), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of the small win determination process (A3607) is not a small win (the result of A3608 is "N"), a support win determination process is executed (A3610) to determine whether the special symbol variation display game is a support win based on the obtained jackpot random number value, and the result of the determination is determined to be a support win or not (A3611). Note that in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine a support win. Here, a support win (time-saving win) in a special symbol variation display game refers to a time-saving result (specific result) that enters a time-saving state from the next special symbol variation display game. In response to this time-saving result, a time-saving pattern can be displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol variation display unit 51 or second special symbol variation display unit 52) and the display device 41 as a result of stopping the special symbol variation display game.

If the special chart variable display game is a support hit (the result of A3611 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area where the miss information was saved in step A3601 (A3612), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the special chart variable display game is not a support hit (the result of A3611 is "N"), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

In this way, in this embodiment, the result of the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game will be one of "Big Hit," "Small Hit," "Support Hit (Time-Reduction Hit)," or "Miss."

If the result of the special chart variation display game is a support hit result (time-saving result), the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503) sets the time-saving pattern (time-saving pattern number, time-saving pattern) as the stop pattern (stop pattern number, stop pattern), and the next special chart variation display game enters the time-saving state. In other words, in this case, the time-saving state is suddenly entered without going through a jackpot (sudden time-saving). Also, in this case, the time-saving pattern is displayed on the special chart display device, and a decorative special chart command corresponding to the time-saving pattern is sent to the performance control device 300, and the time-saving pattern (decorative time-saving pattern) is also displayed as a decorative stop pattern on the display device 41 by the performance control device 300.

The time-saving symbols displayed on the display device 41 can be, for example, "1, 1, 3," where only the left and center symbols are aligned. There are no restrictions on the time-saving symbols as long as they are decided in advance, but symbols with a pattern, such as "1, 2, 3," where the numbers are arranged in order, or "1, 3, 1," where only the left and right symbols are aligned, are preferred as they are easier for players to remember. Multiple time-saving symbols can be prepared, and the number of special symbol variable display games that will continue the time-saving state (number of time-saving times) can be determined for each time-saving symbol.

When a time-saving result (time-saving symbol) occurs, lamp display units 1 and 2 of lamp display device 80 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol), unlike when a jackpot or small jackpot result occurs. For example, lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red when a jackpot or small jackpot result occurs, and may emit light in a neutral or cool color (i.e., a color other than a warm color) such as green or blue when a time-saving result (time-saving symbol) occurs. Furthermore, they are turned off in the event of a miss. Therefore, when a time-saving symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that a jackpot has occurred, and it is easier for the player to understand that they have won the time-saving feature.

Note that if the number of times the special symbol variation display game (excluding the number of times in the special symbol variation state) played after the end of the jackpot state reaches a predetermined number (the so-called ceiling number of times, time-saving ceiling), the game will enter a time-saving state (Yu-time) even if no support hit is won. At this time, if the result of the special symbol variation display game is a miss, lamp display units 1 and 2 will be unlit, and if it is a small hit or a jackpot, they will emit warm colors. Note that at this time, if there is neither a small hit nor a jackpot, lamp display units 1 and 2 may emit cool colors as the fourth symbol to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game will enter a time-saving state. The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 or 800 times. In this case, a miss symbol (which may be a time-saving symbol) or a small hit symbol (if it is a small hit without a V win) will be displayed as the stopping symbol on the special symbol display device or display device 41, and the game will enter a time-saving state from the next special symbol variation display game.

[Jackpot Flag 2 Setting Process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special chart 2 variation start process will be described. Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves miss information in the jackpot flag 2 area and the small win flag 2 area (A3701). Next, it loads and prepares a jackpot random number from the RWM's special chart 2 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A3702), and clears the special chart 2 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A3703). Note that reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) about the special chart start memory that is first in the consumption order (in this case, the first of the special chart 2). It then executes a jackpot determination process that determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704). If the result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3706), and terminates the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is not a jackpot (the result of A3705 is "N"), it executes a small jackpot determination process (A3707) to determine whether or not there is a small jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the small jackpot determination value.

If the result of the small hit determination process (A3707) is a small hit (the result of A3708 is "Y"), the game control device 100 overwrites and saves the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the miss information was saved in step A3701 (A3709), and ends the big hit flag 2 setting process.

On the other hand, if the special chart variable display game is not a small win (the result of A3708 is "N"), the game control device 100 ends the big win flag 2 setting process.

As such, in this embodiment, the result of the special chart 2 variable display game will be either a "jackpot," a "small hit," or a "miss." However, as an option, it is also possible to configure the special chart 2 variable display game to result in a "support hit (time-saving hit)," similar to the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

[Special chart 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special chart 1 variable start process will be described. Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first loads the special symbol random number from the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4001). It then determines whether or not jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot, i.e., whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (A4002). If jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot (the result of A4002 is "Y"), it then sets the special symbol 1 jackpot symbol table (A4003), obtains the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number, and saves it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area of the RWM (A4004). This process selects the special symbol 1 jackpot symbol as the type of special result.

The game control device 100 then sets the special 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4005), obtains the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol on the display device 41 can be set based on the stop symbol pattern. Then, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special 1 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (A4007). This information is used to set the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not a time reduction state is in effect after the jackpot ends (time reduction or no time reduction) and the number of times time reduction has occurred. Next, the game control device 100 saves the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number) and the probability state (A4009). After that, the process proceeds to step A4023.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 does not indicate a big hit (the result of A4002 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 1 indicates a small hit (A4010). If the small hit flag 1 indicates a small hit (the result of A4010 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the special chart 1 small hit symbol table (A4011). Then, by referencing the special chart 1 small hit symbol table, the stopping symbol number corresponding to the loaded special chart symbol random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 1 stopping symbol number area (A4012). This process selects the special chart 1 small hit symbol as the type of special result. Next, the stopping symbol pattern corresponding to the stopping symbol number is obtained and saved in the stopping symbol pattern area (A4013). After that, the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern is saved (A4014). Then, the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A4023.

On the other hand, if the small win flag 1 does not indicate a small win (the result of A4010 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the support win flag 1 indicates a support win (A4015). If the support win flag 1 indicates a support win (the result of A4015 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the special chart 1 support win pattern table (A4016). Then, by referencing the special chart 1 support win pattern table, the stopping pattern number corresponding to the loaded special chart pattern random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 1 stopping pattern number area (A4017). This process selects the special chart 1 support win pattern as the type of special result. Next, the stopping pattern pattern corresponding to the stopping pattern number is obtained and saved in the stopping pattern pattern area (A4018). After that, time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopping pattern number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (A4019), and the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stopping pattern pattern is saved (A4020). Then, proceed to step A4023.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 does not indicate a big hit (the result of A4002 is "N"), if the small hit flag 1 does not indicate a small hit (the result of A4010 is "N"), and if the support hit flag 1 does not indicate a support hit (the result of A4015 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop pattern number at the time of loss in the special chart 1 stop pattern number area (A4021), and saves the loss stop pattern in the stop pattern area (A4022). Then, it proceeds to processing of step A4023.

After steps A4009, A4014, A4020, and A4022, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern (A4023) and saves the decorative special symbol command in the decorative special symbol command area as a performance command (A4024). Through the above processing, the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 1 variable display game is set.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4025). As a result, the decorative special symbol command is sent to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A4026) and clears the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A4027). The special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process then ends. Furthermore, the aforementioned pattern change control process causes the special pattern 1 display 51 to display the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, small win pattern, time-saving pattern, loss pattern, etc.) corresponding to the stop pattern number (or stop pattern).

[Special chart 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special chart 2 variable start process will be described. Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first loads the special symbol random number from the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (A4101). It then determines whether or not jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot, i.e., whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (A4102). If jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot (the result of A4102 is "Y"), it then sets the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol table (A4103), obtains the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number, and saves it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area of the RWM (A4104). This process selects the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol as the type of special result. Note that if the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol table is different from the special symbol 1 jackpot symbol table, the allocation of jackpot symbols for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 will differ.

The game control device 100 then sets the special 2 jackpot stop symbol information table (A4105), obtains the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol on the display device 41 can be set based on the stop symbol pattern. Then, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the special 2 round number upper limit information area of the RWM (A4107). This information is used to set the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on whether or not a time reduction state is in effect after the end of the jackpot (time reduction or no time reduction) and the number of times time reduction has occurred. Next, the game control device 100 saves the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or stopped symbol number) and the probability state (A4109). After that, the game control device proceeds to processing in step A4117.

If the big hit flag 2 does not indicate a big hit (the result of A4102 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (A4110). If the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (the result of A4110 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the special chart 2 small hit pattern table (A4111). Then, by referring to the special chart 2 small hit pattern table, the stopping pattern number corresponding to the loaded special chart pattern random number is obtained and saved in the special chart 2 stopping pattern number area (A4112). This process selects the special chart 2 small hit pattern as the type of special result. Note that if the special chart 2 small hit pattern table is different from the special chart 1 small hit pattern table, the allocation of small hit patterns for special chart 1 and special chart 2 will differ. Next, the stopping symbol pattern corresponding to the stopping symbol number is obtained and saved in the stopping symbol pattern area (A4113), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern is saved (A4114), and processing proceeds to step A4117.

If the big hit flag 2 does not indicate a big hit (the result of A4102 is "N") and the small hit flag 2 does not indicate a small hit (the result of A4110 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the stop pattern number at the time of loss in the special symbol 2 stop pattern number area (A4115) and saves the loss stop pattern in the stop pattern area (A4116). Then, the process proceeds to step A4117.

After steps A4109, A4114, and A4116, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern (A4117) and saves the decorative special symbol command in the decorative special symbol command area as a performance command (A4118). Through the above processing, the stopping symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol 2 variable display game is set.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the effect command setting process (A4119). The decorative special symbol command is sent to the effect control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the pattern data corresponding to the stop pattern number in the test signal output data area (A4120) and clears the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (A4121). The special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process then ends. Note that the aforementioned pattern change control process causes the special pattern 2 display 52 to display the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, small win pattern, time-saving pattern, loss pattern, etc.) corresponding to the stop pattern number (or stop pattern).

In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution means that executes the special chart 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the first start winning port 36, and executes the special chart 2 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of a game ball at the normal variable winning device 37. The game control device 100 also serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Variable start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special chart 1 fluctuation start process and the special chart 2 fluctuation start process will be described. Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area for the target variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, it sets a first half variable time value table (A4602) and obtains the first half variable time value corresponding to the first half variable number (A4603). It then sets a second half variable time value table (A4604) and obtains the second half variable time value corresponding to the second half variable number (A4605).

The game control device 100 then adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606) and saves the added value (total fluctuation time value) in the special symbol game processing timer area (A4607). After that, it prepares a fluctuation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half fluctuation number (A4608), prepares a fluctuation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half fluctuation number as a presentation command (A4609), and performs presentation command setting processing (A4610). Next, it updates the special symbol reserve number corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag indicating the symbol of the starting fluctuation (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) by -1 (A4611), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag (A4612). Next, it shifts the random number storage area (A4613), clears the free space after the shift (A4614), and terminates the fluctuation start information setting processing.

The above processing sets information related to the start of the special symbol variable display game. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as a judgment means for judging various random number values stored in the start memory means (game control device 100). The game control device 100 also serves as a variation pattern determination means that can determine the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game based on the judgment information in the start memory.

Information relating to the start of these special symbol variation display games is then later transmitted to the performance control device 300, which, based on the information received regarding the start of the special symbol variation display game, sets detailed performance content for the decorative special symbol variation display game in accordance with the determined variation pattern. Information relating to the start of these special symbol variation display games includes a decorative special symbol reserve number command containing information regarding the start memory number (reserved number), a decorative special symbol command containing information regarding the stop symbol, and a variation command containing information regarding the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display game, and the commands are transmitted to the performance control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special symbol command before the variation command, processing in the performance control device 300 can be carried out more efficiently.

[Special chart change processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process (A2610) in the special symbol game process will be described in detail. Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol variation process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a pattern stop command (special pattern 1 pattern stop command or special pattern 2 pattern stop command) corresponding to the variable pattern discrimination flag (special pattern 1 variable flag or special pattern 2 variable flag) as a presentation command (A4701), and executes the presentation command setting process (A4702). The variable pattern discrimination flag indicates the variable pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) that will start, and determines whether the started special pattern variable display game is the special pattern 1 variable display game or the special pattern 2 variable display game. Upon receiving the pattern stop command, the presentation control device 300 stops the corresponding decorative special pattern variable display game (decorative special pattern 1 variable display game or decorative special pattern 2 variable display game).

Next, the game control device 100 sets the stop display time (display time) corresponding to the stop pattern number indicating the stop pattern (A4703), and saves the set stop display time in the special game processing timer area (A4704). In this embodiment, if the stop pattern is a miss pattern, a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a support win pattern, a common stop display time of 600 msec is set. Because the stop display time is common, control is simplified and the program capacity of the game control program can be reduced.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the presentation mode is in support mode B (time-saving mode #1B) (A4705). If it is not in support mode B (the result of A4705 is "N"), that is, if it is in a presentation mode other than support mode B (including modes other than time-saving modes), it executes a time-saving end determination process to determine the end of time saving (A4706) and proceeds to processing in step A4707. If the presentation mode is in support mode B (the result of A4705 is "Y"), it proceeds to processing in step A4707 without executing the time-saving end determination process to determine the end of time saving.

Therefore, in Support Mode B, the end of time saving (i.e., the end of normal power support) is not set when the special chart change processing is executed, i.e., when the change in the special chart change display game ends (just before the display of the stopped symbols begins or when the display starts). However, in presentation modes other than Support Mode B, the end of time saving (the end of normal power support) may be set when the special chart change processing is executed. As described below, presentation modes other than Support Mode B include Support Mode A (Time Saving Mode #1A), Time Saving Mode #3, and Time Saving Mode #4, which have normal power support, as well as normal mode and remaining reserve consumption mode, which are modes without support and no normal power support.

Support mode A (time-saving mode #1A), support mode B (time-saving mode #1B), time-saving mode #3, and time-saving mode #4 are time-saving states with different numbers of time-saving cycles. Time-saving states (specific game states) include specific game state A, which is a time-saving state that occurs immediately after a jackpot due to a jackpot (time-saving a), specific game state B, which is a time-saving state that occurs when the maximum number of cycles is reached without being caused by a jackpot (ceiling time-saving, b time-saving), and specific game state C, which is a time-saving state that occurs when a time-saving symbol stops displaying (support hit) without being caused by a jackpot (sudden time-saving, c time-saving).

Specific game state A has two different time-saving states: one where the number of time-saving turns is 7 (m1) and the other where it is 200 (m2), which is greater than 7. The presentation mode for the time-saving turn when the number of time-saving turns = 200 is called time-saving mode #1A (support mode A), and the presentation mode for the time-saving turn when the number of time-saving turns = 7 is called time-saving mode #1B (support mode B). Specific game state B is a time-saving turn when the number of time-saving turns is m3 (251 in this case). Specific game state C is a time-saving turn when the number of time-saving turns is m4. The number of time-saving turns m4 in specific game state C is either 30 or 10 depending on the type of time-saving symbol. The presentation mode for specific game state B is time-saving mode #3, and the presentation mode for specific game state C is time-saving mode #4.

In normal game mode, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot probability to low (special chart low probability) and sets the state to one without normal power support (no power support state). Also, in normal game mode, the presentation mode is normal mode. The remaining reserve consumption mode corresponds to a game mode that can occur after the end of a specific game mode (time-saving state), and may be included in the normal game mode because it is a state with a low special chart probability and no power support. In the remaining reserve consumption mode, the remaining reserves created by winning the normal variable winning device 37 (normal power) that is released by a normal chart hit during the time-saving state are consumed, and the special chart 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable display game.

In addition, in step A4705, it may be determined whether support mode B is in progress and a small win has occurred on special chart 2, and the time-saving end determination process may be executed only if a presentation mode other than support mode B is in progress or a small win has not occurred on special chart 2. In this way, if a presentation mode other than support mode B is in progress or a small win has not occurred on special chart 2, the end of time-saving (end of normal power support) can be set when the special chart fluctuation process is executed, i.e., when the fluctuation of the special chart fluctuation display game ends.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number "2" for processing during special chart display (A4707) and saves the processing number in the special chart game processing number area (A4708).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of special symbol 1's fluctuation (turning off the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A4709), and further saves a signal regarding the end of special symbol 2's fluctuation (turning off the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation) in the test signal output data area (A4710).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the control timer initial value (e.g., 256 msec) in the pattern determination count signal control timer area used when outputting the pattern determination count signal related to the number of times the special pattern variation display game has been executed to the external information terminal (A4711).

Then, the game control device 100 saves the stop flag related to the stop of fluctuation on the special chart 1 display 51 in the special chart 1 fluctuation control flag area as information for controlling the special chart 1 fluctuation display game on the special chart 1 display 51 (A4712). Furthermore, it saves the stop flag related to the stop of fluctuation on the special chart 2 display 52 in the special chart 2 fluctuation control flag area as information for controlling the special chart 2 fluctuation display game on the special chart 2 display 52 (A4713), and ends the special chart fluctuation processing transition setting process.

[Time-saving end determination process]
Next, the details of the time-saving end determination process (A4706) during the special chart change process will be explained. Figure 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the time-saving end determination process. Note that the time-saving end determination process is executed during the special chart change process when not in support mode B, but as will be described later, when in support mode B, the time-saving end determination process (A5137) is executed during the special chart display process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether normal power support is in progress (time-saving mode) (A4801). If normal power support is not in progress (the result of A4801 is "N"), it executes the presentation mode information check process without executing the time-saving end setting process (A4809). If normal power support is in progress (the result of A4801 is "Y"), it determines whether the special chart 1 variable display game has changed (A4802). If the special chart 1 variable display game has changed (the result of A4802 is "Y"), it proceeds to the processing of step A4806.

If the special chart 2 variable display game is fluctuating (the result of A4802 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the special chart 2 variable display game has resulted in a small win (special chart 2 small win) (A4803). If the small win flag 2 is a small win, it can be determined that the result is a small win. If the special chart 2 variable display game has resulted in a small win (the result of A4803 is "Y"), it executes a time-saving end setting process to set the end of the time-saving mode (A4808).

Therefore, in the case of a time-saving mode other than Support Mode B, if there is a small win on Special Chart 2, the end of the time-saving mode (end of normal power support) will be set when the special chart fluctuation process is executed, that is, when the fluctuation of the special chart 2 fluctuation display game ends (stops) (see Figure 49A). As will be described later, in the case of a time-saving mode in Support Mode B, if there is a small win on Special Chart 2, the end of the time-saving mode (end of normal power support) will be set when the special chart display process is executed, that is, when the stopped display of the small win pattern ends (at the end of the stopped display time, just before the small win fanfare, or when the small win fanfare starts) (see Figure 49A).

If the special chart 2 variable display game does not result in a small win (the result of A4803 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the time-shortening variation count 2 by -1 (decreases it by 1) (A4804) and determines whether the time-shortening variation count 2 is 0 (A4805). If the time-shortening variation count 2 is 0 (the result of A4805 is "Y"), it executes a time-shortening end setting process to set the end of the time-shortening (A4808). The time-shortening variation count 2 corresponds to the remaining number of time-shortening times, as described below.

If the time reduction variation count 2 is not 0 (the result of A4805 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the time reduction variation count 1 by -1 (decreases it by 1) (A4806) and determines whether the time reduction variation count 1 is 0 (A4807). If the time reduction variation count 1 is not 0 (the result of A4807 is "N"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A4809. On the other hand, if the time reduction variation count 1 is 0 (the result of A4807 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes a time reduction end setting process to set the end of the time reduction (A4808). Then, the game control device 100 executes the presentation mode information check process described below (A4809). The time reduction variation count 1 corresponds to the remaining number of total time reductions described below.

In this way, if the Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game results in a small hit (Special Chart 2 Small Hit), the time-saving feature (time-saving mode, time-saving state) ends and the normal power support also ends. Note that if the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game results in a small hit (Special Chart 1 Small Hit), the time-saving feature will not end in the time-saving feature end determination process (the result of A4802 is "Y") except in special cases where the time-saving feature change count 1 becomes 0. However, the time-saving feature will end when a V hit is made during a small hit (A3215, A3217 of the specific area switch monitoring process). As described below, since a V hit is unlikely to occur during a Special Chart 1 Small Hit, the time-saving feature will generally not end with a Special Chart 1 Small Hit (the time-saving feature will continue even during a small hit state), but the time-saving feature will end with a Special Chart 2 Small Hit. Note that it is also possible to configure the time-saving feature to end in the time-saving feature end determination process when a Special Chart 1 Small Hit occurs.

Furthermore, when the special chart 2 variable display game has been executed a first predetermined number of times since the start of the time-saving (time-saving mode, time-saving state), the time-saving variable count 2 becomes 0, the time-saving ends, and the normal power support also ends. Here, the first predetermined count is the number of time-saving times (e.g., 7 times, 30 times, 200 times, etc.) that is the initial value of the time-saving variable count 2.

Furthermore, when the special chart variable display games (special chart 1 variable display games and special chart 2 variable display games) have been executed a second predetermined number of times since the start of the time-saving feature, the time-saving variable count 1 becomes 0, the time-saving feature ends, and the normal power support also ends. Here, the second predetermined count is the total number of time-saving features as the initial value of the time-saving variable count 1, and is the total number of special chart 1 variable display games and special chart 2 variable display games executed until the time-saving feature ends, and is the value obtained by adding 4 to the first predetermined count (for example, 11 times, 34 times, 204 times, etc.).

In summary, the time-saving end conditions under which the time-saving end is set in the time-saving end determination process are when the time-saving fluctuation count 1 or time-saving fluctuation count 2 becomes 0, or the special chart 2 fluctuation display game results in a small win (special chart 2 small win).

In addition, for the result of a small hit in the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game during time-saving (Special Chart 1 Small Hit), if there is a V win during the small hit, the end of the time-saving will be set, but if there is no V win during the small hit, the end of the time-saving will not be set and the variable display game with time-saving will resume after the small hit. Also, if the Special Chart 1 Variable Display Game or Special Chart 2 Variable Display Game is a direct hit jackpot (i.e., a jackpot not caused by a V win), the end of the time-saving will be set when the jackpot symbol stops displaying (i.e., at the end of the stop display time, just before the jackpot fanfare, or when the jackpot fanfare starts) (see Figures 35 and 49B).

In addition, if the special chart change display game (the previous special chart change display game) in which time reduction ends when time reduction change count 1 or time reduction change count 2 reaches 0 exactly reaches the ceiling number of times or stops on a time reduction symbol, time reduction may start anew from the next special chart change display game. However, in presentation modes other than Support Mode B, it becomes clear that time reduction has temporarily ended when the fluctuation in the special chart change display game ends (stops). Additionally, in presentation modes other than Support Mode B, the output of external information (such as the jackpot 2 signal) and test signals (such as the change time reduction status signal) is turned off for the duration of the stop display of the stop result (stopped symbol), so that when time reduction resumes, the on state of the output of external information and test signals can be clearly identified.

[Time-saving end setting process]
Next, the details of the time-saving end setting process (A4808) in the special chart change process will be described. Fig. 32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time-saving end setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the time-saving function in the external information output data area of the RWM (A4901). Here, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving function is the off data of the jackpot 2 signal. As a result, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving function is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71.

In addition, during normal game play, since there is no normal power support, there is generally no winning in the normal variable winning device 37, and the second start memory does not occur. For this reason, if the second start memory (special chart 2 start memory, special chart 2 reserve) remains as a remaining reserve at the time the time-saving feature ends, the output of ON data for the jackpot 2 signal continues (this does not cause any problems), and when the variable display of the special chart variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops, the output of OFF data for the jackpot 2 signal (a signal related to the end of the time-saving feature) is output to the external device.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of the time-saving mode in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4902). As a result, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving mode is output as a test signal to the test firing device. Here, the signal regarding the end of the time-saving mode is, for example, off data for the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal, off data for the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal, or off data for the normal electric device 1 open extension state signal. Then, a no-time-saving mode number is saved in the game status display number area of the RWM (A4903), a normal symbol no support flag is saved in the normal symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (A4904), and a special symbol low probability & no time-saving mode flag is saved in the special symbol game mode flag area of the RWM (A4905). This ends the time-saving mode (normal electric support state).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation count 1 area of the RWM where time reduction variation count 1 is stored (A4906), and clears the time reduction variation count 2 area of the RWM where time reduction variation count 2 is stored (A4907). It then saves a signal related to the left-hit instruction in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4908), and saves the number in the left-hit state in the game status display number 2 area of the RWM (A4909).

Then, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area of the RWM (A4910). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating the normal gaming state, which is the period for calculating the base value (the payout rate in normal gaming state). Then, the time-saving end setting process is terminated.

In this way, by executing the time-saving end setting process, it is possible to appropriately transition from the time-saving state (a state with a low probability of special symbols and normal power support) to the normal game state (a state with a low probability of special symbols and no normal power support).

[Performance mode information check process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode information check process (A4809) during the special chart change process will be described. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the presentation mode information check process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (A5001). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "Y"), the presentation mode information check process ends. In this case, the presentation mode is not changed according to the number of special chart variable display games that have been played, and for example, a presentation mode that continues until the next jackpot has been selected.

Furthermore, if the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (the result of A5001 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the remaining number of spins for the special symbol variable display game, which is the number of times the game can be played before the presentation mode is changed, by -1 (A5002), and determines whether the remaining number of spins for the special symbol variable display game has reached 0 (A5003). Here, the remaining number of spins for the special symbol variable display game is updated by -1 only if the game played this time is the main special symbol variable display game, but it can also be configured to update by -1 if it is a non-main variable display game.

Depending on the game status, etc., one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game is designated as the main variable display game. For example, the main variable display game (main variable display game) is the one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game that is executed more frequently, and the non-main variable display game (subordinate variable display game) is the one of the special chart 1 variable display game and the special chart 2 variable display game that is executed less frequently. The game control device 100 and/or the presentation control device 300 may store information indicating the main variable display game (special chart 1 or special chart 2) depending on the game status, etc.

If the number of remaining spins for the effect is not 0 (the result of A5003 is "N"), the effect mode information check process is terminated. Also, if the number of remaining spins for the effect is 0 (the result of A5003 is "Y"), i.e., if the effect mode will be changed from the next special chart change display game, the effect mode information address table is set (A5004) and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode change information is obtained (A5005).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the presentation mode number of the presentation mode to be transitioned to and saves it in the presentation mode number area in the RWM (A5006), acquires the remaining number of presentation rotations (initial value) of the presentation mode to be transitioned to and saves it in the remaining number of presentation rotations area in the RWM (A5007), acquires the next mode transition information of the presentation mode to be transitioned to and saves it in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (A5008).

When the presentation mode is changed upon the end of the time-saving state (time-saving variation count 1 or 2 = 0), the remaining number of presentation spins (initial value) for the presentation mode to be changed to may be set to a specified remaining reserve number (for example, 4). The remaining reserve number is the number of special chart 2 reserves (remaining reserves) that will be consumed after the time-saving state ends, and is the number of special chart 2 variations after the time-saving state ends. Remaining reserves are generated by winning the normal variation winning device 37, which is opened by a normal chart win during the time-saving state. In this way, the remaining reserve consumption mode can be set as the presentation mode that corresponds to the consumption of remaining reserves (special chart 2 reserves, special chart 2 start memory).

The game control device 100 then prepares a probability information command (including information on the probability state, information on whether time-saving is enabled, and information on the presentation mode) corresponding to the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (A5009), and determines whether the prepared probability information command matches the value in the command area to be sent when power is restored (A5010). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the command area to be sent when power is restored (the result of A5010 is "Y"), i.e., if the probability information command has not changed, the presentation mode information check process ends.

Furthermore, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the command area to be sent when power is restored (the result of A5010 is "N"), the prepared probability information command is saved in the command area to be sent when power is restored (A5011), and a performance command setting process is executed to set the probability information command as a performance command (A5012).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation count command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for presentation as a presentation command (A5013), and executes a presentation command setting process (A5014). This allows the presentation control device 300 to obtain the remaining number of rotations for presentation. Next, a time reduction variation count command corresponding to time reduction variation count 2 is prepared as a presentation command (A5015), and executes a presentation command setting process (A5016). This allows the presentation control device 300 to obtain time reduction variation count 2. Note that the game control device 100 may also prepare time reduction variation count 1 as a presentation command and execute the presentation command setting process.

Next, when a new presentation mode number is acquired in step A5006, the game control device 100 determines whether the new presentation mode is a left-hit mode (A5017), and if it is not a left-hit mode (the result of A5017 is "N"), it terminates the presentation mode information check process. Also, if it is a left-hit mode (the result of A5017 is "Y"), it prepares a left-hit instruction notification command as a presentation command (A5018), executes the presentation command setting process (A5019), and terminates the presentation mode information check process.

In addition, in the above, regardless of the determination result (A5003) of whether the remaining number of spins for the effect is 0 or not, the effect rotation count command corresponding to the updated remaining number of spins for the effect (A5002) and the time reduction variation count command corresponding to the updated time reduction variation counts 1 and 2 (A4804, A4806) may also be prepared as effect commands, and the effect command setting process may be executed.

[Processing during special chart display]
Next, the details of the special chart display process (A2611) in the special chart game process will be described. Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart display process. Figure 34A shows the first half of the special chart display process, and Figure 34B shows the second half of the special chart display process.

The game control device 100 first loads support hit flag 1 and support hit flag 2 (A5101) and clears the support hit flag 1 and support hit flag 2 areas of the RWM (A5102). Next, it loads small hit flag 1 and small hit flag 2 (A5103) and clears the small hit flag 1 and small hit flag 2 areas of the RWM (A5104). Next, it loads jackpot flag 1 and jackpot flag 2 (A5105) and clears the jackpot flag 1 and jackpot flag 2 areas of the RWM (A5106).

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot (A5107), and if it indicates a jackpot (the result of A5107 is "Y"), it saves test signals related to the start of a jackpot in the second special symbol variable display game (special symbol 2 jackpot) (for example, turning on the condition device operation signal, turning on the role device continuous operation device operation signal, and turning on the special symbol 2 hit signal) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5110), loads the special symbol game mode flag, and saves the loaded flag in the special symbol game mode flag save area (A5111).

On the other hand, if the check of jackpot flag 2 does not indicate a jackpot (the result of A5107 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot or not (A5108), and if it indicates a jackpot (the result of A5108 is "Y"), it saves test signals related to the start of a jackpot in the first special symbol variable display game (special symbol 1 jackpot) (for example, turning on the condition device operation signal, turning on the role device continuous operation device operation signal, and turning on the special symbol 1 hit signal) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A5109), loads the special symbol game mode flag, and saves the loaded flag in the special symbol game mode flag save area (A5111).

The game control device 100 then sets a round limit table (A5112) and, based on the round limit table, obtains the round limit (e.g., 3, 10) corresponding to the round limit information (A4007, A4107) and saves it in the round limit area of the RWM (A5113). The round limit information is obtained during the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process or special chart 2 stop pattern setting process, and corresponds to the jackpot stop pattern number. Therefore, the round limit will differ depending on the jackpot pattern (jackpot stop pattern number). Next, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round limit information is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A5114).

Next, the game control device 100 loads a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stopping symbol pattern from the decorative special symbol command area of the RWM, prepares it as a presentation command (A5115), and executes the presentation command setting process (A5116). After that, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a winning result in the special symbol variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) and no time reduction (no normal power support) is prepared as a presentation command (A5117), and the presentation command setting process is executed (A5118). Next, a fanfare command corresponding to the upper limit value for the number of rounds is prepared as a presentation command (A5119), and the presentation command setting process is executed (A5120).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of a jackpot in the external information output data area of the RWM (A5121). In this embodiment, the jackpot 1 signal turns on at the start of a jackpot or a small jackpot on Special Chart 2, and turns off at the end of the jackpot or a small jackpot on Special Chart 2. The jackpot 2 signal turns on at the start of a jackpot or a small jackpot on Special Chart 2, and turns off at the end of the jackpot or a small jackpot on Special Chart 2 if the time-saving mode does not occur after the jackpot. Furthermore, the jackpot 2 signal turns on at the start of the time-saving mode and turns off at the end of the remaining reserve consumption mode (when the variable display game related to the last remaining reserve stops). The jackpot 3 signal turns on at the start of a jackpot or a small jackpot on Special Chart 2, and turns off at the end of the jackpot or a small jackpot on Special Chart 2. Note that signals related to the start of a jackpot (on/off of the jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, etc.) may be defined depending on the model.

Then, the game control device 100 sets the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern and presentation mode (A5119) and saves the set jackpot fanfare time in the special symbol game processing timer area (A5123).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the area for the number of illegal wins at the special prize slot (A5124) and saves the non-illegal monitoring period flag in the area for the illegal monitoring period flag at the special prize slot (A5125). After that, it executes the fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1 (A5126) and ends the special chart display processing.

When jackpot flags 1 and 2 are not jackpots (the results of A5107 and A5108 are "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether a ceiling-reached flag exists, indicating that the number of times the special symbol variable display game has been played has reached the ceiling number of times (time-saving ceiling) (A5127). When a ceiling-reached flag does not exist (the result of A5127 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the ceiling counter value in the ceiling counter area of the RWM by +1 (increases it by 1) (A5128). Then, it determines whether the ceiling counter value, which indicates the number of times the special symbol variable display game (including the special symbol 1 variable display game and the special symbol 2 variable display game) has been played in a state other than the probability variable state, has reached the ceiling number of times (A5129). For example, the ceiling number of times is 500 or 800 times. When the ceiling number of times has been reached (the result of A5129 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets (on) a ceiling time-saving activation flag, indicating that the ceiling time-saving will be activated, and a ceiling-reached flag, indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached (A5130). Also, in this embodiment, there is no probability variable state, but in machines that do have a probability variable state, the ceiling counter value is updated by +1 in step A5128 only when the special chart high probability is not in progress (probability variable state). After that, it is determined whether small win flag 2 indicates a small win (A5131).

The ceiling reached flag is cleared when a jackpot occurs, but is not cleared unless a jackpot occurs. Therefore, if the ceiling number of plays is reached and the time-saving number of plays ends without a jackpot, the ceiling reached flag will remain set (on), meaning that no further ceiling time-saving will occur and the ceiling counter value will not be updated.

On the other hand, if the ceiling reached flag is set (the result of A5127 is "Y"), or if the ceiling number of plays has not been reached (the result of A5129 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (A5131).

When small win flag 2 indicates a small win (the result of A5131 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the special symbol 2 small win (turns the special symbol 2 small win signal on) in the test signal output data area (A5134), loads the value of the special symbol game mode flag area, and saves it in the special symbol game mode flag save area (A5135).

If small win flag 2 does not indicate a small win (the result of A5131 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether small win flag 1 indicates a small win (A5132). If small win flag 1 indicates a small win (the result of A5132 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of a special symbol 1 small win (turns the special symbol 1 small win signal on) in the test signal output data area (A5133), loads the value of the special symbol game mode flag area, and saves it in the special symbol game mode flag save area (A5135).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the presentation mode is support mode B (time-saving mode #1B) (A5136). If it is support mode B (the result of A5136 is "Y"), that is, if a small win occurs during support mode B, it executes a time-saving end determination process (A5137) to determine the end of time-saving, and proceeds to processing in step A5138. If it is not support mode B (the result of A5136 is "N"), that is, if a small win occurs in a presentation mode other than support mode B, it proceeds to processing in step A5138 without executing the time-saving end determination process.

Therefore, if the special chart 2 variable display game results in a small hit (special chart 2 small hit) during support mode B, the end of the time reduction (end of normal power support) will be set when the special chart display process is executed, that is, when the small hit symbol stops displaying (when the stop display time ends, just before the small hit fanfare, or when the small hit fanfare starts) (see Figure 49A). Furthermore, if the special chart 1 variable display game results in a small hit (special chart 1 small hit) even during support mode B, the time reduction may not end in the time reduction end determination process (A5137) (the result of A4802 is "Y"), but the time reduction will end at least when a V is won during the small hit (A3215, A3217 of the specific area switch monitoring process). Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the time reduction (normal power support) to always end in the time reduction end determination process in the event of a special chart 1 small hit.

Also, as mentioned above, if a small win occurs on Special Chart 2 during a presentation mode other than Support Mode B (for example, during Support Mode A), the end of the time-saving feature will be set when the Special Chart Change Processing is executed, i.e., when the change in the Special Chart 2 Change Display Game ends (see Figure 49A).

As such, the timing at which the time-saving feature ends differs between Support Mode B and time-saving modes other than Support Mode B, and is later in Support Mode B than in modes other than Support Mode B.

Next, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the decorative special symbol command from the decorative special symbol command area as a presentation command (A5138), and executes the presentation command setting process (A5139). It then prepares the small win fanfare command as a presentation command (A5140), and executes the presentation command setting process (A5141). It then executes the small win fanfare processing transition setting process (A5142), and ends the special symbol display processing.

On the other hand, if neither small hit flag 1 nor small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit, i.e., if there is a miss (the results of A5131 and A5132 are "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the presentation mode is in support mode B (time-saving mode #1B) (A5143). If it is in support mode B (the result of A5143 is "Y"), i.e., if there is a miss during support mode B, it executes a time-saving end determination process (A5144) to determine the end of time-saving, and proceeds to processing in step A5145. If it is not in support mode B (the result of A5143 is "N"), i.e., if there is a miss outside of support mode B, it proceeds to processing in step A5145 without executing the time-saving end determination process.

Therefore, if the special symbol 1 variable display game or the special symbol 2 variable display game results in a loss during support mode B, and the time-saving end conditions for time-saving fluctuation counts 1 and 2 are met during the time-saving end determination process, the end of the time-saving (end of normal power support) is set when the special symbol display process is executed, that is, when the stop display of the losing symbol ends (when the stop display time ends).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag indicating that a ceiling time-saving will occur (A5145). If there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag (the result of A5145 is "Y"), the initial value of the ceiling time-saving count (the number of times time is saved due to the ceiling time-saving) is saved in the time-saving fluctuation count 1 area and the time-saving fluctuation count 2 area (A5146). The initial values of time-saving fluctuation count 1 and time-saving fluctuation count 2 in the case of the ceiling time-saving (for example, 255 times and 251 times) are saved here. Next, a support activation setting process is executed to trigger the time-saving state due to the ceiling time-saving (A5150), a special chart normal processing transition setting process is executed (A5151), and the special chart display processing is terminated. In the special chart normal processing transition setting process, the processing number "0" for the special chart normal processing is set and saved in the special chart game processing number area.

If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that ceiling time reduction will occur (the result of A5145 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (A5147). If the support hit flag 2 does not indicate a support hit (the result of A5147 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (A5148).

If either Support Hit Flag 1 or Support Hit Flag 2 indicates a support hit (the result of A5147 or A5148 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the initial values corresponding to the time reduction judgment data in the Time Reduction Variation Count 1 area and the Time Reduction Variation Count 2 area (A5149). The initial values for Time Reduction Variation Count 1 and Time Reduction Variation Count 2 in the case of a support hit result (sudden time reduction) (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 14 times and 10 times) are saved here. Next, the support activation setting process is executed to generate a time reduction state (sudden time reduction) using the time reduction symbol (A5150), the special symbol normal processing transition setting process is executed (A5151), and the special symbol display processing ends.

In addition, since the time reduction determination data is set corresponding to the stop pattern number in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) and special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503), the initial values in the case of a support hit (i.e., the number of time reductions and the total number of time reductions) are determined by lottery using the special chart pattern random number.

If both support hit flag 1 and support hit flag 2 are not support hits (the results of A5147 and A5148 are "N"), the game control device 100 does not execute the support activation setting process to set the time reduction, but executes the special chart normal processing transition setting process (A5151), and ends the special chart display processing.

As described above, during the special chart display process, settings for time reduction are made, such as setting the number of time reductions (i.e., the initial value for the number of time reduction fluctuations) for ceiling time reductions and sudden time reductions. Furthermore, for time reductions due to a jackpot, i.e., time reductions that begin when the jackpot state ends, settings for time reductions, such as setting the number of time reductions, are made during the jackpot end process.

The processing during special symbol display is executed when the special symbol game processing timer, to which the stop display time (A4704) is set, reaches 0 (A2605, A2611), and is therefore executed when the display of the stop result (stopped symbol) of the special symbol variation display game ends. Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special symbol variation display game ends (approximately the same as when the next special symbol variation display game starts, if any), the number of time-shortening variations (A5146, A5149) is set, and the time-shortening state due to the ceiling time-shortening and sudden time-shortening begins.

[Fanfare/Interval Processing Transition Setting Process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1 (A5126) in the special chart display processing will be described. Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number for fanfare/interval processing to "7" (A5301) and saves the processing number in the special game processing number area (A5302).

Next, the game control device 100 saves signals related to the end of time reduction (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal, turning off the special symbol 2 variable time shortening state signal, and turning off the normal electric device 1 open extension state signal) in the test signal output data area (A5303). Note that, for example, in a configuration in which only the normal power open time changes even during the time reduction state (normal power support state), the normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal are always turned off. After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (A5304), a number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (A5305), and a flag without normal game support is saved in the normal game mode flag area (A5306).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A5307) and saves the special symbol low probability & no time reduction flag in the special symbol game mode flag area (A5308). Next, it saves the probability information command (special symbol low probability & no time reduction) in the power outage recovery transmission command area, which saves commands output to the performance control device 300 when the power outage is restored (A5309). This ends the time reduction state (normal power support state).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction variation count 1 area (A5310), clears the time reduction variation count 2 area (A5311), clears the ceiling counter area (A5312), clears the ceiling time reduction activation flag area (A5313), and clears the ceiling reached flag area (A5314).

The game control device 100 then saves the number of presentation mode 1 in the presentation mode number area (A5315), clears the remaining presentation spin count area (A5316), and saves a no-update code in the next mode transition information area (A5317). It then saves a signal related to a right-hit instruction (for example, turning on launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A5318), saves the number in the right-hit state in the game state display number 2 area (A5319) to light up the display LED (first game state display unit 57) during right-hit, saves information other than the normal base state in the normal base state determination area (A5320), and ends fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1.

[Small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small win fanfare processing transition setting process (A5134) in the special chart display processing will be described. Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small win fanfare processing transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number to "3" for processing during the small win fanfare (A5401), and saves this processing number in the special game processing number area (A5402).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the small win fanfare time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (for example, 4000 msec for a special symbol 1 small win, 1000 msec for a special symbol 2 small win) in the special symbol game processing timer area (A5403). Next, it determines whether or not it is a special symbol 2 small win (A5404). If it is a special symbol 2 small win (the result of A5404 is "Y"), it saves signals related to the start of small win gameplay (for example, on data of the big win 1 signal, on data of the big win 2 signal, and on data of the big win 3 signal) in the external information output data area (A5405), and proceeds to processing of step A5406. If it is not a special symbol 2 small win (the result of A5404 is "N"), it proceeds to processing of step A5406 without doing anything.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the right-hit instruction (turns on launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A5406), and saves the number in the right-hit state in the game state display number 2 area (A5407) in order to light up the right-hit display LED (first game state display unit 57), and ends the small win fanfare processing transition setting process.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, the details of the support operation setting process (A5150) in the special chart display process will be described. Figure 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the support operation setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the external information output data area (A5501). As a result, when ceiling time reduction due to reaching the ceiling number of plays or sudden time reduction due to a time reduction symbol (support hit) begins, the signal related to the start of time reduction is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and ultimately to an external device (such as a hall computer). Here, the signal related to the start of time reduction is the on data of the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 4 signal. Thus, when ceiling time reduction (specific game state B) or sudden time reduction (specific game state C) begins, the jackpot 4 signal is specially transmitted as external information. Note that, as described below, when time reduction associated with a jackpot (specific game state A, support modes A and B) begins, the jackpot 4 signal is not transmitted as external information, which has the advantage of allowing the external device to distinguish between the type of time reduction state (time reduction associated with a jackpot and other time reductions).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction in the test signal output data area (A5502). As a result, when the ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction start, a signal related to the start of time reduction is output as a test signal to the test firing device. Here, the signal related to the start of time reduction is, for example, on data for the special symbol 1 variable time reduction state signal, on data for the special symbol 2 variable time reduction state signal, or on data for the normal electric device 1 extended opening state signal. Then, a number indicating time reduction is enabled is saved in the game status display number area (A5503), a normal symbol support flag is saved in the normal symbol game mode flag area (A5504), and a special symbol low probability & time reduction flag is combined in the special symbol game mode flag area (A5505). Next, a signal related to a right-hit instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (A5506), and the number in the right-hit state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (A5507).

The game control device 100 then sets a presentation mode information address table (A5508), obtains the address of the table corresponding to the presentation mode transition information set in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process (A3403) or special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A3503) (A5509), and obtains and saves the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode based on the table (A5510). This allows you to select the presentation mode to transition to when the ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction start.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains and saves the number of remaining spins (initial value) for the presentation mode based on the table (A5511). For example, the number of remaining spins (initial value) for the presentation mode is the number of time-saving cycles (initial value of time-saving variation cycle 1 or time-saving variation cycle 2). This allows the same presentation mode to continue until the time-saving cycle ends, for example.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about the transition from the ceiling time-saving or sudden time-saving presentation mode to the next mode, based on a table (A5512). It then prepares a probability information command corresponding to the special game mode flag and the newly set presentation mode number as a presentation command (A5513), saves the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A5514), and executes a presentation command setting process to set the probability information command as a presentation command (A5515). Here, the probability information command includes information about the probability state, whether or not time-saving (normal power support) is enabled, and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation count command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for the presentation as a presentation command (A5516) and executes the presentation command setting process (A5517). Then, it prepares a time reduction variation count command corresponding to each of time reduction variation count 1 and time reduction variation count 2 (here, the initial time reduction count and the total time reduction count) as a presentation command (A5518) and executes the presentation command setting process (A5519).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction determination data area (A5520), clears the presentation mode transition information area (A5521), saves information other than the normal base state in the normal base state determination area (A5522), and ends the support activation setting process. Also, at this point, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area, in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored because the ceiling time reduction has been activated, may be cleared.

[Special chart normal processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the special chart normal processing transition setting process (A5151) in the special chart display processing will be described. Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special chart normal processing transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number to "0" for the special chart normal processing (A5601) and saves this processing number in the special chart game processing number area (A5602). It then clears the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A5603), saves the fraud monitoring period flag in the large prize slot fraud monitoring period flag area (A5604), and ends the special chart normal processing transition setting process.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small win fanfare process (A2612) in the special symbol game process will be described. Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small win fanfare process.

The game control device 100 first sets the processing number to "4" for processing during the small win release (A5801), and saves this processing number in the special game processing number area (A5802).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the small win opening time, which is the opening time of the large prize opening during small win play, in the special game processing timer area corresponding to the small win stopping symbol pattern (A5803). Then, it saves the small win operation initial value corresponding to the small win stopping symbol pattern in the small win control pointer area (A5804). In this embodiment, because the small win stopping symbol pattern of special symbol 1 and the small win stopping symbol pattern of special symbol 2 are different, the small win opening time and small win operation initial value are different at least between special symbol 1 small win and special symbol 2 small win. Furthermore, the small win operation initial value is 38 for special symbol 1 small win and 0 for special symbol 2 small win. Therefore, the opening pattern of the large prize opening due to a small win differs between special symbol 1 small win and special symbol 2 small win.

Next, the game control device 100 saves signals related to the start of the small win operation (for example, turning on the special electric device 1 operation signal, turning on the condition device operation area 1 valid signal, and turning on the device continuous operation device operation area 1 valid signal) in the test signal output data area (A5805). Next, to open the special large prize opening (here, the opening/closing door 39c of the variable prize opening device 39), it saves on data for turning on the large prize opening solenoid (here, the large prize opening solenoid 39b) in the large prize opening solenoid output data area (A5806).

Then, the game control device 100 clears the information in the special prize opening count area, which stores the number of wins in the special prize opening (A5807), and saves the lever solenoid operation initial value in the lever solenoid control pointer area (A5808). Note that the on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, i.e., the opening/closing operation of the specific area 86, is constant regardless of the opening pattern of the special prize opening.

Next, the game control device 100 clears the specific area passage information area (A5809), clears the large prize slot illegal win count area (A5810), saves the illegal win monitoring period out flag in the large prize slot illegal win monitoring period flag area (A5811), and ends the small win fanfare processing.

[Small hit opening processing]
Next, the details of the small win opening process (A2613) in the special symbol game process will be described. Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small win opening process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the value of the small win control pointer is greater than or equal to the small win operation end value (38 in this case) (A5901). In this embodiment, for a special chart 1 small win, the small win operation end value and the small win operation initial value are the same value (38), so a single small win results in an opening pattern in which the large prize opening opens only once during the small win opening time (A5803). For a special chart 2 small win, the small win operation end value (38) is greater than the small win operation initial value (0), so a single small win results in an opening pattern in which the large prize opening opens multiple times. In this way, the opening pattern of the large prize opening due to a small win differs between a special chart 1 small win and a special chart 2 small win.

Furthermore, V wins are unlikely to occur on a small hit on Special Chart 1, which opens the large prize opening once, but V wins are more likely to occur on a small hit on Special Chart 2, which opens the large prize opening multiple times. For this reason, the time reduction will not generally end on a small hit on Special Chart 1, which is unlikely to result in a V win, but will end on a small hit on Special Chart 2, which is more likely to result in a V win.

If the value of the small win control pointer is less than the small win operation end value (the result of A5901 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the small win operation transition setting process (A5902), updates the small win control pointer by +1 (A5903), and ends the small win operation processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the small win control pointer is equal to or greater than the small win operation end value (the result of A5901 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets the processing number for small win remaining ball processing to "5" (A5904) and saves this processing number in the special game processing number area (A5905). Next, it saves the small win remaining ball processing time (e.g., 0.9 seconds) in the special game processing timer area (A5906), saves off data in the large prize opening solenoid output data area (A5907), and ends the small win opening processing.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small win action transition setting process (A5902) in the small win opening process will be explained. Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small win action transition setting process.

The game control device 100 first executes branch processing according to the control pointer (small win control pointer) (A6101). If the control pointer is 0, it saves the wait time 1 (e.g., 2860 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special game processing timer area (A6102), saves off data in the large prize opening solenoid output data area (A6103), and ends the small win operation transition setting process.

If the control pointer is odd, the game control device 100 saves the large prize opening time (e.g., 48 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special game processing timer area (A6104), saves on data in the large prize opening solenoid output data area (A6105), and ends the small prize operation transition setting process.

The game control device 100 executes branch processing according to the control pointer (small win control pointer) (A6101). If the control pointer is an even number (excluding 0), it saves the wait time 2 (e.g., 424 msec) corresponding to the control pointer in the special game processing timer area (A6106), saves off data in the large prize opening solenoid output data area (A6107), and ends the small win operation transition setting process.

[Handling small remaining balls]
Next, the details of the small win remaining ball processing (A2614) in the special symbol game processing will be explained. Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small win remaining ball processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (A6301). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6301 is "N"), it ends the small win remaining ball processing without doing anything. If the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6301 is "Y"), it determines whether the V abnormal winning flag is set (A6302). If there is abnormal passing information in the specific area passing information area, the V abnormal winning flag is set. If the V abnormal winning flag is set (the result of A6302 is "Y"), it saves the irregular occurrence flag in the irregular big win flag area (A6303) and proceeds to processing of step A6304. If the V abnormal winning flag is not set (the result of A6302 is "N"), it proceeds to processing of step A6304 without doing anything.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a small win ending command corresponding to the small win stopping symbol pattern as an effect command (A6304) and executes the effect command setting process (A6305). In this embodiment, since the small win stopping symbol pattern of special symbol 1 and the small win stopping symbol pattern of special symbol 2 are different, the small win ending command and therefore the ending effect of the small win may be different at least between the special symbol 1 small win and the special symbol 2 small win. Then, the processing number "6" for the small win end processing is set (A6306), and this processing number is saved in the special symbol game processing number area (A6307).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the small win ending time (e.g., 1.1 seconds) in the special game processing timer area (A6308), and saves signals related to the end of the small win operation (e.g., turning off the special electric device 1 operation signal, turning off the condition device operation area 1 valid signal, and turning off the device continuous operation device operation area 1 valid signal) in the test signal output data area (A6309). Next, it clears the information in the large prize slot count area (A6310), and clears the information in the small win control pointer area (A6311).

The game control device 100 then saves a no-update code in the lever solenoid control pointer area (A6312) and clears the lever solenoid control timer area (A6313). This ends the on/off operation of the lever solenoid 86b, i.e., the opening/closing operation of the specific area 86, and the specific area 86 remains closed. Then, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large prize slot fraud monitoring period flag area (A6314), and the remaining small prize ball processing is completed.

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small win end process (A2615) in the special game process will be described. Figure 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small win end process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the specific area passing flag is set in the specific area passing area (A6401). If a V win occurs, the specific area passing flag is set. If the specific area passing flag is set due to a V win (the result of A6401 is "Y"), a command is loaded from the decorative special command area and prepared as a performance command (A6402), and the performance command setting process is executed (A6403).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (special chart low probability & no time reduction) as a presentation command (A6404) and executes the presentation command setting process (A6405). It then prepares a fanfare command as a presentation command (A6406) and executes the presentation command setting process (A6407). It then sets "7" as the processing number for the fanfare/interval processing (A6408) and saves the processing number in the special chart game processing number area (A6409).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the jackpot fanfare time for a jackpot via a small jackpot in the special game processing timer area (A6410). The jackpot fanfare time is, for example, 100 msec, but may be varied depending on the small jackpot symbol and presentation mode. A jackpot via a small jackpot is a jackpot resulting from a V entry during a small jackpot (V entry jackpot).

Next, the game control device 100 saves 1 in the round number area to set the number of rounds to 1 (A6411). As a result, the round of the small win (opening of the large prize opening) is treated as the first round, and the round of the large win (V prize opening) after the small win starts from the second round. In other words, the opening of the large prize opening from the small win to the large win is counted as a round. Then, the specific area passage information area is cleared (A6412), and a signal related to the end of the small win (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small win signal and the special symbol 2 small win signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6424).

If there is no V win and the specific area passing flag is not set (the result of A6401 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag, indicating that a ceiling time-saving effect will occur (A6413). If there is no ceiling time-saving activation flag (the result of A6413 is "N"), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step A6416. If there is a ceiling time-saving activation flag (the result of A6413 is "Y"), the initial values for the ceiling time-saving count (the number of times time-saving effected by the ceiling time-saving effect) are saved in the time-saving fluctuation count 1 area and the time-saving fluctuation count 2 area (A6414). If the ceiling count is reached in a small win fluctuation display game and no V win occurs, the initial values for time-saving fluctuation count 1 and time-saving fluctuation count 2 in the case of ceiling time-saving effect (for example, 255 times and 251 times) are saved here. Next, the support activation setting process is executed to activate the time-saving effect by the ceiling time-saving effect (A6415).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the special game is in time-saving mode (time-saving state) based on the flag in the special game mode flag area (A6416). If the flag in the special game mode flag area is the special game low probability & time-saving flag, it can be determined that the special game is in time-saving mode. If the special game is in time-saving mode (the result of A6416 is "Y"), the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A6419. If the special game is not in time-saving mode (the result of A6416 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to a left-hit instruction (for example, turning off launch position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (A6417), and saves the number in the left-hit state in the game status display number 2 area (A6418) to turn off the right-hit display LED (first game status display unit 57), and proceeds to processing in step A6419.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the processing number to "0" for normal special symbol processing (A6419) and saves this processing number in the special symbol game processing number area (A6420). It then clears the presentation mode transition information area (A6421), saves a signal related to the end of the small win (e.g., turning off the big win 1 signal and the big win 3 signal) in the external information output data area (A6422), and clears the special symbol game mode flag save area (A6423). It then saves a signal related to the end of the small win (e.g., turning off the special symbol 1 small win signal and the special symbol 2 small win signal) in the test signal output data area (A6424).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the large prize slot illegal prize count area (A6425), clears the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area (A6426), and ends the small prize end processing.

[Fanfare/Interval Processing]
Next, the fanfare/interval processing (A2616) in the special game processing will be described in detail. Fig. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare/interval processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (A6501). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6501 is "N"), the fanfare/interval processing is terminated. Note that if the remaining ball counter is not 0, the processing number remains "7" and the special game processing timer is not changed and remains at 0, so the fanfare/interval processing will be executed at the next timer interrupt.

When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6501 is "Y"), the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the special game state by +1 (A6502), prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state (jackpot state) as a presentation command (A6503), and performs presentation command setting processing (A6504).

The game control device 100 then sets the processing number to "8" for the large prize opening processing (A6505) and saves the processing number in the special prize game processing number area (A6506). It then saves the large prize opening time (e.g., 25 seconds) in the special prize game processing timer area (A6507), saves a signal related to the start of large prize opening (e.g., turning on the special electric device 1 operation signal) in the test signal output data area (A6508), and clears the large prize opening count, which is the number of wins at the large prize opening (A6509). It then saves on data in the large prize opening solenoid output data area (A6510), clears the large prize opening illegal win count area (A6511), saves the non-illegal win monitoring period flag in the large prize opening illegal win monitoring period flag area (A6512), and ends the fanfare/interval processing.

[Processing during opening of the large prize slot]
Next, the details of the special prize opening process (A2617) in the special prize game process will be described. Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special prize opening process in this embodiment.

The game control device 100 first compares the current number of rounds in the ongoing special game state with the upper limit value of the round number in the upper limit value area of the RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round (A6601). If it is not the final round (the result of A6601 is "N"), it prepares an interval command related to the interval between rounds as a presentation command (A6602) and executes the presentation command setting process (A6603).

If it is the final round (the result of A6601 is "Y"), the game control device 100 prepares a time reduction variation count command corresponding to the time reduction determination data as a presentation command (A6604) and executes presentation command setting processing (A6605). Then, it prepares an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state as a presentation command (A6606) and executes presentation command setting processing (A6607).

Then, the processing number is set to "9" for processing the remaining balls in the large prize opening (A6608), and the processing number is saved in the special prize game processing number area (A6609). Next, the remaining ball processing time (e.g., 900 msec) is saved in the special prize game processing timer area (A6610), and then off data for turning off the large prize opening solenoid is saved in the large prize opening solenoid output data area (A6611), ending the large prize opening open processing.

[Handling of remaining balls in the prize slot]
Next, the remaining ball processing for the special prize slot (A2618) in the special game processing will be described in detail. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the remaining ball processing for the special prize slot.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (A6801). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (the result of A6801 is "N"), the remaining ball processing for the big prize slot is terminated.

When the remaining ball counter is 0 (the result of A6801 is "Y"), the game control device 100 compares the current number of rounds in the ongoing special game state with the upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of the RWM to determine whether the current round is the final round (A6802).

If the current round in the special game state is not the final round (the result of A6802 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the interval time (e.g., 100 msec) in the special game processing timer area (A6803). Then, it sets the processing number for the fanfare/interval processing to "7" (A6804) and saves the processing number in the special game processing number area (A6805).

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the completion of opening of the large prize opening (special variable prize opening) (for example, turning off the signal indicating that the special electric device 1 is in operation) in the test signal output data area (A6806), and ends the processing of the remaining balls in the large prize opening.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (the result of A6802 is "Y"), an ending time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern and presentation mode is set (A6807), and the ending time is saved in the special symbol game processing timer area (A6808). Then, "10" is set as the processing number for the jackpot end processing (A6809), and the processing number is saved in the special symbol game processing number area (A6810).

Then, the game control device 100 saves a signal indicating the completion of opening of the large prize opening (special variable prize opening device) (for example, turning off the special electric device 1 operation signal) in the test signal output data area (A6811). Next, it clears the information in the large prize opening count area that stores the number of prizes won at the large prize opening (A6812), clears the information in the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special game state (A6813), clears the information in the round number upper limit area that stores the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special game state (A6814), clears the round number upper limit information area (A6815), saves a fraud monitoring period flag in the large prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6816), and ends the processing of remaining balls in the large prize opening.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (A2619) in the special game process will be described. Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end process.

The game control device 100 first executes the jackpot end setting process (A6901), sets the presentation mode information address table (A6902), obtains the table address corresponding to the presentation mode transition information (A4009, A4014, A4109, A4114) set in the special chart 1 stop pattern setting process or special chart 2 stop pattern setting process (A6903), and obtains and saves the presentation mode number (presentation mode number) of the presentation mode to be set after the jackpot state ends (A6904). This allows you to select the presentation mode to transition to after the jackpot ends.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of remaining spins (initial value) for the presentation mode that will be set after the jackpot ends (A6905). For example, the number of remaining spins (initial value) for the presentation is the number of time-saving cycles (initial value for the number of time-saving cycles), and the same presentation mode can continue after the jackpot ends until the time-saving cycle ends.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about the transition from the presentation mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state to the next mode (A6906). It then prepares a probability information command corresponding to the newly set presentation mode number, etc., as a presentation command (A6907), saves the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (A6908), and executes a presentation command setting process to set the probability information command as a presentation command (A6909). Here, the probability information command includes information about the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, whether or not time reduction (normal power support) is enabled, and the presentation mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a presentation rotation count command corresponding to the remaining number of rotations for presentation as a presentation command (A6910) and executes the presentation command setting process (A6911). Then, it prepares a time reduction variation count command corresponding to time reduction variation count 2 (here, the initial value for the time reduction count, e.g., 7 or 200) as a presentation command (A6912) and executes the presentation command setting process (A6913).

Then, the game control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for the special chart normal processing (A6914) and saves the processing number in the special chart game processing number area (A6915).

Then, the game control device 100 saves signals related to the end of the jackpot (e.g., turning off the jackpot 1 signal, turning off the jackpot 3 signal, and turning off the jackpot 4 signal) in the external information output data area (A6916), and saves signals related to the end of the jackpot (e.g., turning off the condition device operation signal, turning off the special device continuous operation device operation signal, turning off the special symbol 1 hit signal, and turning off the special symbol 2 hit signal) in the test signal output data area (A6917).

Next, the game control device 100 clears the information in the time reduction determination flag area (A6918), clears the information in the round LED pointer area indicating the number of jackpot rounds (A6919), and clears the information in the presentation mode transition information area (A6920). It then clears the specific area passage information area (irregular information area) (A6921), clears the information in the special game mode flag save area (A6922), and ends the jackpot end process.

[Jackpot end setting process]
Next, the details of the jackpot end setting process (A6901) in the jackpot end process will be explained. Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the stopped symbol pattern is symbol type 1 (A7001). In this embodiment, symbol type 1 is the jackpot symbol for a 3R normal jackpot C and the small jackpot symbol for a 3R normal small jackpot A, but is not limited to this. 3R indicates that the upper limit of the number of rounds is 3. In a 3R normal small jackpot, the first round is a small jackpot round (opening of the large prize slot), and the second and third rounds are V prize jackpot rounds.

When the stopped symbol pattern is symbol type 1 (the result of A7001 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the game state at the time of winning is with time reduction (i.e., with normal power support) based on the information in the special symbol game mode flag save area (A7002). A win refers to when a small win symbol or a big win symbol is displayed stationary after the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation display game has ended (for example, when the special symbol display processing is being executed, at the end of the stationary display time, or just before the fanfare for a small win or a big win). If the special symbol low probability & time reduction flag is stored in the special symbol game mode flag save area (A5111, A5135), where information is saved in the case of a small win or a big win, the game state at the time of winning can be determined to be with time reduction. If the special symbol low probability & no time reduction flag is stored, the game state at the time of winning can be determined to be without time reduction.

As mentioned above, if a win (small win or big win) occurs in support mode B, the game state at the time of the win, when the winning symbol is displayed as stopped, is with time-saving (with normal power support) (see Figures 49A and 49B). However, if a win occurs in a time-saving mode other than support mode B, if the time-saving end is set when the fluctuation of the winning special symbol fluctuation display game ends, the game state at the time of the win is not with time-saving but without time-saving (see Figure 49A). Note that in this embodiment, in a time-saving mode other than support mode B, when the special symbol 2 fluctuation display game wins, the game is without time-saving, but when the special symbol 1 fluctuation display game wins, the game is with time-saving. Naturally, when a win occurs in the normal game state (normal mode, remaining reserve consumption mode), the game state is also without time-saving.

When the game control device 100 wins with a stop pattern of pattern type 1 (during the winning stop display) and there is no time reduction (the result of A7002 is "N"), it saves a normal no support flag in the normal game mode flag area (A7003), saves a special low probability & no time reduction flag in the special game mode flag area (A7004), clears the time reduction variation count 1 area and the time reduction variation count 2 area (A7005), and saves normal base state information in the normal base state determination area (A7006).

In this way, if you hit a stop pattern of symbol type 1 while there is no time-saving function, the game state after the jackpot ends will be the normal game state (normal mode), not the time-saving state (normal power support state, time-saving mode). Note that "after the jackpot ends" does not only include the end of a direct jackpot that is not caused by a V entry, but also the end of a jackpot when a V entry jackpot occurs during a minor jackpot.

On the other hand, if time-saving is enabled when a symbol type 1 stopping pattern is hit (a winning stop is displayed) (the result of A7002 is "Y"), processing from step A7016 onwards is executed. As a result, if time-saving is enabled when a symbol type 1 stopping pattern is hit, the game state after the jackpot ends will be in a time-saving state (time-saving mode #1B (support mode B)) where the initial value of time-saving variation count 1 (total number of time-saving times) is 11 and the initial value of time-saving variation count 2 (number of time-saving times) is 7, as described below.

If the stopped symbol pattern is not symbol type 1 (result of A7001 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the stopped symbol pattern is symbol type 2 (A7007). In this embodiment, symbol type 2 is the jackpot symbol for a 3R normal jackpot A, a 3R normal jackpot B, and a 10R normal jackpot B, as well as the small jackpot symbol for a 10R normal small jackpot B, but is not limited to these. Note that 3R and 10R indicate that the upper limit of the number of rounds is 3 and 10, respectively. For a 10R normal small jackpot, the first round is the small jackpot round (opening of the large prize slot), and rounds 2-10 are the V prize jackpot rounds.

If the stopped symbol pattern is symbol type 2 (the result of A7007 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A7016 onwards. As a result, if the stopped symbol pattern is symbol type 2, the game state after the end of the jackpot will always be a time-saving state in which the initial value of time-saving variation count 1 (total number of time-saving times) is 11, and the initial value of time-saving variation count 2 (number of time-saving times) is 7.

If the stopped symbol pattern is not symbol type 2 (the result of A7007 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the stopped symbol pattern is symbol type 4 (A7008). In this embodiment, symbol type 4 is the jackpot symbol for 10R normal jackpot A and 10R normal jackpot C, but is not limited to this.

If the stopped symbol pattern is not symbol type 4 (the result of A7008 is "N"), that is, if the stopped symbol pattern is symbol type 3 (other than symbol types 1, 2, and 4), the game control device 100 determines whether the game state at the time of the win was in time-saving mode based on the information in the special symbol game mode flag save area (A7009). Step A7009 is the same process as step A7002. In this embodiment, symbol type 3 is the small win symbol for a 10R normal small win A, but this is not limited to this.

When a winning symbol type 3 stop pattern is hit (a winning stop is displayed) and time-saving is in effect (the result of A7009 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time-saving as external information in the external information output data area (A7011). Note that the signal related to the start of time-saving is the on data of the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal, but since the jackpot 2 signal has been on since the jackpot, it continues.

Next, the game control device 100 saves signals related to the start of time reduction (special symbol 1 variable time reduction state signal on, special symbol 2 variable time reduction state signal on, normal electric device 1 open extension state signal on) in the test signal output data area (A7012). It then saves a normal symbol support flag in the normal symbol game mode flag area (A7013), and saves a special symbol low probability & time reduction flag in the special symbol game mode flag area (A7014).

The game control device 100 then saves 204 in the time-saving variation count 1 area and 200 in the time-saving variation count 2 area (A7015), ending the jackpot end setting process. As a result, if time-saving is enabled when a symbol type 3 stop pattern is hit, the game state after the jackpot ends will be a time-saving state (time-saving mode #1A (support mode A)) in which the initial value of time-saving variation count 1 (total number of time-saving times) is 204 and the initial value of time-saving variation count 2 (number of time-saving times) is 200. In particular, in this embodiment, if a specific small win (symbol type 3: 10R normal small win A) occurs in support mode B, a large number of time-saving times of 200 will be obtained after the jackpot ends.

When a winning symbol type 3 stop pattern is hit (a winning stop is displayed) and there is no time-saving function (the result of A7009 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time-saving function as external information in the external information output data area (A7016). Note that the signal related to the start of time-saving function here does not include ON data for the jackpot 3 signal, but only ON data for the jackpot 2 signal, but the jackpot 2 signal has been ON since the jackpot, so it continues.

In this way, the on data for the jackpot 3 signal is not transmitted to the external device when the time-saving state is reached with 7 time-saving cycles (time-saving mode #1B (support mode B)) after the jackpot ends (A7016), but is transmitted to the external device when the time-saving state is reached with 200 time-saving cycles (time-saving mode #1A (support mode A)) after the jackpot ends (A7011). Therefore, since the external information signal transmitted to the external device at the start of the time-saving state (when the jackpot ends) differs depending on the number of time-saving cycles after the jackpot ends, there is the advantage that the external device can distinguish the type of time-saving state after the jackpot ends.

Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the start of time-saving in the test signal output data area (A7017), saves a normal game mode flag with support in the normal game mode flag area (A7018), and saves a special game low probability & time-saving flag in the special game mode flag area (A7019).

The game control device 100 then saves 11 in the time-saving variation count 1 area and 7 in the time-saving variation count 2 area (A7020), and ends the jackpot end setting process. As a result, if a winning symbol occurs with the stopping symbol pattern of symbol type 3 (10R normal small win A) and there is no time-saving mode, the game state after the jackpot ends will be in a time-saving state (time-saving mode #1B (support mode B)) where the initial value of time-saving variation count 1 (total number of time-saving times) is 11 and the initial value of time-saving variation count 2 (number of time-saving times) is 7.

When the stopped symbol pattern is symbol type 4 (the result of A7008 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether the game state at the time of the win is in a time-saving mode based on the information in the special symbol game mode flag save area (A7010). In this embodiment, symbol type 4 is the jackpot symbol for 10R normal jackpot A and 10R normal jackpot C, but is not limited to this.

When a symbol type 4 stop pattern is hit (a winning stop is displayed) and no time-saving mode is in effect (the result of A7010 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A7011 onwards. As a result, if a symbol type 4 stop pattern is hit and no time-saving mode is in effect when a symbol type 4 stop pattern is hit, the game state after the jackpot ends will be a time-saving mode (time-saving mode #1A (support mode A)) in which the initial value of time-saving variation count 1 (total number of time-saving times) is 204 and the initial value of time-saving variation count 2 (number of time-saving times) is 200. In particular, in this embodiment, when a specific jackpot (symbol type 4) occurs during normal gameplay, a large number of time-saving times of 200 will be obtained after the jackpot ends.

When a symbol type 4 stop pattern is hit (a winning stop is displayed) and time-saving is in effect (the result of A7010 is "Y"), the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A7016 onwards. As a result, if time-saving is in effect when a symbol type 4 stop pattern is hit, the game state after the jackpot ends will be in a time-saving state (time-saving mode #1B (support mode B)) where the initial value of time-saving fluctuation count 1 (total number of time-saving times) is 11 and the initial value of time-saving fluctuation count 2 (number of time-saving times) is 7.

The above jackpot end setting process determines the type of game state after the jackpot ends (normal game state, several types of time-saving states, etc.) depending on the type of symbol that stops and whether or not time-saving is enabled when the jackpot occurs (while the jackpot is displayed).

[Time chart (with or without time reduction)]
49A and 49B are time charts showing the change in whether or not time is reduced by the special game process (i.e., whether or not normal power support is available). Figure 49A shows how the presence or absence of time reduction changes with a small hit (a +V winning jackpot), and Figure 49B shows how the presence or absence of time reduction changes with a direct hit jackpot (a jackpot that does not go through a small hit).

As shown in Figure 49A, in the case of a time-saving mode other than Support Mode B (particularly Support Mode A), the special symbol game processing sets the end of the time-saving mode when the fluctuation in the special symbol fluctuation display game that results in a small win (small win fluctuation) ends (stops), and the state changes from with normal power support (with support) to without normal power support (no support). On the other hand, in the case of Support Mode B, the end of the time-saving mode is set when the stopped display of the small win symbol ends (at the end of the stopped display time, just before the small win fanfare, or when the small win fanfare starts), and the state changes from with normal power support (with support) to without normal power support (no support).

In other words, the timing at which the time-saving feature ends is later in Support Mode B than in other time-saving modes. Due to these differences in the timing at which the time-saving feature ends, even if the same winning symbol (for example, symbol type 3:10R normal small win A) is hit, the time-saving mode (a game state with a different number of time-saving cycles) to which the player transitions after the winning state ends can be different depending on whether the time-saving mode in which the player was in immediately before the win (i.e., the time-saving mode during the winning variable display) was Support Mode B or a mode other than Support Mode B. This broadens the scope of gameplay and increases the variety of gameplay, increasing the enjoyment of the game. The presentation control device 300 can also use these differences in the timing at which the time-saving feature ends to set the presentation, etc., thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that Figure 49A shows the case of a variation in the special chart 2 variation display game that results in a small hit (special chart 2 small hit variation). In the case of a variation in the special chart 1 variation display game that results in a small hit (special chart 1 small hit variation), if there is an exceptional V win during the small hit state of special chart 1 (as mentioned above, V wins generally do not occur), the end of the time reduction can be set when there is a V win, and if there is no V win, the end of the time reduction does not need to be set. Note that in the case of a special chart 1 small hit variation, as in the case of a special chart 2 small hit variation, the end of the time reduction can be set according to the support mode (time reduction mode), as shown in Figure 49A.

In addition, as another configuration, the timing for setting the end of the time-saving feature may be delayed from that shown in Figure 49A for both time-saving modes other than Support Mode B and Support Mode B. For example, for time-saving modes other than Support Mode B, the end of the time-saving feature may be set when the display of the small win pattern ends (just before the small win fanfare), and for Support Mode B, the end of the time-saving feature may be set during the small win state or at the end of the small win state (when the small win ending ends). Alternatively, as another configuration, the timing for setting the end of the time-saving feature may be reversed from that shown in Figure 49A, and may be set earlier in Support Mode B than in time-saving modes other than Support Mode B.

As shown in Figure 49B, if the special chart game processing results in a direct hit jackpot (a jackpot not resulting from a V win) in either the special chart 1 variable display game or the special chart 2 variable display game, the timing of the end of the time-saving feature does not depend on the support mode (time-saving mode) or special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2). As with a small hit in support mode B, in the case of a direct hit jackpot, the end of the time-saving feature is set when the stopped display of the stopped pattern (jackpot pattern) ends (at the end of the stopped display time, just before the jackpot fanfare, or when the jackpot fanfare begins), and the state changes from with normal power support (with support) to without normal power support (without support).

Note that, unlike Figure 49B, the timing at which the time-saving feature ends may be varied depending on the support mode (time-saving mode), as in Figure 49A. In this case, too, the range of gameplay is broadened and the variety of play is increased, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[General game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game processing (A1311) in the timer interrupt processing will be explained. Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game processing. In the normal game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire processing related to the normal game variable display game is controlled, the display of the normal game is set, and the opening and closing control of the normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric device, normal power) is performed.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process to monitor input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a normal power winning switch monitoring process that monitors input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, if the normal game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates it by -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to 0. The game control device 100 then determines whether the value of the normal game processing timer has reached 0 (A7604).

If the value of the normal game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is "Y"), i.e., if the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 sets in a register the normal game sequence branch table to be referenced in order to branch to the processing corresponding to the normal game processing number (A7605).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 obtains the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the normal game processing number based on the set normal game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, it makes a subroutine call using the normal game processing number and executes the game branch processing corresponding to the normal game processing number (A7607).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation in the normal map fluctuation display game, and executes normal map normal processing (A7608), which sets the start of fluctuation in the normal map fluctuation display game, sets the effects, and sets the information necessary to perform normal map fluctuation processing.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "1" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal map change processing (A7609), which sets the information necessary to perform the normal map display processing. For example, in the normal map change processing, in order to transition to the normal map display processing, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the normal map game processing number area, and the normal map display time is saved in the normal map game processing timer area.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "2" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes normal map display processing (A7610) to set the normal power release time and set the information necessary to perform normal map win processing if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win. For example, in the normal map display processing, if the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is a win, the game processing number is set to "3" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map win processing, while if the result is a loss, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal map game processing number area to transition to normal map normal processing.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "3" in step A7607, the game control device 100 continues the normal winning processing or executes normal winning processing to set information necessary for normal remaining ball processing (A7611). For example, in the normal winning processing, after making settings to open the normal variable winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, the game processing number is set to "4" and saved in the normal game processing number area in order to transition to normal remaining ball processing.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal power remaining ball process (A7612), which sets the information necessary to perform the normal power end process. For example, in the normal power remaining ball process, in order to transition to the normal power end process, the game processing number is set to "5" and saved in the normal power game processing number area, and the normal power ending time is saved in the normal power game processing timer area.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal win termination process (A7613) that sets the information necessary to perform normal map normal processing (A7608). For example, in the normal win termination process, in order to transition to normal map normal processing, the game processing number is set to "0" and saved in the normal map game processing number area.

Then, the game control device 100 prepares a normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 53 (A7614). Then, it executes a symbol fluctuation control process for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol (normal symbol) by the normal symbol display device 53 (A7615), and ends the normal symbol game process.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), i.e., if the timer has not yet expired, the game control device 100 executes the processing from step A7614 onwards.

[External information editing processing]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1318) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. Figures 51A and 51B are flowcharts showing the procedure for the external information editing process. Figure 51A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and Figure 51B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1307), the winning slot switch/status monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1314), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1315), information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or an internal gaming facility management device, or to a test firing test device, is created and set in an output buffer.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9301). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9301 is "N"), it determines whether a main frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9302). If a main frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9302 is "N"), it saves the off data of the door/frame opening signal in the external information output data area (A9303).

If a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9301 is "Y") or if a main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9302 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 saves the ON data of the door/frame opening signal in the external information output data area (A9305) and saves the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9306).

After steps A9303 and A9306, the game control device 100 saves the security signal off data in the external information output data area (A9304). If the security signal control timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (A9307), and it is determined whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the timer has timed out) (A9308). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (e.g., 256 msec) when the data stored in RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or the like (A1046 of the main processing). The security signal control timer then begins timing from the time the RAM is initialized.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9308 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the security signal on data in the external information output data area (A9309) and proceeds to processing of step A9310. In other words, the fact that the data stored in RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

If the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9308 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether magnetic fraud is occurring (A9310). Note that if there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnetic fraud is occurring. If there is no magnetic fraud occurring (the result of A9310 is "N"), it further determines whether board radio wave fraud is occurring (A9311). Note that if there is a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio wave fraud is occurring.

If board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9311 is "N"), the game control device 100 further determines whether frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9312). If a frame radio wave fraud signal is present, it can be determined that frame radio wave fraud is occurring. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9312 is "N"), it further determines whether large prize slot fraud is occurring (A9313). Note that if the prize slot switch/status monitoring process has saved an illegal winning occurrence flag for the large prize slot in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that large prize slot fraud is occurring. If large prize slot fraud is not occurring (the result of A9313 is "N"), it further determines whether normal power fraud is occurring (A9314). Note that if the prize slot switch/status monitoring process has saved an illegal winning occurrence flag for the second start prize slot of the normal variable winning device 37 in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that normal power fraud is occurring.

If normal power fraud is not occurring (the result of A9314 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether vibration fraud is occurring (A9315). Note that if a detection signal is received from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that vibration fraud is occurring. If vibration fraud is not occurring (the result of A9315 is "N"), it determines whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (A9316). Note that if the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1317), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

If an abnormal discharge error is not occurring (the result of A9316 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether a V passing error is occurring (A9317). If a detection signal from the specific area switch 72 is generated at an inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passing error is occurring. If a V passing error is not occurring (the result of A9317 is "N"), it determines whether a remaining ball error, which is an error related to remaining balls, is occurring (A9318). If a remaining ball error is not occurring (the result of A9318 is "N"), it determines whether the safety device is operating based on the safety device operation flag (A9319). If the safety device is not operating (the result of A9319 is "N"), it determines whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9320).

If a switch abnormality error, such as a disconnected switch connector, is not occurring (the result of A9320 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 saves the OFF data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9321). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A9320 is "Y"), the gaming control device 100 saves the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9323).

On the other hand, if magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9310 is "Y"), board radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9311 is "Y"), frame radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9312 is "Y"), large prize slot fraud is occurring (the result of A9313 is "Y"), normal power fraud is occurring (the result of A9314 is "Y"), vibration fraud is occurring (the result of A9315 is "Y"), an abnormal discharge error is occurring (the result of A9316 is "Y"), a V passage error is occurring (the result of A9317 is "Y"), a remaining ball error is occurring (the result of A9318 is "Y"), or the safety device is activated (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the game control device 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9322) and the on data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9323). By setting the security signal to on data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. In this embodiment, the safety device is in operation when the safety device operation flag = 1.

In this way, when the safety device is activated (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the security signal is turned on and output to an external device such as a hall computer (A9322), allowing the amusement facility manager or staff to recognize that the safety device is activated. In addition to a configuration in which the security signal is continuously output to an external device while the safety device is activated, it is also possible to configure the security signal to be output to an external device for just one pulse (e.g., 256 ms) when the safety device is activated. Furthermore, external information may be provided specifically for the safety device, instead of or in combination with the security signal, and this dedicated external information may be output to the external device while the safety device is activated.

Also, if the safety device is activated (the result of A9319 is "Y"), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, and the gaming machine error state signal is output as a test signal to the test firing device. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that the test signal (gaming machine error state signal) corresponding to the safety device being activated is not output. Alternatively, a test signal separate from the gaming machine error state signal may be output to the test firing device.

After steps A9321 and A9323, the game control device 100 executes a start port signal editing process (A9324) to edit the winning signal of the start port. Next, it executes a main prize ball signal editing process (A9325) to set information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out, and executes a pattern confirmation count signal editing process (A9326) to output to an external device a pattern confirmation count signal generated when the stopped pattern of the special pattern variable display game is confirmed, and then terminates the external information editing process.

[Safety device related processing]
Next, the safety device related processing (A1313) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) will be described in detail. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device related processing. The safety device related processing is an in-area processing and is executed as part of the above-mentioned in-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the in-area work area (A9401). If the safety device in operation flag = 1, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation. If the safety device is in operation (the result of A9401 is "Y"), the safety device-related processing is terminated.

If the safety device is not activated (the result of A9401 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads the safety device activation information from the safety device activation information area included in the external work area (A9402) and determines whether the safety device activation information is the value of the old activation information area (A9403). If the safety device activation information is the value of the old activation information area (the result of A9403 is "Y"), there is no change in the safety device activation information, so the game control device 100 proceeds to processing in step A9409 without setting (sending) a performance command.

If the safety device activation information is not a value in the old activation information area (the result of A9403 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a safety device activation-related command table that associates the safety device activation information with commands so that a presentation command can be set (sent) since there has been a change in the safety device activation information (A9404), and obtains the command (ACTION section) corresponding to the safety device activation information (A9405). It then determines whether or not a command is defined (A9406). Because the safety device activation-related command table does not define a command corresponding to safety device non-activation information (value 0) (because there is no command), if the safety device activation information is safety device non-activation information (value 0), it can be determined that no command is defined. If the command is not defined (the result of A9406 is "Y"), the game control device proceeds to processing in step A9409 without setting (sending) a presentation command.

If a command definition exists (the result of A9406 is "N"), the game control device 100 prepares a safety device activation-related command (MODE section) as a presentation command (A9407). It can be determined that a command definition exists if the safety device activation information is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activation information (value 3). Then, a presentation command setting process is executed to set (send) the presentation command (A9408). The presentation command consists of a MODE section and an ACTION section. It is also possible to define a command corresponding to safety device non-activation information (value 0) in the safety device activation-related command table, thereby omitting the determination of step A9406 and allowing a safety device activation-related command to be set (sent) even for safety device non-activation information (value 0).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the safety device activation information is safety device activation information (value 3) (A9409). If the safety device activation information is not safety device activation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is "N"), the safety device-related processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the safety device activation information is safety device activation information (value 3) (the result of A9409 is "Y"), "1" indicating that the safety device is activated is saved as the safety device activation flag in the safety device activation flag area (A9410), and then the safety device-related processing is terminated. Note that if safety device activation information (value 3) was saved in step A9804 (described below) during the previous timer interrupt processing, the result of step A9409 will be "Y" during the next timer interrupt processing.

In this way, when the safety device activation information changes to safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activated information (value 3), a safety device activation-related command is sent to the performance control device 300, with the safety device activation information included in part (ACTION section). When the ACTION section is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activated information (value 3), the safety device activation-related command becomes an activation notice command corresponding to the activation notice state, an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state, or an activated command corresponding to the activated state, respectively.

By receiving the activation warning command, the performance control device 300 can display an activation warning message (for example, the words "Playing will end soon") on the display device 41 when the safety device is in an activation warning state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that play may be stopped, urging the player to end play and preventing the player from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. It can also surprise those who are cheating and encourage them to stop cheating.

By receiving the activation warning command, the performance control device 300 can display an activation warning message (for example, the words "Play will end after the win ends") on the display device 41 when the safety device is in an activation warning state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that play will be halted after a small win or a big win ends, warning the player that they will suffer disadvantages such as the end of a winning streak. A winning streak refers to consecutive big wins occurring without going through normal mode (or normal gameplay state), for example. The activation warning state can also surprise anyone cheating and encourage them to stop cheating.

By receiving the operating command, the effect control device 300 can display an operating display 513 (for example, the words "Playing Stopped") on the display device 41 while the safety device is in an operating state (operating state). This prevents new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10, and can also stop any cheating that may be occurring.

Note that if the safety device activation information remains unchanged at 0, 1, 2, or 3 (no change from 0 to 0, 1 to 1, 2 to 2, or 3 to 3), safety device activation-related commands are not sent to the performance control device 300. Even when the safety device counter value becomes less than 190,000 after reaching 190,000 to 194,999 and the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 0 (a change from 1 to 0), safety device activation-related commands are not sent without a command definition. Note that changes in safety device activation information from 2 to 1 or from 3 to 2 (changes from 2 to 1, 3 to 2) are excluded by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device activation monitoring process described below.

When the safety device activation information changes from 0 to 1 (when it changes from 0 to 1), an activation warning command from among the safety device activation-related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. When the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 2 (when it changes from 1 to 2), an activation warning command from among the safety device activation-related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. When the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3 (when it changes from 2 to 3), an activation command from among the safety device activation-related commands is sent to the performance control device 300. Note that when the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3, the result of step A9403 becomes "Y" just once immediately afterwards, and the activation command is sent via steps A9404-A9410. The safety device activation flag is set to 1, so the safety device is activated (the result of A9401 is "Y"). In the subsequent timer interrupt processing, steps A9404-A9410 are not passed through, and no safety device activation-related command is sent.

Note that while the direct change in safety device activation information from 1 to 3 (the change from 1 to 3 itself) is eliminated by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device activation monitoring process described below, the safety device activation information can instantaneously change from 1 to 2 to 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and does not trigger an activation warning state, as described below). This change from 1 to 2 to 3 corresponds to the safety device counter value reaching 195,000 when there is neither a big win nor a small win, and the transition from the activation warning state to the activated state. Then, in response to the safety device transitioning from the activation warning state to the activated state, an activation command is sent to the performance control device 300 as a safety device activation-related command (A9405, A9407).

[Out-of-area integration processing]
Next, the details of the outside area integration process (A1321) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be explained. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the outside area integration process. The outside area integration process is an outside area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned outside area program.

The game control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the external work area (A9501), and then sets the address value indicating the beginning of the external stack area (external stack area) as the external stack area value in the stack pointer (A9502). This switches the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used from the internal stack area to the external stack area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves (PUSHes) the register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the external stack area (A9503). It is preferable to save all general-purpose registers here. After that, a test signal output process is executed to output a test signal (A9504). Then, a performance display device control process is executed to perform display control of the performance display device 152 (A9505). Next, a ball difference confirmation process is executed (A9506) to update the number of balls difference (safety device counter value) and set safety device activation information corresponding to the number of balls difference (safety device counter value). Next, a safety device activation monitoring process is executed to monitor the activation of the safety device (A9507).

The game control device 100 then restores the saved registers (A9508), loads them from the stack pointer storage area, sets the stack pointer (A9509), and ends the performance display editing process. The set stack pointer will indicate the address of the stack area within the area.

[Test signal output processing]
Next, the test signal output process (A9504) in the outside-area integration process (FIG. 53) will be described in detail. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the test signal output process.

The game control device 100 first loads and synthesizes the data to be output to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 (A10101). Then, it loads and synthesizes the data to be output to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70, which outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the synthesized data to test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 (A10102).

Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70, which outputs test signals to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 (A10103). Furthermore, it loads and combines data to be output to test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70, which outputs test signals to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 (A10104). Then, it loads and combines data to be output to test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70, which outputs test signals to the test firing test device, and outputs the combined data to test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 (A10105).

Test signal output processing is executed as a test signal output processing program, which is part of the out-of-area program corresponding to out-of-area processing. On the other hand, output processing (Figure 10) is executed as an output processing program, which is part of the in-area program corresponding to in-area processing. Note that in the processing of steps A10101-A10105, the data to be output to test terminal output ports 1-5 is read (loaded) from the in-area work area of RAM.

[Performance display device control processing]
Next, the performance display device control process (A9505) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 53) will be described in detail. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the performance display device control process. The performance display device control process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the out-of-area program described above.

The game control device 100 first performs a validity check to determine the validity of the performance display work area, and if it is invalid and abnormal, initializes the performance display work area (including setting initial values) (A9601). The processing of step A9601 is the same as the processing of step A1204 in Figure 8.

In addition, since a validity check is performed each time the performance display device control process is executed, if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be immediately initialized, preventing abnormal performance displays (display of abnormal base values, etc.) as much as possible.

In addition, when initializing the work area for performance display (including setting initial values), the area other than the stack pointer storage area is initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. In this embodiment, the out-of-area stack area is not initialized, but it may be initialized. Even when initializing the out-of-area stack area, the register values saved in the out-of-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the work area for performance display is performed separately from the initialization of the in-area work area (work area for game control) and the in-area stack area (stack area for game control), so it does not affect the in-area work area or the in-area stack area.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an initial display timer update process (A9602). During the initial display timer update process, the timer is updated to perform full blinking control (initial display control), which blinks all LEDs on each digit of the performance display device 152 for approximately 5 seconds when performance display begins (after power is turned on).

Next, the game control device 100 copies the switch rising edge information of the input port that is the target of base value calculation to the performance display work area (A9603). The switch rising edge information is obtained during input processing and stored in the in-area work area (particularly the switch control area) (A1303). As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the input ports that are the target of base value calculation (input ports to be monitored) are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126. The copied switch rising edge information is used in the performance display editing process (Figure 8).

Note that detecting a game ball does not directly change the number of normal prize balls or normal out balls, and rising edge information (bits) of switches that are not subject to the calculation of the base value are copied in a cleared state (masked). For example, information on the gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72, and remaining ball outlet switch 73 is copied in a cleared state. This allows processing related to these switches (at least the clearing process for A1211) to be omitted in the performance display editing process.

If the normal number of out balls were updated by input (game ball detection) from the winning entry switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a, 39a, gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72, or remaining ball discharge switch 73, this would overlap with the input from the out ball detection switch 74, which detects all game balls discharged from the game area 32, and the base value would be calculated to be an incorrect value. If the normal number of prize balls were updated by input (game ball detection) from the winning entry switches, gate switch 34a, specific area switch 72, or remaining ball discharge switch 73, which allow game balls to pass through, this would overlap with the input from the winning entry switches, and the base value would be calculated to be an incorrect value.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a performance display device display process (A9604). In the performance display device display process, segment output data (display data and lighting pattern data related to the base value) corresponding to the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 152 is set according to the type of display period and various other conditions. For example, the display periods may be a real-time value display period BL, a one-before-last display period B1, a two-before-last display period B2, and a three-before-last display period B3, and in each display period, segment output data corresponding to the real-time value during base value measurement, and the base value measured in the one-before-last tally interval, the two-before-last tally interval, and the three-before-last tally interval may be set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the timer for switching the display period and determines whether it is time to switch the display period (A9605). If it is time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "Y"), it executes the display period switching setting (A9606) and terminates the performance display device control processing. If it is not time to switch the display period (the result of A9605 is "N"), the gaming control device 100 terminates the performance display device control processing without executing the display period switching setting.

When switching the display period, you can set the display period information to switch from BL to B1 to B2 to B3 to BL, etc. You can also set the initial value of the timer for switching the period (for example, an initial value equivalent to a predetermined period of 5 seconds).

[Difference ball confirmation process]
Next, the details of the difference ball confirmation process (A9506) in the outside area integration process (Fig. 53) will be explained. Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the difference ball confirmation process. The difference ball confirmation process is an outside area process and is executed as part of the outside area program described above. In the difference ball confirmation process, the safety device counter value (difference ball number + 100,000) indicating the difference ball number is updated, and the safety device operation information indicating the state of the safety device is updated.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is activated based on the safety device activation flag in the safety device activation flag area included in the in-area work area (A9701). If the safety device is activated (the result of A9701 is "Y"), the ball difference confirmation process is immediately terminated, and the safety device counter value and safety device activation information are not updated. Note that in this embodiment, the out-area integration process program (a program related to the safety device) included in the out-area program is configured not to be executed while game play is stopped. If the safety device is activated and game play is stopped, the out-area integration process including the ball difference confirmation process is not executed (the result of A1319 is "Y"), so step A9701 may not be performed. Note that if step A9701 is not performed, the safety device activation flag area is read and written by the in-area program and becomes an area that is not read (an area that cannot be accessed) by the out-area program.

If the safety device is not in operation (the result of A9701 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether the old operation information in the old operation information area included in the outside work area is 2 or more (old operation information area ≧ 2) (A9702). If the old operation information is 2 or more (the result of A9702 is "Y"), the difference ball confirmation process is terminated and the safety device counter value and safety device operation information are not updated.

If the old operation information is less than 2 (the result of A9702 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 based on the switch rising edge information in the switch control area (internal work area) for the fourth input port 126 (A9703). If there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "Y"), it determines whether the safety device counter value is 0 (A9704). If the safety device counter value is not 0 (the result of A9704 is "N"), the safety device counter value, which is the value in the safety device counter area, is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A9705). Therefore, in response to the input to the out ball detection switch 74 increasing the number of ejected balls by 1, the difference in the number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of ejected balls) and therefore the safety device counter value (= difference in the number of balls + 100,000) are decreased by 1 and updated. Next, the number of acquired game balls is loaded from the acquired game ball number area included in the internal work area (A9706).

If there is no input to the out ball detection switch 74 (the result of A9703 is "N"), or if the safety device counter value is 0 (the result of A9704 is "Y"), the game control device 100 maintains the safety device counter value without updating it by -1 and loads the number of acquired game balls (A9706).

Next, the game control device 100 loads the safety device counter value from the safety device counter area included in the outside work area (A9707) and adds the number of acquired game balls to the safety device counter value (A9708). The number of acquired game balls is the total number of prize balls acquired within one interruption, i.e., the increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption, so in step A9708, the difference in number of balls (= number of safe balls - number of discharged balls) and therefore the safety device counter value (= difference in number of balls + 100,000) are updated and increased by the number of acquired game balls.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the safety device counter value is greater than or equal to the counter reference value (195,000) (whether the safety device counter is greater than or equal to 195,000) (A9709). If the safety device counter value is greater than or equal to the counter reference value (195,000) (the result of A9709 is "Y"), the upper limit value (195,000) is set to the safety device counter value so that the safety device counter value returns to the upper limit value (counter reference value of 195,000) (A9710), and the upper limit value is saved in the safety device counter area as the value after the addition (A9711). Note that the safety device counter value may exceed the upper limit value in step A9708 and become 195,000 + α. Here, α is less than the maximum number of game balls acquired (acquired within one interrupt) and is less than, for example, the total number of prize balls when all winning slot switches are input simultaneously.

On the other hand, if the safety device counter value is less than the counter reference value (195,000) (the result of A9709 is "N"), there is no need to limit it to the upper limit value, so the value after the addition process in step A9708 is saved as is in the safety device counter area (A9711). In this way, the safety device counter value in the safety device counter area is updated to the value after the addition (including the value limited to the upper limit value).

In addition, by limiting the safety device counter value to an upper limit of 19,500, the range of the safety device counter area (number of bytes or bits) becomes clear, which is convenient for developing game control programs.

Next, the game control device 100 sets an activation information number (here, 0 to 2) corresponding to the safety device counter value (A9712). For safety device counter values of 0 to 189999, safety device counter values of 190000 to 194999, and safety device counter values of 195000, the activation information number is set to "0," indicating an inactive state (normal state) of the safety device, "1," indicating an activation warning state, or "2," indicating an activation warning state. Note that the activation information number is not set to "3," indicating an activation state in which the safety device is activated. Here, as described above, if the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is set to the difference in the number of balls based on the minimum value (the difference in the number of balls during a predetermined period from the time of the minimum value to the present), in step A9709, it is determined whether the value obtained by subtracting the lowest safety device counter value to date from the current safety device counter value is equal to or greater than the difference in the number of balls reference value of 95,000, and if it is equal to or greater than the difference in the number of balls reference value of 95,000, in step A9710 the difference in the number of balls may be set to 95,000. Then, in step A9712, the activation information number may be set to "0" indicating an inactive state (normal state) of the safety device, "1" indicating an activation notice state, or "2" indicating an activation warning state, corresponding to the difference in the number of balls of 0 to 89,999, the difference in the number of balls of 90,000 to 94,999, and the difference in the number of balls of 95,000 based on the minimum value. Furthermore, the above-mentioned minimum safety device counter value may be stored in the minimum value area of the out-of-area work area, and each time the current safety device counter value becomes smaller than the stored minimum safety device counter value, the minimum safety device counter value may be updated to the current safety device counter value. Furthermore, when the operation information number becomes "2," as described below, gameplay is halted immediately or after the end of a big win or small win. In this way, if the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is based on the minimum value, a gameplay halt can occur if the current difference in the number of balls is equal to or greater than the ball difference reference value of 95,000, and therefore the difference in the number of balls related to condition (1) is equivalent to the maximum increase in the difference in the number of balls during one day of business (so-called MY).

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads the current safety device activation information from the safety device activation information area included in the external work area and saves it in the old activation information area (A9713). It then determines whether the old activation information is 2 and the activation information number is 1 (old activation information = 2 and activation information number = 1) (A9714). If the old activation information = 2 and the activation information number = 1 (the result of A9714 is "Y"), the safety device activation information "2" (the loaded value) is maintained without saving the activation information number in the safety device activation information area, and the ball difference confirmation process is terminated. This prevents the safety device activation information from changing from "2" to "1" (preventing a change from 2 to 1). Since the old activation information is 2 (the result of A9702 is "Y"), the ball difference confirmation process is immediately terminated after the next timer interrupt, and the safety device counter value and safety device activation information are not updated, and the safety device activation information "2" is maintained.

On the other hand, if the old operation information is not 2 or the operation information number is not 1 (the result of A9714 is "N": old operation information ≠ 2 or operation information number ≠ 1), the game control device 100 saves the operation information number in the safety device operation information area and updates the safety device operation information area (A9715). Then, the difference ball confirmation process ends. Furthermore, even if "2" indicating an operation warning state is saved in the safety device operation information area, if there is neither a big hit nor a small hit, "3" indicating the operation state of the safety device is instantly saved in the safety device operation information area in the subsequent safety device operation monitoring process, and an operation warning state does not occur.

In this way, in the difference ball confirmation process, the safety device operation information is set to "0" (safety device non-operation information) indicating an inactive state (normal state) of the safety device, "1" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an operation warning state, or "2" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an operation warning state, corresponding to each of the safety device counter values of 0 to 189,999, 190,000 to 194,999, and 195,000.

The change pattern (including maintenance patterns) from the old safety device activation information (old activation information A9713) to the new updated information (A9715) will be one of the following: 0 → 0, 0 → 1, 1 → 0, 1 → 1, 1 → 2, 2 → 2; as mentioned above, a change from 2 to 1 is prevented (A9714).

The gaming control device 100 may send a ball difference command indicating the updated safety device counter value (A9711) or a ball difference command indicating the updated number of balls (= safety device counter value - 100,000) to the presentation control device 300 (sub-board), and the presentation control device 300 may display the safety device counter value or number of balls difference on the display device 41, etc. In this case, during the ball difference confirmation process, even if the old operation information in the old operation information area is 2 (safety device operation warning information) (A9702), the safety device counter value is updated, and steps A9709 and A9710 are omitted so that the safety device counter value is not limited to the upper limit of 19,500. However, for safety device counter values of 195,000 or greater, the safety device operation information is set to "2" (safety device operation warning information), indicating an operation warning state.

The above describes the difference ball confirmation process. Step A9706 of the difference ball confirmation process constitutes a first counting means capable of counting the payout number, which is the number of gaming media paid out or the number of gaming media decided to be paid out (the amount of gaming value awarded or the amount of gaming value decided to be awarded). Steps A9703-A9705 of the difference ball confirmation process constitute a second counting means capable of counting the number of uses, which is the number of gaming media used (e.g., the number of balls fired or the number of balls ejected). Step A9708 of the difference ball confirmation process constitutes a calculation means capable of calculating a calculation value (e.g., the safety device counter value or the difference ball number) based on the number of payouts and the number of uses.

[Safety device operation monitoring process]
Next, the safety device operation monitoring process (A9507) in the outside-area integration process (FIG. 53) will be described in detail. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the safety device operation monitoring process. The safety device operation monitoring process is an outside-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned outside-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device activation information is 2 or greater (safety device activation information ≥ 2) (A9801). If the safety device activation information is 2 or greater (the result of A9801 is "Y"), that is, if safety device activation warning information (value 2) or safety device activation information (value 3) is set, it determines whether a big win or small win is occurring (A9802). Here, whether a big win or small win is occurring can be determined based on, for example, the special game processing number. The special game processing number is stored in the special game processing number area of the in-area work area.

For example, if the special game processing number of the jackpot fanfare matches the game processing number of the jackpot ending, it can be determined that a jackpot is occurring. In this embodiment, if the special game processing number is between 7 and 10, it can be determined that a jackpot is occurring. Also, for example, if the game processing number of the small win fanfare matches the game processing number of the small win ending, it can be determined that a small win is occurring. In this embodiment, if the special game processing number is between 3 and 6, it can be determined that a small win is occurring. Note that a small win may be determined to be occurring from the time the small win symbol is derived or the end of the small win fanfare, or from the time the jackpot symbol is derived or the end of the jackpot fanfare. If a jackpot occurs due to a V winning during a small win, it can be determined that a jackpot is occurring from the time the V winning occurs.

If the game is neither a small win nor a big win (the result of A9802 is "N"), the game control device 100 loads the current safety device activation information from the safety device activation information area included in the outside work area and saves it in the old activation information area (A9803). Then, it saves the safety device activation information (value 3) in the safety device activation information area and updates the safety device activation information area (A9804).

On the other hand, if the safety device activation information is "0" or "1" which is less than 2 (the result of A9801 is "N"), or if a big win or small win is occurring (the result of A9802 is "Y"), the safety device activation monitoring process is immediately terminated, and essentially nothing is done in the safety device activation monitoring process.

As described above, when the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set and the safety device is in an activation warning state (condition (1) is met, but condition (2) is not met), if the big win or small win ends and the game is no longer in a small win or big win state (condition (2) is met), the safety device activation information is set to safety device activation information (value 3) (safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3) (A9804). This sets the safety device activation flag to "1" (A9410 of the safety device-related processing), creating an activated state (stopped state) in which the safety device is activated, i.e., a game stop state (unplayable state, play prohibited state) in which games such as the special chart change display game, the regular chart change display game, and round play cannot be played. In this way, the safety device activation flag can be set based on the safety device activation information in the safety device activation information area (part of the off-area work area). A safety device activation flag of "1" indicates that the safety device has been activated (is currently activated) based on the establishment of an activation condition (predetermined condition) and that a game-unavailable state has occurred. Based on a safety device activation flag of "1," the results of steps A1309, A1603, A1612, A2201, etc. will be "Y," resulting in a game-unavailable state.

By activating the safety device and preventing play, it is possible to take appropriate measures against cheating in cases where the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls is large, and by limiting the difference in the number of balls or the number of safe balls, it may also be possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

Even if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set (A9712, A9715 of the difference ball confirmation process), if the game is neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot (the result of A9802 is "N"), the safety device activation information will instantly switch from the safety device activation warning information (value 2) to the safety device activation information (value 3) (A9804). In other words, in this case, before the activation warning command is sent to the presentation control device 300, the safety device activation warning information (value 2) in the safety device activation information area is overwritten and erased with the safety device activation information (value 3). Therefore, if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 when the game is neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot, the activation warning state warning of the safety device activation will not occur, and the safety device will immediately activate, causing a game stop state (a state where play is not possible, a state where play is prohibited). As mentioned above, this corresponds to the safety device activation information instantaneously changing from 1 to 2 to 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and does not result in an activation warning state), but in response to the transition from an activation warning state, which warns of the safety device activation, to an activation state, in which the safety device is in operation, an activation command is sent to the performance control device 300 as a safety device activation-related command (A9405, A9407).

Furthermore, if the safety device activation warning information (value 3) is set and the safety device has already activated, causing a game stop state, the out-of-area integration process will not be executed (the result of A1319 is "Y"), so the safety device activation information will remain as the safety device activated information (value 3) and the game stop state will continue.

In this embodiment, if the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 during a small win and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set, whether before or after a V win, step A9804 sets the safety device activation information (value 3) after the end of the jackpot due to the V win, and gameplay is stopped (a jackpot occurs). However, as another example, if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) can be set immediately after the end of the small win, and gameplay is stopped (a jackpot does not occur), and if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set after a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) can be set after the end of the jackpot due to the V win, and gameplay is stopped (a jackpot occurs). As yet another example, even if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before or after a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) may be set immediately after the small win ends, causing the game to stop (a big win will not occur).

[Control of the production control device]
The following describes the control (processing) that the performance control device 300 executes using the performance control program.

[Main processing (performance control device)]
First, the details of the main processing executed by the performance control device 300 will be explained. Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main processing (main program) executed by the performance control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the processing executed by the performance control device 300, the step symbols (numbers) are represented as "B****".

When the main processing begins, the performance control device 300 first prohibits interrupts (B0001). Next, it performs initial settings for the CPU 311 and VDP 312 (B0002, B0003), and then permits interrupts (B0004). Once interrupts are permitted, it becomes capable of executing command reception interrupt processing, which receives commands sent from the game control device 100.

Next, the performance control device 300 allows the generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41, etc. (B0005), and sets a random number seed to be used for random number generation (B0006). Then, it saves the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Next, the performance control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared after a certain period of time has passed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

Then, the performance control device 300 executes an RTC read process to read time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (B0009).

The RTC reading process may be configured to read time information from RTC338 at a predetermined cycle (e.g., every two hours); it is not necessary to read time information each time processing proceeds to step B0009. The RTC reading process may be configured to be executed only once when power is applied to the presentation control device 300 (i.e., when power is applied to the gaming machine 10). (The RTC reading process may be executed at a different location, for example, between steps B0003 and B0004.) The presentation control device 300 may set a time timer (timekeeping means) that keeps time in a timer area in RAM, and adjust the time timer (timekeeping means) to match the time on RTC338 when time information is read from RTC338 at a predetermined cycle or when time information is read from RTC338 only once upon power-on. The presentation control device 300 may then use the time timer to execute various processes. This reduces the number of times the time is read from the RTC 338, thereby reducing the load on the CPU 311.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect button input processing to detect the player's operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal from the effect button switch 25a or touch panel 25b) and change the effect content (settings) in response to the detected signal (B0010). Next, it executes hall/player setting mode processing to accept operations by the gaming parlor (amusement store) manager, players, etc., such as changing the brightness and volume of the LEDs and LCD (display device 41, etc.). Operations include operating the cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, effect button 25, and volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the gaming machine. In the hall/player setting mode processing, players can customize the effects according to the effect points described below.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing to add or clear effect points (B0012). In the effect point control processing, effect points are added by executing effects or operations that are eligible for adding effect points. In addition, when a game ends or is stopped (when a game is stopped), information including effect point information, for example, is displayed on the display device 41 as a two-dimensional code called a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 during hall/player setting mode processing or safety device processing (when an operating command is received).

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process to update random numbers such as effect random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later in Figure 59.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process to edit and control the content of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and executes a power saving control process to control the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 while it is waiting for customers (B0016).

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a performance display editing process (B0017), which updates various data to match the content to be displayed on a display device (display means) such as the display device 41, and sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The drawing data set at this time can update the image on the display device 41 without any problems, as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within the frame period of 1/30 seconds (approximately 33.3 msec). Then, the performance control device 300 completes preparation for drawing in the display frame buffer and executes the drawing command preparation end setting (B0018).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether it is time to switch frames (B0019). If it is not time to switch frames (the result of B0019 is "N"), the process of B0019 is repeated until it is time to switch frames. If it is time to switch frames (the result of B0019 is "Y"), the display device 41 is instructed to draw the screen (B0020). Since the frame period in this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, frames are switched when a periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice, for example, every 1/60 seconds (1/2 the frame period). Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be increased even further.

In addition, the performance control device 300 executes sound control processing to control the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

The performance control device 300 also executes a decoration control process (B0022) that controls decorative devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) consisting of LEDs, etc. In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of decorative devices such as LEDs is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process (B0023) that controls performance devices (board performance device 44, frame performance device, etc.) such as movable props (electric props) driven by motors and solenoids. The movable body control process, for example, sets the performance of prop movements that drive motors.

Then, when the performance control device 300 completes the processing of B0023 described above, it returns to processing of B0008. Thereafter, it repeats the processing from B0008 to B0023.

[Received command check process]
Next, the received command check process (B0014) in the above-mentioned main process (FIG. 58) will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of RAM as the number of received commands to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). It then determines whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if no commands have been received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "N"), there are no commands to analyze, so the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, i.e., if a command is being received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 subtracts the number of received commands from the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area (B1103), and then copies the contents of the received command buffer in RAM to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, because the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Furthermore, even if a new command is received while copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the performance control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1) within the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The received command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. Received commands are stored in the received command buffer in command read index 0 to 31 order, and the received commands are read out in index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that once copying to the command area for analysis is complete, the storage area in the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The performance control device 300 determines whether copying of the number of commands received and loaded in step B1101 has been completed (B1106), and if copying has not been completed (the result of B1106 is "N"), it repeats the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

When the presentation control device 300 receives a command sent from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are saved in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is incremented and updated. The received command buffer can store up to 32 commands, but analysis of the received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, once the contents of the received command are copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always having free space available in the received command buffer without directly analyzing the commands, it is possible to prepare for the reception of large volumes of commands.

Next, if the copying is complete (the result of B1106 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 loads the received command contents from the command area for analysis (B1107) and executes a received command analysis process to analyze the contents (B1108). Details of the received command analysis process will be described later in Figure 60. The address of the command area for analysis is also updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether analysis of the number of commands received that were loaded in the process of step B1101 has been completed (B1110). If the analysis has not been completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), the process of steps B1107 to B1110 is repeated. If the analysis has been completed (the result of B1110 is "Y"), the received command check process ends.

[Received command analysis process]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the above-mentioned received command check process (FIG. 59) will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first separates the upper bytes of the received command into the MODE section and the lower bytes into the ACTION section (ACT section) (B1201). Commands sent from the game control device 100 to the performance control device 300 are composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and are usually sent consecutively starting with the MODE section, which indicates the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are composed of the MODE section and ACTION section, in that order.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it determines whether the MODE section, which indicates the type of command, is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE section is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "Y"), it similarly determines whether the ACTION section is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it determines whether the ACTION section, which indicates the content of the command (specific performance instructions, etc.), is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION section is within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "Y"), it further determines whether the ACTION section for the MODE section is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it determines whether the value of the ACTION section is a possible value for the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is "Y"), command processing according to the command system is executed in B1205 and subsequent processes.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the value in the MODE section is within the range of a variation command (B1205). A variation command is a command that instructs the variation pattern of a special decorative symbol, for example, a variation command. If the MODE section indicates a variation command (the result of B1205 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes variation command processing (B1206) and terminates the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a win command (B1207). Win commands are commands that instruct actions related to the performance during a big win or small win (such as displaying a fanfare screen or round screen), and examples include fanfare commands for instructing a fanfare screen, round commands for instructing a round screen, interval commands for instructing an interval screen, and ending commands for instructing an ending screen. If the MODE section represents a win command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes win command processing (B1208) and terminates the received command analysis process.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a symbol command (B1209). Symbol commands include, for example, decorative special symbol commands that correspond to stopping symbol patterns. If the MODE section represents a symbol command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes symbol command processing (B1210) and terminates the received command analysis process.

If the MODE section does not represent a pattern-based command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE section represents a single-shot command (the result of B1211 is "Y"), it executes single-shot command processing (B1212) and terminates the received command analysis process.

If the MODE section does not represent a single command (the result of B1211 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a pre-reading symbol command (B1213). A pre-reading symbol command is, for example, a pre-reading stop symbol command. If the MODE section represents a pre-reading symbol command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes pre-reading symbol command processing (B1214) and terminates the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead pattern command (the result of B1213 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a look-ahead variation command (B1215). An example of a look-ahead variation command is a look-ahead variation pattern command. If the MODE section represents a look-ahead variation command (the result of B1215 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes look-ahead variation command processing (B1216) and terminates the received command analysis processing.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a look-ahead variable command (the result of B1215 is "N"), the performance control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in test mode), and therefore terminates the received command analysis process. Also, if the MODE section is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is "N"), if the ACTION section is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is "N"), or if the ACTION section is not a correct combination for the MODE section (the result of B1204 is "N"), the performance control device 300 terminates the received command analysis process.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the one-off command processing (B1212) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described with reference to Fig. 61. Fig. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the one-off command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section represents a model specification command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE section represents a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "Y"), it executes a model setting process to set the type of gaming machine (B1302), and then terminates the single-shot command processing. For example, the model specification command includes a model code.

If the MODE section does not represent a model specification command (the result of B1301 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). If the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes RAM initialization setting processing (B1304), such as notifying the user of RAM initialization, and terminates the single command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (B1305). For example, power outage recovery commands include a power outage recovery command and a recovery screen command. If the MODE section represents a power outage recovery command (the result of B1305 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes power outage recovery setting processing (B1306) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a power outage recovery command (the result of B1305 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes customer waiting demo setting processing (B1308) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (B1309). If the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (the result of B1309 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes special chart 1 reserved information setting processing (B1310) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (the result of B1309 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (B1311). Then, if the MODE section represents a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes the special chart 2 reserved information setting process (B1312) and terminates the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command (the result of B1311 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a probability information command (B1313). If the MODE section represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes probability information setting processing (B1314) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (the result of B1313 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents an error/fraud command (B1315). Examples of error/fraud commands include a fraud occurrence command, a fraud release command, a status off command, a status on command, a magnetic fraud alert command (magnetic error command), and a board radio wave fraud alert command (board radio wave error command). Examples of fraud occurrence commands include commands indicating the occurrence of an illegal win based on the signals of the start gate 1 switch 36a, the start gate 2 switch 37a, the prize gate switch 35a, and the large prize gate switch 43. The fraud release command is a command indicating the release of the fraud. The prize gate switch/status monitoring process (A1308) monitors the occurrence of an illegal win and the release of the fraud, and the fraud occurrence command and the fraud release command can be sent. Status ON commands include commands indicating the occurrence of a shot ball out switch signal (shot ball out error), the occurrence of an overflow switch signal (overflow error), the occurrence of an abnormal payout status signal (abnormal payout error), the occurrence of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error), and the occurrence of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) (main frame open error, front frame open error). Status OFF commands also indicate the absence of errors. If there is detection from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (magnet fraud), a magnet fraud alert command is sent in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1314). If there is detection from the radio wave sensor 62 (radio wave fraud), a board radio wave fraud alert command is sent in the radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1315).

If the MODE section indicates an error/illegal command (the result of B1315 is "Y"), an error/illegal setting process is executed (B1316) to notify or cancel the error or illegality, and the single-shot command processing is terminated. The error/illegal setting process may, for example, generate an error or illegality notification sound, cause LEDs for effects provided on the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46, to light up in a predetermined manner, or set the display device 41, etc., to display an error.

If the MODE section does not represent an error/invalid command (the result of B1315 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a command for switching performance modes (B1317). If the MODE section represents a command for switching performance modes (the result of B1317 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes a performance mode switching setting process (B1318) and terminates the single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for switching the presentation mode (the result of B1317 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a balls out command indicating the number of balls out (B1319). If the MODE section represents a balls out command (the result of B1319 is "Y"), the presentation control device 300 executes processing when the number of balls out is received (B1320) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a ball count command (the result of B1319 is "N"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the MODE section represents a count command (such as a special prize slot count command) (B1321). If the MODE section represents a special prize slot switch count command (the result of B1321 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes count information setting processing (B1322) and terminates single-shot command processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a count command (the result of B1321 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (B1323). The setting value information command is included in the command sent when power is restored in step A1049 of FIG. 5B and the command sent when RAM is initialized in the processing of step A1047. If the MODE section represents a setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes processing when the setting value is received (B1324) and terminates the single-shot command processing. In the processing when the setting value is received, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a memory section such as RAM, and the necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command (the result of B1323 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). An example of a setting change command is the probability setting change command (A1033). If the MODE section represents a setting change command (the result of B1325 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes setting change information setting processing (B1326) and terminates the single command processing. The setting change information setting processing stores the contents of the setting change command and executes processing corresponding to the command. For example, if a probability setting change command is received, the setting change information setting processing displays a setting change in progress message on the display device 41 to inform the player that a setting change is in progress.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command (the result of B1325 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). An example of a setting confirmation command is the probability setting confirmation command (A1036). If the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (the result of B1327 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 executes setting confirmation information setting processing (B1328) and terminates the single command processing. The setting confirmation information setting processing stores the contents of the setting confirmation command and executes processing corresponding to the command. For example, if a probability setting confirmation command is received, the setting confirmation information setting processing displays a setting confirmation in progress display on the display device 41 to inform the player that the setting is being confirmed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting confirmation command (the result of B1327 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a safety device-related command (B1329). An example of a safety device-related command is a safety device activation-related command (A9407). When a difference ball command containing difference ball information such as the safety device counter value and the number of difference balls is sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300, this difference ball command may be included in the safety device-related command. Then, if the MODE section represents a safety device-related command (the result of B1329 is "Y"), the presentation control device 300 executes safety device-related processing related to the safety device (B1330) and terminates the single-shot command processing. The safety device-related processing stores the contents of the safety device-related command and executes processing corresponding to the command.

In safety device processing, information contained in safety device-related commands can be displayed on the display device 41 as processing corresponding to the commands. For example, when a safety device activation-related command is received as a safety device-related command, safety device-related displays (activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, activation display 513) corresponding to the safety device activation information (safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), safety device activation information (value 3)) contained in the ACTION section of the safety device activation-related command are displayed on the display device 41. Also, for example, when a difference ball command is received as a safety device-related command, the difference ball number is displayed on the display device 41.

The display of the difference in balls (= safety device counter value -100,000) may be configured to display the entire range of values (e.g., 0 to 100,000 or -100,000 to +100,000) on the display device 41 in response to the received difference in balls command, or may display only a specified range of values (e.g., 90,000 to 100,000 after the activation warning state). Displaying the difference in balls only within this specified range can attract the player's attention by displaying it only when the difference in balls is important, while hiding the difference in balls when the difference in balls is not important makes the display device 41 easier to view. Predetermined ranges include the range corresponding to the activation warning state (90,000 to less than 95,000), the range corresponding to the activation warning state and the activated state (95,000 or more), the range corresponding to the activation warning state, the activation warning state, and the activated state (90,000 or more), or a value equal to or greater than the value immediately before or after entering the activation warning state (e.g., 89,000 or more, 91,000 or more). The difference in balls itself may also be displayed, or the difference in balls may be displayed indirectly in the form of the number of game balls (number of game media) remaining until the safety device is activated (limiting play). Furthermore, instead of the difference in the number of balls, the safety device counter value may be displayed, and when the safety device counter value is within a predetermined range (for example, 190,000 or more after the activation warning state), it may be displayed on the display device 41.

The difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in response to the difference ball number, which changes in units of 1. For example, the difference ball number indicated by the difference ball command can change in increments of 1, between 0 and 100,000 or between -100,000 and +100,000, just like the actual difference ball number. The difference ball command may be sent each time the safety device counter value and, therefore, the difference ball number, are updated (A9711).

The ball difference command may also be notified (transmitted and received) in response to the number of balls difference, which changes in predetermined increments. For example, the number of balls difference indicated by the ball difference command can change in increments of 1,000, and may be 0 (= actual number of balls difference 0-999), 1,000 (= actual number of balls difference 1,000-1,999), 2,000 (= actual number of balls difference 2,000-2,999), ... or 100,000 (= actual number of balls difference 100,000). In this case, to reduce the number of ball difference commands being sent, the ball difference command may be sent each time the safety device counter value, and therefore the number of balls difference, is updated in increments of 1,000 (A9711). The number of balls difference indicated by the ball difference command may also be a negative value.

If the MODE section does not represent a safety device-related command (the result of B1329 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a pattern stop command (B1331). Pattern stop commands include, for example, the special pattern 1 pattern stop command (decorative special pattern 1 stop command) and the special pattern 2 pattern stop command (decorative special pattern 2 stop command). If the MODE section represents a pattern stop command (the result of B1331 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 next determines whether the command in the MODE section is a normal command (B1332).

If the command in the MODE section is normal (the result of B1332 is "Y"), the presentation control device 300 sets the stopping mode of the corresponding special symbol (B1333), and after all symbols have stopped, sets the game status flag to the normal state (B1334), and ends the single-shot command processing. In the processing of B1334, as an example, the game status flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing when this processing is executed, the game status flag is set to "fluctuating," "big hit," or "small hit."

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (the result of B1331 is "N"), or if the command in the MODE section is abnormal (the result of B1332 is "N"), the performance control device 300 terminates single-shot command processing.

In addition, the presentation control device 300 may execute processing for commands not listed in FIG. 61 in single-shot command processing. For example, the presentation control device 300 may receive a time-saving variation count command, a presentation rotation count command, a play instruction notification command (left-hit instruction notification command, right-hit instruction notification command), a specific area passage command, etc. from the game control device 100 and perform processing corresponding to the command. The presentation control device 300 can obtain the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state from the time-saving variation count command (time-saving variation count), etc., and can obtain the remaining rotation count for each presentation mode from the presentation rotation count command, etc., and can set presentations based on the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state and the remaining rotation count for each presentation mode. In response to a play instruction notification command (left-hit instruction notification command or right-hit instruction notification command), the presentation control device 300 can display (notify) a play instruction display (left-hit instruction display or right-hit instruction display) that instructs (suggests) the play instruction on the display device 41, etc. In response to the specific area passage command, the performance control device 300 can notify (display) a V win on the display device 41, etc.

[Predictive pattern command processing]
Next, the details of the pre-reading symbol command processing (B1214) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described with reference to Fig. 62. Fig. 62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pre-reading symbol command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the latest reserved information is information about special chart 1 reserved (special chart 1 start memory), for example, whether the most recently received decorative special chart reserved number command is a decorative special chart 1 reserved number command (B1601). If the latest reserved information is information about special chart 1 reserved (the result of B1601 is "Y"), it saves the look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 1 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 1 reserved number (B1602).

If the latest reserved information is not special chart 1 reserved information (the result of B1601 is "N"), that is, if the most recently received decorative special chart reserved number command is a decorative special chart 2 reserved number command, the performance control device 300 saves the look-ahead pattern command (look-ahead stop pattern command) in the special chart 2 look-ahead pattern command area corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved number (B1603).

After steps B1602 and B1603, the performance control device 300 sets a look-ahead fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) to indicate that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command. This is because the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead fluctuation system command are a set, so the look-ahead fluctuation system command is sent from the game control device 100 following the look-ahead symbol system command. Then, the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, the details of the look-ahead variable command processing (B1216) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described with reference to Fig. 63. Fig. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the look-ahead variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (look-ahead fluctuation pattern command) (B1701). If the aforementioned look-ahead fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command. If it is not waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (the result of B1701 is "N"), it terminates look-ahead fluctuation system command processing. If it is waiting to receive a look-ahead fluctuation system command (the result of B1701 is "Y"), it clears the look-ahead fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1702).

Next, the performance control device 300 (sub-board) sets a look-ahead fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) in the latest reserved information (B1703), and acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section corresponding to the MODE section of the look-ahead fluctuation command (B1704). Next, it sets a look-ahead fluctuation ACT conversion table (B1705), and acquires the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the look-ahead fluctuation command (B1706).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the converted MODE and ACT sections (i.e., the MODE and ACT sections of the sub-sub look-ahead variable command) are both non-zero (B1707). A normal (valid) command is converted to a value other than 0. If the converted MODE and ACT sections are both non-zero (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE and ACT sections is saved in the look-ahead variable command area (special chart 1 look-ahead variable command area or special chart 2 look-ahead variable command area) corresponding to the latest pending information and number of pending items (B1708). Then, a look-ahead command consistency check process is executed (B1709) to determine whether the combination of the converted MODE and ACT sections is normal (B1710).

The duration of the first half of the fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of reserved items when the reserved item starts the fluctuation display game. If there are no other reserved items when the reserved item starts the fluctuation display game, the first half of the fluctuation will be longer, but if new reserved items are generated and the number of reserved items is large, the first half of the fluctuation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half of the fluctuation changes, the MODE section of the received look-ahead fluctuation command is converted to the sub-internal look-ahead fluctuation command MODE section so that the internal command of the performance control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Furthermore, because the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half of the fluctuation corresponding to the ACT section of the sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command does not depend on the number of holds. However, because there are different types of reaches of the same type, if the performance control device 300 were to use the ACT section (value of the latter half of the fluctuation) of the look-ahead fluctuation command as is without converting it, the number would increase, making checking difficult. For example, even within normal reaches, there are types such as normal reach -1 stop miss and normal reach +1 stop miss. Therefore, by converting the ACT sections indicating reaches of the same type into the same sub-sub look-ahead fluctuation command ACT section, the number can be reduced, and the burden of checking processes such as look-ahead command consistency check processing can be reduced.

Next, if at least one of the converted MODE and ACT sections (i.e., the sub-internal look-ahead variable command MODE and ACT sections) is 0 (the result of B1707 is "N"), or if the combination of the converted MODE and ACT sections is not normal (the result of B1710 is "N"), the performance control device 300 determines that there is an abnormality in the converted command and terminates the look-ahead variable command processing.

If the combination of the MODE section and ACT section after conversion is normal (the result of B1710 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (latest hold information) to be read ahead from the read-ahead variable command area (B1711) and executes a read-ahead lottery process for the latest hold read-ahead effect (B1712). Examples of read-ahead effects (read-ahead notice effects) include continuous notice effects (including chance eye read-ahead effects), read-ahead zone effects, and hold change notices. Next, it determines whether or not a read-ahead effect for the latest hold (hold change notice, etc.) will occur (B1713). If a read-ahead effect for the latest hold will occur (the result of B1713 is "Y"), it sets point information corresponding to the selected read-ahead effect (B1714).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the pre-reading effect (hold change notification, etc.) to be generated is an effect that will start immediately (B1715). If the pre-reading effect to be generated is an effect that will start immediately (the result of B1715 is "Y"), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading effect is set (B1716). If the pre-reading effect to be generated is not an effect that will start immediately (the result of B1715 is "N"), a display corresponding to a pre-reading effect (i.e., a pre-reading effect that will not start immediately), such as when a hold shift occurs (when the hold display moves or the number of holds decreases), is set and saved (B1717). Then, the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated. Note that the pre-reading effect is an effect that notifies the probability of a jackpot (the probability (expectation) of a special result) by notifying information suggesting the result (game result) of the variable display game before the variable display game stops, but it may also be configured to notify information suggesting the set probability setting value (1 to 6). In other words, the effect control device 300 can perform a pre-reading effect by changing the pending display (icon) of the pre-reading target based on the expected jackpot probability and the probability setting value.

On the other hand, if the latest pending look-ahead performance does not occur (the result of B1713 is "N"), the performance control device 300 will simply terminate the look-ahead variation command processing.

[Pattern command processing]
Next, the details of the symbol command processing (B1210) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described with reference to Fig. 64. Fig. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 sets the special symbol type corresponding to the MODE section of the received symbol command (decorative special symbol command) (B1801). The special symbol type is either special symbol 1 or special symbol 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE section and ACTION section (ACT section) of the symbol command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1802). Here, since the symbol allocation ratio differs between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, a table is used for each MODE to set the symbol type.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the symbol types include symbol type 1 (the jackpot symbol for a 3R normal jackpot C and the small jackpot symbol for a 3R normal small jackpot A), symbol type 2 (the jackpot symbols for a 3R normal jackpot A, a 3R normal jackpot B, a 10R normal jackpot B, and the small jackpot symbol for a 10R normal small jackpot B), symbol type 3 (the small jackpot symbol for a 10R normal small jackpot A), and symbol type 4 (the jackpot symbols for a 10R normal jackpot A and a 10R normal jackpot C).

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described with reference to Fig. 65. Fig. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 determines whether the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the received fluctuation command (fluctuation command) is undetermined (B1901). If the special symbol type is undetermined (the result of B1901 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 terminates the fluctuation command processing. If the special symbol type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received fluctuation command and symbol type is checked (B1902), and a determination is made as to whether the fluctuation command and symbol type are inconsistent (B1903). Here, "inconsistency" refers to a contradiction in the performance, such as when a fluctuation command for a losing symbol is received but a symbol type command for a winning symbol is received. If the fluctuation command and symbol type are inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 terminates the fluctuation command processing.

If the fluctuation command and the symbol type are consistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the fluctuation pattern type from the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) (B1904) and executes a fluctuation effect setting process to set the fluctuation effect, which is the effect that is currently fluctuating (B1905). Next, the game status flag indicating the game status (P machine status) is set to "special symbol fluctuating" (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as consecutive effects is not 0, it is updated by -1 (B1907).

[Variable performance setting processing]
Next, details of the variable performance setting process (B1905) in the variable command process (FIG. 65) described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 66. Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The performance control device 300 first determines whether the fluctuation pattern type is a no-reach fluctuation (a fluctuation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). If the fluctuation pattern type is a no-reach fluctuation (the result of B2001 is "Y"), it sets a first half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special symbol type, performance mode, and setting information (setting value) (B2002), and obtains the address of the first half preview distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) and the number of reserved special symbol types (B2003). In the case of a no-reach fluctuation, the greater the number of reserved symbols, the shorter the fluctuation time, so it obtains the address of the table corresponding to the number of reserved symbols.

If the variation pattern type is not a no-reach variation (the result of B2001 is "N"), i.e., if it is a reach variation, the performance control device 300 sets a first half preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special symbol type, performance mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) (B2004), and obtains the address of the first half preview distribution group table corresponding to the MODE section of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type (B2005).

After steps B2003 and B2005, the performance control device 300 performs a lottery for the preview that will appear during the first half of the fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Next, it sets a second half of the preview distribution group address table corresponding to the number of performance points, model code, special symbol type, performance mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) (B2007), obtains the address of the second half of the preview distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part of the fluctuation system command (B2008), and performs a lottery for the preview that will appear during the second half of the fluctuation (during the reach) (B2009). It then determines the content of the fluctuation performance that corresponds to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation system command (fluctuation command) (B2010). The fluctuation system command also reveals the fluctuation time and main reach content, etc.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (pre-announcement effect) corresponding to the result of the pre-announcement lottery (B2011). After that, the stopping pattern for the decorative special symbol variable display game is determined according to the variable effects such as reach effects and the content of the pre-announcement effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stopping pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattering pattern in the case of a losing pattern.

Next, the performance control device 300 sets the display for the variable performance (B2013) and the preview performance (B2014). Next, it sets the display for the hold reduction corresponding to the special chart type (special chart 1 or special chart 2), and for example, sets a display (hold shift display) showing a decrease in the hold display corresponding to the currently changing decorative special chart 1 or decorative special chart 2 (B2015). Next, it sets an audio number that determines the performance mode (sound output mode) using the speaker's audio, and a decoration number that determines the performance mode using the light emitted by the decoration device (B2016). The decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) have multiple decorative light-emitting elements (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emit light in the light-emitting mode (color and light-emitting timing of each LED, etc.) determined by the decoration number.

It is also possible to set the audio numbers and decoration numbers based not only on the performance content but also on the setting information (setting values). In this way, players can enjoy guessing the setting information (setting values) of the gaming machine 10 from the light-emitting mode of the decoration device, i.e., the light-emitting mode of the decorative light-emitting unit (LED).

Next, the performance control device 300 sets the display of decorative special symbol variations corresponding to the special symbol type (B2017), and sets the display of a fourth symbol variation relating to a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) in addition to the aforementioned first to third special symbols that vary on the display device 41 (B2018). Note that the fourth symbol variation may be displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the aforementioned lamp display device 80 provided outside the display device 41, or may be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

[Hit command processing]
Next, the details of the winning command processing (B1208) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 60) will be described with reference to Fig. 67. Fig. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether the MODE portion of the received win-related command indicates fanfare (B2101). If the MODE portion of the win-related command indicates fanfare (the result of B2101 is "Y"), i.e., if the win-related command is a fanfare command for a big win or small win, it executes a fanfare effect setting process to set a fanfare effect (B2102). In addition, in response to a fanfare command for a big win or small win, a play instruction (left-hand play instruction or right-hand play instruction) may be displayed (announced) on the display device 41 or the like. The fanfare command may include information on the maximum number of rounds for the current big win. Next, the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 is set to "fanfare in progress" (B2103), and the win-related command processing is terminated. In addition, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which corresponds to the number of rounds in the final round, can sometimes be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol command (the special decorative symbol command corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern).

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent fanfare (the result of B2101 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents a round (B2104). If the MODE section represents a round (the result of B2104 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is a round command or a small win open command, the presentation control device 300 executes a round presentation setting process to set a round presentation, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "round in progress" (B2105, B2106), and terminates the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent a round (the result of B2104 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents an interval (B2107). If the MODE section represents an interval (the result of B2107 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an interval command, the presentation control device 300 executes interval presentation setting processing to set an interval presentation, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "interval in progress" (B2108, B2109), and terminates the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent an interval (the result of B2107 is "N"), the presentation control device 300 determines whether the MODE section of the winning command represents an ending (B2110). If the MODE section represents an ending (the result of B2110 is "Y"), that is, if the winning command is an ending command for a big win or small win, the presentation control device 300 executes an ending presentation setting process to set the ending presentation, sets the game status flag indicating the current game status (P machine status) of the gaming machine 10 to "ending" (B2111, B2112), and terminates the winning command processing.

If the MODE section of the received winning command does not represent an ending (the result of B2110 is "N"), the effect control device 300 will terminate the winning command processing without performing any processing. As described above, a big win or small win effect is composed of a fanfare effect, a round effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc., but a small win effect may not include some of the fanfare effect, round effect, interval effect, or ending effect.

[Aspects of performance-related devices according to the state of safety devices, etc.]
68 is a table showing the state of the performance device according to the state of the safety device. As shown in FIG. 68, the state of the performance device changes depending on the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (and thus the difference in the number of balls).

As mentioned above, the safety device will be in an inactive state (activation notice state, activation warning state, or normal state where the safety device is not activated) corresponding to a safety device counter value of 0 to 189,999 (a difference in balls of -100,000 to 89,999). The safety device will be in an activation notice state where the safety device is about to activate corresponding to a safety device counter value of 190,000 to 194,999 (a difference in balls of 90,000 to 94,999). The safety device will be in an activation notice state where the safety device is about to activate corresponding to a safety device counter value of 195,000 (reaching a difference in balls of 95,000) or in an activated state where the safety device is activated (activated state).

When the safety device counter value is 195,000, the safety device will enter an activation warning state during a big win or small win, and will enter an activated state when there is neither a big win nor a small win. Therefore, if the safety device enters an activated state before a big win or small win occurs, a game stop state (game not possible state, game prohibited state) will occur immediately afterwards, and the activation warning state will not occur.

On the other hand, the activation warning state can occur when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 during a big win or small win. Therefore, when the big win or small win ends and the state is no longer either a big win or a small win, the safety device will transition from the activation warning state to an activated state (activated state).

When the safety device counter value is between 0 and 194,999 (-100,000 and 94,999 ball difference), and the safety device is in an inactive or activation warning state, the gaming machine's state (game state) is in play or waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer state). Furthermore, when the safety device counter value is 195,000 (reaching 95,000 ball difference), the gaming machine is in a small win or big win state when the safety device is in an activation warning state, but is in a game-stop state (unplayable state, game prohibited state) when the safety device is activated. The same game-stop state can also occur when a strong error 2 occurs.

When game play is stopped, games such as the special chart variable display game, the regular chart variable display game, and round play (play during a big win or small win) cannot be played. To achieve this, as described above, when game play is stopped, game ball detection by the prize slot switch is disabled, and the prize slot (winning) is disabled ("Y" in A2201), the solenoids are stopped to close the large prize slot, specific area 86, regular variable prize slot 37, etc. ("Y" in A1602 and A1603), the launch of game balls from the ball launcher is stopped (prohibited) and ball launching is stopped ("Y" in A1611 and A1612), and the collective display device 50 is turned off (the results of A1610 and A1612 are "Y"). When game play is stopped, not only can the special chart variable display game and the regular chart variable display game not continue, but new special chart variable display games and new regular chart variable display games cannot be started. It is also possible to configure the system so that firing does not stop when the safety device is activated and game play is stopped (firing does not have to be stopped even when game play is stopped due to strong error 2). Also, as mentioned above, when game play is stopped, the payout command transmission process (A1307) does not stop, and the payout of prize balls for winnings that occurred before the game stopped state continues.

When game play is stopped, a security signal is generated (A9322) and output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer, and a test signal is generated (A9323) and output as on data for a gaming machine error state signal to a test firing test device. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that a test signal (gaming machine error state signal) is not generated when game play is stopped due to the safety device being activated (even when a game play is stopped due to strong error 2, a test signal does not have to be generated).

When the safety device is not activated, the display device 41 generally does not display any safety device-related information. However, as an exception, while waiting for customers, the display device 41 may display a specific model display 541 (e.g., the words "Equipped with complete function") to indicate that the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a safety device. Players who see the specific model display 541 can recognize that the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a safety device (complete function).

When the safety device is in the activation warning state, the display device 41 displays the activation warning display 511 (for example, the text "Playing will end soon") as a safety device-related display (or safety device activation information display). To effectively display the activation warning display 511, the display mode of the activation warning display 511 may change depending on the game state, such as when waiting for customers or when a variable display is in progress (when a special chart variable display game is being played). At the start of the activation warning state, the performance control device 300 has received an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state as a safety device activation-related command, and therefore the activation warning display 511 is enabled on the display device 41 (safety device system processing of B1330).

The activation warning display 511 warns the player in advance of the possibility that they may be unable to play, urging them to end their game and preventing them from unintentionally suffering a disadvantage. The activation warning display 511 can also surprise those who are cheating and urge them to stop cheating. The display mode of the activation warning display 511 can be changed depending on the game status (e.g., waiting for customers, during a variable display), allowing for appropriate warning displays.

When the safety device is in an activation warning state during a small win or a big win, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 512 (e.g., the text "Play will end after the win ends") as a safety device-related display. At the start of the activation warning state, the performance control device 300 receives an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state as a safety device activation-related command, enabling the display device 41 to display the activation warning display 512 (safety device processing of B1330).

When the safety device is activated (not during a small win or a big win), i.e., when game play is stopped, the display device 41 displays the activation indicator 513 (e.g., the text "Play Stopped") as a safety device-related display. At the start of the activation state, the presentation control device 300 receives an activation command corresponding to the activation state as a safety device activation-related command, enabling the activation indicator 513 to be displayed on the display device 41 (safety device system processing of B1330).

The performance control device 300 also constitutes a display control means capable of displaying on the display device 41, etc. (display means) an operation warning display 511 that warns of the safety device's upcoming activation, an activation warning display 512 that warns of the safety device's upcoming activation, and an activation display 513 that indicates that the safety device is currently activated.

The display device 41 can also display an error message even when the game is stopped due to the safety device being activated. For example, because payouts continue even when the game is stopped, a payout error (weak error) may occur regarding the payout of game balls (game media), and the display device 41 can notify the user of the payout error by displaying an error message. Furthermore, if a strong error 2 occurs, the game will also stop and the game will be stopped (a state where play is not possible, a state where play is prohibited), but in a state where play is stopped due to a strong error 2, the display device 41 may be able to notify the user of the payout error by displaying an error message to make hall staff and players aware of the occurrence of an error, or may not be able to notify the user of the payout error so that it is not confused with a strong error 2.

In the game-stopped state, unlike the non-operational state, operation notification state, and operation warning state, all light-emitting elements (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and performance display device 152 are turned off (all off). Note that in the game-stopped state, all light-emitting elements (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and performance display device 152 may be lit (all on). In the game-stopped state, the ball lending button 27 remains enabled, and when a player operates it to borrow game balls, game balls may be dispensed from the payout device to the upper tray 21.

When game play is stopped, the presentation control device 300 receives an operating command and turns off (all off) or turns on (all on) all presentation LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs on the frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46. However, when an error occurs, some or all of the presentation LEDs may be lit in red. Also, when game play is stopped, the presentation control device 300 may stop audio output from the speaker 19 to silence the sound.

In addition, when game play is stopped, the presentation control device 300 does not execute the hall/player setting mode process (B0011), and even if the operation unit is operated, the brightness of the presentation LEDs and LCD (display device 41, etc.) and the volume of the speaker 19 may be made unadjustable, and the brightness and volume may be set to the default. For example, the default brightness may be zero or a predetermined value (all lights off or all lights on), and the default volume may be zero (silent). In addition, the hall/player setting mode process (adjustment process) can perform various adjustments, such as volume adjustment and brightness adjustment, of the gaming machine 10 in response to operations by the gaming facility manager or player on the operation unit (cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 451b, volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the gaming machine, etc.). In this way, when game play is stopped, various adjustments such as volume and brightness are not performed even if a player or other user operates the device, making it easier for players to recognize that game play is stopped. Also, if the default brightness and default volume are low, power can be saved when game play is stopped.

In another configuration, when play is stopped, the presentation control device 300 may execute the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) but not accept (ignore or disable) operation signals corresponding to operation of the operation unit, thereby setting the brightness and volume to a default even if an operation unit is performed by the gaming facility manager or a player. In this configuration, the presentation control device 300 may not accept (ignore or disable) operation signals corresponding to the first operation unit (cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a, 451b) that can be operated by the player, while accepting operation signals corresponding to the second operation unit (volume adjustment switch 335) that can be operated by a gaming facility manager, attendant, or other hall personnel. Then, when a player operates the first operation unit, the brightness and volume may be set to a default, and when a hall personnel operates the second operation unit, the volume and brightness of the gaming machine 10 may be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the second operation unit. The second operation unit (volume adjustment switch 335) is located on the performance control device 300 on the back of the gaming machine and can be operated by hall staff but not by players.

When a game stop state is initiated (when a safety device is activated) while a movable device (movable member, electric device, movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device) is in operation, if the movable device is in an operating position other than its initial position, the effect control device 300 may move the movable device from its operating position back to its initial position. This prevents the movable member from being maintained in its operating position in a non-playable state where game play is not possible, thereby preventing unnecessary misunderstandings such as the movable member being broken. While the movable device (movable member) is returning from its operating position to its initial position, the effect LED of the movable device may be lit (operating state) or off (initial state). As mentioned above, in a game stop state, the effect LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 are either all off (all off) or all on (all on). Therefore, after the movable device returns to its initial position, the effect LED of the movable device will be turned off or on in accordance with the other LEDs.

Conversely, if a game stop state is initiated (a safety device is activated) while a movable device (movable member, electric device, movable body, board effect device 44, frame effect device) is in operation, and the movable device is in an operating position other than its initial position, the effect control device 300 may maintain the movable device in the operating position rather than returning it to its initial position. In this case, the operating position at which the movable device stops and is maintained may be the operating position at the start of the game stop state, another operating position to which the movable device has moved slightly since the start of the game stop state due to a time lag, or another appropriate operating position different from the operating position at the start of the game stop state. As mentioned above, in a game stop state, the effect LEDs provided on the gaming machine 10 are all turned off (all off) or all turned on (all on). Therefore, the movable device remains stopped in its operating position, and the effect LEDs of the movable device may be turned off or on in accordance with the other LEDs.

In this way, if the movable device does not return to its initial position but remains in its designated operating position after the game stop state begins (after the safety device is activated), this is unnatural and can emphasize to the player that the gaming machine 10 is not in a normal state (a state in which play is possible, a state in which play is possible). For example, if the movable device, such as the board presentation device 44 (upper presentation unit 40c), remains in an unnatural position, such as in front of the display screen of the display device 41, while the game is stopped, the player will feel uncomfortable and will be more likely to recognize that the gaming machine 10 is not in a normal state.

When the movable role is a board effect device 44 provided on the gaming board 30, the initial position of the movable role is, for example, a position where the movable role is out of the front (forward) of the display device 41, and the operating position of the movable role is, for example, a position where the movable role overlaps the display device 41 in front of the display device 41. In this case, the initial position may also be a position in the storage space on the back side (rear side) of the center case portion of the gaming board main body 30a where the movable role is difficult to see from the front (player side) (a position where part of the movable role is covered by the center case portion of the gaming board main body 30a). Furthermore, if the movable prop is a frame effect device (for example, a decorative device 18a such as a top unit) installed in the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame), the initial position of the movable prop is, for example, a position in the storage space inside the glass frame 15 (or opening/closing frame) where the movable prop is difficult to see from the front (a position where the movable prop is recessed into the glass frame 15 and part of the movable prop is covered by the glass frame 15), and the operating position of the movable prop is, for example, a position where the movable prop protrudes forward, upward, or diagonally from the initial position.

When a strong error 2 occurs, a game stop state occurs, just as when the safety device is activated. However, if this game stop state begins while a movable device is in operation and the movable device is in an operating position other than its initial position, the presentation control device 300 may move the movable device from its operating position back to its initial position, or may maintain it in its operating position without returning it to its initial position. Returning the movable device to its initial position prevents unnecessary misunderstandings, such as that the movable component is broken. Not returning the movable device to its initial position would be unnatural, making it easier for the player to recognize that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 10.

As another example, in the game stop state, various game processing timers such as the special game processing timer, the bonus game processing timer, and the regular game processing timer are stopped, but the collective display device 50 may not be turned off and may continue to display as it did when the game stopped state was entered. Furthermore, if the collective display device 50 is displaying a variable value at the start of the game stop state, it may be turned off after this variable value display has ended. This prevents the variable value display on the collective display device 50 from suddenly ending. Furthermore, in the game stop state, the performance display device 152 may continue to display.

Note that when the gaming machine 10 is powered off and then powered on again, the safety device counter area, safety device activation information area, etc. are initialized by the safety device information initialization process (A1104-A1106), and safety device activation information such as safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3) is erased. As a result, safety device-related displays (activation notice display 511, activation warning display 512, activation display 513, etc.) on the display device 41 may be erased and hidden. If the gaming machine 10 is powered off while a safety device is activated and then powered on again with the RAM initialization switch 112 on, the safety device activation flag area is also cleared to 0 (A1045), and the gaming machine 10 returns from a game-stopped state to a playable state.

[Actions and Effects of the First Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment is equipped with a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and when the game results in a special result (e.g., a small win or a big win), can generate a special game state (e.g., a small win state or a big win state) that is advantageous to the player. The game control means can generate a plurality of specific game states (e.g., a time-saving state, a normal power support state) that are different from the special game state, and when a game in the specific game state results in a special result, can set the end of the specific game state at a timing corresponding to the type of the specific game state (e.g., support mode A, B).

In such a gaming machine 10, the timing at which a specific game state ends, which differs depending on the type of specific game state, can be used to determine the selection of the game state, thereby broadening the scope of gameplay and increasing the variety of gameplay, making the game more enjoyable. For example, even if the special result (e.g., small win symbol) of the game in a specific game state (e.g., time-saving state, normal power support state) is the same type (e.g., 10R normal small win A), the game state (e.g., support mode A, B) after the special game state (e.g., small win state or big win state) can be selected based on the timing at which the specific game state ends, which differs depending on the type of specific game state, broadening the scope of gameplay and increasing the variety of gameplay.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 69 to 77. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The second embodiment relates to the selection of a presentation style and presentation in the selected presentation style.

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the game control device 100 determines the presentation mode (normal mode, remaining reserve consumption mode, time-saving modes #1A, #1B, #3, #4, jackpot mode (presentation mode 1), etc.) according to the game status, etc., using the presentation mode number. The player is then allowed to select a detailed presentation style for each presentation mode, and the presentation control device 300 executes the presentation based on the selected presentation style. Note that, unlike the first embodiment, the presentation control device 300 may also determine the presentation mode (normal mode, remaining reserve consumption mode, time-saving modes #1A, #1B, #3, #4, jackpot mode (presentation mode 1), etc.) according to the game status, etc.

[Hall/player setting mode processing]
First, with reference to Fig. 69, the details of the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011) in the main processing (Fig. 58) described above will be explained. Fig. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hall/player setting mode processing executed by the performance control device 300. The hall/player setting mode processing allows a hall (amusement parlor) attendant or the like to perform various settings of the gaming machine 10, or allows a player to perform various settings of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the device is in hall setting mode (B0401). It can determine that the device is in hall setting mode if the hall setting mode flag (described below) is set. If the device is in hall setting mode (the result of B0401 is "Y"), it performs processing B0406-B0416, and performs various settings and adjustments based on the operation of switches on the back of the gaming machine (such as the volume adjustment switch 335), the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and the effect button 25 by a hall (amusement parlor) attendant, etc.

When the effect control device 300 is not in hall setting mode (the result of B0401 is "N"), it determines whether or not it is in player setting mode (B0402). It can determine that it is in player setting mode when the player setting mode flag described below is set. It can also determine that it is in player setting mode when a selection screen is displayed on the display device 41 as an effect during play. When it is in player setting mode (the result of B0402 is "Y"), it performs processing B0420-B0425 and performs various settings and adjustments based on the player's operation of the cross key switch 450, volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and effect button 25.

When the player setting mode is not in progress (the result of B0402 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the hole setting mode start condition is met (B0403). For example, in a given situation where the front frame 12 or glass frame 15 is open, if the operation of the effect button 25 or the like to enter the hole setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010), it can determine that the hole setting mode start condition is met. When the hole setting mode start condition is not met (the result of B0403 is "N"), the process of B0417 is executed.

When the hole setting mode start condition is met (the result of B0403 is "Y"), the performance control device 300 performs a screen drawing start setting to start screen drawing (drawing of the hole setting screen) on the display device 41 in the hole setting mode (B0404). Then, it sets the hole setting mode in progress flag (B0405).

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a hall volume adjustment process (B0406) that adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, a hall LED brightness adjustment process (B0407) that adjusts the brightness of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, an LCD brightness adjustment process (B0408) that adjusts the brightness of the display unit (LCD, etc.) of the display device 41, and a power saving setting process (B0409) that sets power saving settings based on the operation of switches (such as the volume adjustment switch 335) on the back of the gaming machine by hall staff, etc.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a logo color setting process to set the light color, etc., of the logo role object (B0410). Then, it determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been input (B0411). If an operation signal from a setting confirmation operation using the cross key switch 450, effect button 25, etc. is detected in the effect button input process (B0010), it can be determined that a setting confirmation operation has been input. If no setting confirmation operation has been input (the result of B0411 is "N"), the hall/player setting mode process ends.

When a setting confirmation operation is input (the result of B0411 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the factory settings have been confirmed (B0412). If there is no operation of the switches on the back of the gaming machine (such as the volume adjustment switch 335), the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, or the effect button 25 other than the setting confirmation operation, it can be determined that the factory settings have been confirmed. If the factory settings have not been confirmed (the result of B0412 is "N"), proceed to processing B0414. If the factory settings have been confirmed (the result of B0412 is "Y"), execute the factory setting process to make various settings and adjustments using the factory settings (B0413). The factory settings are the default settings stored in memory such as ROM 321. Next, the hall setting data (or hall adjustment data) such as volume and various brightness levels determined in B0406-B0410 and B0413 is written to backup memory (e.g., FeRAM 323) (B0414).

Next, the performance control device 300 performs a screen rendering end setting to end screen rendering on the display device 41 in the hall setting mode (B0415). Then, it clears the hall setting mode in progress flag (B0416).

If the hall setting mode start condition is not met (the result of B0403 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines whether the player setting mode start condition is met (B0417). It can be determined that the player setting mode start condition is met when, while waiting for customers or during play, the operation of the cross key switch 450 or effect button 25 to enter the player setting mode is detected as an operation signal in the effect button input process (B0010). Waiting for customers refers to, for example, a state in which a customer waiting video (customer waiting demo) is displayed on the display device 41. If the player setting mode start condition is not met (the result of B0417 is "N"), the hall/player setting mode process is terminated.

When the player setting mode start condition is met (the result of B0417 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 performs a screen drawing start setting to start screen drawing on the display device 41 in the player setting mode (B0418). Then, it sets the player setting mode in progress flag (B0419).

Next, the presentation control device 300 executes a player setting selection process (B0420) that allows the player to set parameters (volume, brightness, etc.) related to notifications in the presentation of the gaming machine and the presentation style. The player setting selection process allows the player to select and set a presentation style, including the stage (mode), music, background, character image, etc., based on the items specified and selected by the player through the selection screen (including the menu screen and setting screen, etc.) displayed on the display device 41.

The presentation control device 300 executes the variable presentation setting process (Figure 66) or round presentation setting process (B2105) to be started in the future according to the selected presentation style. Furthermore, without waiting for the start of the variable presentation setting process or round presentation setting process (i.e., without waiting for the next variable display game or the next jackpot round), immediately after the presentation style is selected, processing with the same content as the variable presentation setting process or round presentation setting process may be executed in the player setting selection process or subsequent presentation customization process (B0423), and presentation according to the selected presentation style may be executed immediately after selection.

For example, in the variable performance setting process (Fig. 66), the content of the variable performance (B2010) and the content of the performance (preview performance (for example, a showdown preview performance in which multiple identical characters appear, or a group preview)) (B2011) are set according to the performance style, and the display settings for the variable performance (B2013) and the display settings for the preview performance (B2014) are made according to the performance style. Furthermore, in the variable performance setting process (Fig. 66), an audio number (B2016) that determines the sound output mode and a decoration number (B2016) that determines the performance mode due to the light emitted by the decoration device are set according to the performance style.

Next, while the adjustment screen is displayed, the effect control device 300 executes a player volume adjustment process (B0421) that adjusts the volume of the upper speaker 10a and the lower speaker 10b, which serve as notification means capable of issuing notifications regarding effects, based on the player's operation of the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, or a player LED brightness adjustment process (B0422) that adjusts the brightness of the LED, which serves as notification means capable of issuing notifications regarding effects in the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, based on the player's operation of the cross key switch 450.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect customization process (B0423) to customize (individually set) the effects based on the player's operation of the cross key switch 450, effect buttons 25, etc. on the selection screen. It then determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been input (B0424). If a setting confirmation operation has not been input (the result of B0424 is "N"), the hall/player setting mode process ends. If a setting confirmation operation has been input (the result of B0424 is "Y"), a screen rendering end setting is performed to end screen rendering on the display device 41 in the player setting mode (B0425). The player setting mode in progress flag is then cleared (B0426). Note that the player setting data (or player adjustment data) determined in B0421-B0422, such as volume and brightness, may be lost and are therefore not written to backup memory.

In the above, once the hall setting mode or player setting mode has been entered, drawing update settings (such as updating highlighted items in the menu display) are performed by the effect button input process (B0010). The effect button input process (B0010) may also detect operation signals from the cross key switch 450, the volume adjustment button switches 451a and 451b, and the volume adjustment switch 335 on the back of the gaming machine, and perform processing corresponding to the operation signals.

The hall/player setting mode processing has been explained above, but the hall (hall staff, etc.) may prohibit selection of presentation styles including stage (mode), music, background, character images, etc. in the hall setting mode, thereby prohibiting selection by the player in the player setting mode. Furthermore, the hall may be able to freely select in the hall setting mode which of the selection styles (selectable items) of presentation styles such as stage (mode), music, background, and character images will be prohibited/selectable in the player setting mode. Furthermore, the hall (hall staff, etc.) may prohibit selection of only some of the selection styles in the player setting mode, and always allow players to select all other selection styles in the player setting mode.

Furthermore, in the player setting mode, the selection of the presentation style may be possible for each selection style. For example, the selection of the presentation style for the stage (mode) and the selection of the presentation style for the music may be possible separately. Conversely, once one presentation style is selected, all selectable selection styles corresponding to that presentation style may be set at once.

In addition, in the player setting mode, in addition to allowing the player to customize (select and set) the presentation style, the player may also be able to customize the appearance rate of the presentation (or the expected jackpot when it appears). For example, the appearance rate (or expected jackpot) of the presentation corresponding to the presentation style may be customizable.

The presentation style may be customizable differently during normal gameplay and specific gameplay states (during special chance mode (ST) and time-saving mode). Furthermore, the presentation style customization during normal gameplay may be carried over to the specific game mode, or may be customizable separately for each game mode.

In addition, when individually selecting and setting (customizing) presentation styles for the normal game state and specific game states (probability bonus state (ST), time-saving state), when the game state transitions in the order of normal game state → specific game state → normal game state, the presentation style for the current (present) normal game state may inherit the customization of the presentation style for the previous (past) normal game state. Alternatively, in this case, the customization of the presentation style during the specific game state may be re-selected in the current (present) specific game state each time the normal game state changes from the specific game state (the customization of the presentation style for the previous specific game state is not inherited). This is because there is a high possibility that the player will have changed from the previous specific game state in the current specific game state.

[Player Setting Mode]
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the display device 41 in the player setting mode.

When a player stops playing and is waiting for customers, and the customer waiting demo can be executed, if the player operates the effect button 25 or cross key switch 450 to enter player setting mode, the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) will display the menu screen 590 on the display device 41, as shown in Figure 70 (A).

The menu screen 590 displays various items that can be set or adjusted by the player in a menu format, including an "Introduction to the Machine" item display area 590a, an "Adjust Volume and Brightness" item display area 590b, an "Actual Machine Customization" item display area 590c, a "Beginner's Course" item display area 590d, and an "Game Log" item display area 590e.

The player can select items in order by operating the cross key switch 450 (selection operation). To encourage finger movement, an operation prompt image corresponding to the cross key switch 450 may be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Furthermore, by continuing to press the up key or down key, etc. during the selection operation, item selection can be performed in a loop. The selection of the specified item can be confirmed by performing a confirmation operation using the center or right key, etc. of the cross key switch 450. The item specified by the selection operation is displayed in a specific display mode (the mode surrounded by a thick line in Figure 70 (A)).

Figure 70 (a) shows the settings screen to which you are directed when the "Actual Machine Customization" item display area 590c is selected and confirmed. This settings screen displays a "YES" or "NO" item 591 for selecting whether or not to select (set) a presentation style, and an item 592 for selecting the presentation style to be executed.

Item 592 for selecting a presentation style displays a selection image and explanatory text (the name text) corresponding to each of five presentation styles, such as Anime 1 to 4 and Real 1.

For example, the selected image for Animation 1 displays a tiger character 702 (rival) wearing sunglasses, while the selected image for Animation 2 displays the main tiger character 701 and his companion tiger character 703, which are related to the model of gaming machine 10. Furthermore, the selected image for Animation 3 displays the main tiger character 701 alone, while the selected image for Animation 4 displays the companion tiger character 703 alone. The selected images for Animations 1-4 are non-realistic images (anime-style picture images, cartoon-style picture images, illustrated picture images). The selected image for Real 1 displays a real-life image (photographic image) 704 of the tiger that served as the motif (trigger, motivation) for the characters 701-703. These selected images may be displayed as moving images instead of still images.

In addition, the item specified by the selection operation is displayed in a specific display format (bold frame and bold text in Figure 70 (a)). In Figure 70 (a), for example, Animation 3 is selected as the presentation format.

Furthermore, in FIG. 70 (A), along with the "Back" display area 593, the setting screen displays the word "Confirm" in a display area 594 for confirming the selected item. When the "Back" display area 593 is selected, if a confirmation operation is performed with the cross key switch 450, the setting screen returns to the menu screen 590 without being confirmed. Also, when the "Confirm" display area 594 is selected, if a confirmation operation (setting confirmation operation) is performed with the cross key switch 450, the setting screen in (A) closes, the settings on the setting screen are confirmed, and the player setting mode screen closes (or the screen may transition to the menu screen 590).

Note that even when the effect button 25 or cross key switch 450 is operated during the first half of a variable display game in which a reach effect is not being executed, an item 592 for selecting an effect style such as Anime 1-4 or Real 1 may be displayed, allowing the user to select the effect style. In this case, the "YES" and "NO" items 591 may be omitted, as shown in (ki) and (ke) in Figure 72 (described below), to ensure a larger display area for the effects on the display screen. Furthermore, for example, Anime 2 may be set as the default effect style after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, after power recovery is restored, or after a RAM reset. Then, if the player does not select machine customization, Anime 2 may be selected as the default effect style, and an image of the corresponding character 701 and character 703 may be displayed. Even when Anime 2 is selected as the default effect style, multiple tiger protagonist characters 701 may be displayed in the showdown preview (described below).

In addition, an option for adjusting the frequency with which the image of the character (target image) corresponding to the selected presentation style is displayed (for example, the frequency of display timing, the number of simultaneous displays, and the occurrence frequency (occurrence cycle (number of recurrences))) may be displayed, allowing the player to adjust the display frequency. In this embodiment, the characters may also include a live-action image 704 of a tiger. By making the display frequency of the target image adjustable in this way, the target image can be displayed at an optimal frequency for each player, increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by determining a single character as the presentation style, a series of presentation contents (stage, music, background) corresponding to that character are also set as the presentation style. In this way, simply by determining the main selection item (character) as the presentation style, the other secondary selection items (stage, music, background) can be determined all at once without having to be set one by one. This makes it easy to switch to a unified presentation content, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that various images can be used as corresponding images for presentation styles such as Animation 1-4 and Real 1 (live-action images in the case of Real 1), as long as they are recognizable as related to the presentation style (such as images of specific characters). For example, for the Animation 3 presentation style corresponding to the main tiger character 701, the target image corresponding to that presentation style is an image that is recognizable as the main tiger character 701. Therefore, as long as it is recognizable as the character 701, a related image that differs in appearance from the character 701 displayed as the selected image in item 592 may be used (for example, a zoomed image of just the face, a selected image with body parts added, an image with a different expression or pose, or an image with a different outfit). Expectation levels may also be indicated by varying the appearance of the character 701 depending on the expected level of a jackpot, for example.

[SP2 Reach Development Pattern Screen Transition Example]
Next, referring to Figures 71 and 72, an example of screen transition when a variable display game (special chart variable display game, game) enters a reach effect and develops into an SP2 reach will be described.

Figure 71 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition when a reach effect develops into an SP2 reach during a variable display game. Also, Figure 72 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition when the game state transitions from a jackpot game to a time-saving state (specific game state, time-saving mode).

(A) in Figure 71 shows the display screen of the display device 41 before the variable display game (special chart variable display game, game) starts in normal game mode.

In the lower left corner of the display screen of the display device 41, an image (still or video) of the main character tiger character 701 corresponding to the animation 3 selected as the presentation style is displayed as the target image. The character 701 is displayed on the background layer, and is displayed behind (toward the back of the screen) the variable display area 610 and the start memory display area (first hold display area 630a, second hold display area 630b, hold consumption area 640) described below. Character images displayed on screens other than the selection screen where item 592 is displayed may be based on the same image data (stored in image ROM 325) as the selected image if they are the same as the selected image for item 592, or may be based on image data different from the selected image if they are displayed as the aforementioned related image with a different design, etc. from the character in the selected image. Note that even if the character image is the same image data as the selected image for item 592, it may be resized or transformed before display.

A number of variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C) are provided in the centre of the display screen of the display device 41. In the variable display areas 610, the left area 610A displays a decorative special pattern A (identification information, pattern), the right area 610B displays a decorative special pattern B, and the middle area 610C displays a decorative special pattern C, all enlarged and displayed as large symbols, with the symbol "612" displayed as a still image, for example.

In addition, a variable display area 615 is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, where the variable display game is played using decorative special symbols (small symbols). The small symbol in the variable display area 615 is displayed as a stopped symbol, such as "612." The results of the variable displays in the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 are consistent with each other. Furthermore, when the variable display game is being played, at least one of the variable display area 610 and the variable display area 615 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

In the upper right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, there is provided a special chart 1 reserved number display section 650 and a special chart 2 reserved number display section 660. The special chart 1 reserved number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reserved number display section 660 respectively display the number "3" indicating the number of special chart 1 reserved and the number "0" indicating the number of special chart 2 reserved.

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, a rectangular pending consumption area 640 (specific display area, changing pending display area), a first pending display area 630a, and a second pending display area 630b are provided as the start-up memory display area.

In the pending consumption area 640, as described below from (i) in Figure 71 onwards, pending changes displays are displayed as pending displays (start memory display, special chart pending change display, special chart pending consumption display) corresponding to the start memory for the variable display game currently being executed (being consumed).

The first hold display unit 630a also displays a hold display (start memory display) corresponding to the first start memory that has occurred, and for example, three hold displays including hold display 633a are displayed. The second hold display unit 630b can also display a hold display corresponding to the second start memory that has occurred.

When the variable display game starts, the three pending displays displayed in the first pending display section 630a move one by one to the right (pending shift), and one pending display 633a at the right end of the first pending display section 630a moves to the pending consumption area 640, and as shown in (i) of Figure 71, the pending display 633a is displayed within a square frame in the pending consumption area 640 as a variable pending display.

(i) in Figure 71 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game has started and normal variable display is being performed as the first half of the variable display.

When a change display game is executed in response to the change pending display 633a displayed in the pending consumption area 640 due to a pending shift, the decorative special symbols A to C (large symbols) are displayed in a normal change pattern ("↓↓↓") in the change display area 610 in the center of the display screen as the first half change. Similarly, the decorative reduced symbols (small symbols) are displayed in a normal change pattern ("↓↓↓") in the change display area 615 in the bottom right corner of the display screen.

In addition, the image of the character 701 continues to be displayed behind the variable display area 610. Therefore, the player can easily see the changing display of the decorative special symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 without the character 701 impairing visibility.

(c) in Figure 71 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when a preview effect (a showdown preview effect that previews a battle effect in the second half of the variation) occurs in the first half of the variation. This preview effect also notifies the player of the likelihood of a jackpot, and when it appears, the possibility of a jackpot increases.

When a showdown preview effect occurs during the first half of the variation, for example, a cartoon frame 761 having multiple frame frames 762 (frames) of different shapes is displayed on the display screen. The cartoon frame 761 is displayed in front of the variable display area 610 and the start memory display area (toward the front of the screen). Within the frame frame 762, the protagonist tiger character 701 and the rival tiger character 702 wearing sunglasses are each assigned and displayed facing each other (VS display). Note that the characters 701 and 702 may be displayed facing each other in a single frame frame 762 in a VS display. Furthermore, to make it easier to see that they are facing each other, letters such as "VS" may be displayed between the characters 701 and 702, or letters such as "showdown preview" may be displayed around them. The color, size, and shape of the letters such as "VS" and "showdown preview" may be changed depending on the likelihood of a jackpot or the likelihood of developing into a reach effect such as an SP2 reach effect or an SP3 reach effect. The cartoon frame 761 primarily displays an image (still or video) of the main character tiger character 701 that corresponds to the animation 3 selected as the presentation style, but if a style other than animation 3 is selected, the character that corresponds to the selected presentation style may be primarily displayed.

At that time, in one of the frame frames 762 assigned to the main character tiger character 701, an effect 711 is added around that character 701. Furthermore, within the same frame frame 762, the words "Tiger Power!" corresponding to the line spoken by that character 701 are displayed next to the effect 711. Additionally, the line may be output as audio from the upper speaker 19a or lower speaker 19b of the gaming machine 10. Note that the color, size, or shape of the effect 711 or the "Tiger Power!" text may be changed depending on the likelihood of a jackpot or the likelihood of developing into a reach effect such as an SP2 reach effect or an SP3 reach effect. The content of the line may also be changed depending on these expectations. For example, when the likelihood of a jackpot is high, the line may be changed from "Tiger Power" to "Tiger!"

Furthermore, inside the other frame 762 (bottom left), it is possible to display effects in which the main character tiger character 701 prepares for the showdown. For example, the movements of the preparation effects and the weapon held by the character 701 may be changed depending on the likelihood of a jackpot or the likelihood of the development into a reach effect such as an SP2 reach effect or an SP3 reach effect. For example, when the likelihood of a jackpot is high, the preparation movements may be repeated quickly multiple times, or effects may be added to the surroundings of the character 701, unlike when the likelihood of a jackpot is low. Furthermore, when the likelihood of a jackpot is high, the character may change from a sword to a spear, and effects may be added to the surroundings of the sword.

In addition, a total of four main character tiger characters 701 are displayed within these frame frames 762, and when combined with the background characters 701, a total of five characters 701 are displayed simultaneously on the display screen. The number of these characters 701 may be changed depending on the likelihood of a jackpot or the likelihood of developing into a reach effect such as an SP2 reach effect or an SP3 reach effect. For example, if the likelihood of a jackpot is high, the number of characters 701 may be increased compared to when the likelihood is low.

(e) in Figure 71 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the latter half of the variation causes a reach effect, which develops into an SP2 reach and a battle effect is executed.

When a transition to a reach effect such as SP2 reach occurs, for example, the decorative special symbol A in the left area 610A of the variable display area and the decorative special symbol B in the right area 610B are displayed small at the top of the screen. The decorative special symbols A and B undergo a fine swaying fluctuation and are maintained in a temporary stopped state (for example, temporary stopping at "4").

When the SP2 reach battle effect is executed, a battle effect is displayed in the center of the display screen, depicting a battle in which, for example, the protagonist tiger character 701 and the rival tiger character 702 wearing sunglasses, facing each other on the left and right, attack each other in close proximity.

The decorative special pattern C in the middle area 610C of the variable display area 610 does not temporarily stop but changes by scrolling, etc., but is translucent or transparent, so visibility is not impaired. Furthermore, good visibility can also be maintained by displaying the layer displaying the battle effects on a layer closer to the front (front side) than the layer displaying the variable display area 610, giving it priority.

(E) in Figure 71 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the main character, the tiger character 701, wins the battle effect of the SP2 reach effect and a battle victory effect (battle victory effect) is performed.

Then, as the battle performance progresses and the main character, the tiger character 701, wins the battle, the decorative special symbol C in the center area 610C of the variable display area 610 temporarily stops at the same symbol (for example, "4") as the decorative special symbols A and B. Therefore, by visually recognizing these numbers ("444"), the player can greatly increase their anticipation of hitting the jackpot.

In addition, as the decorative special symbols A to C temporarily stop, a battle victory effect (battle victory effect) is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the character 701 appears to have won the battle. Additionally, text such as "WIN" may be displayed on the display screen to make it clear that a victory has been achieved, and a voice or sound corresponding to a battle victory, such as "I won!", may be output from the upper speaker 19a or the lower speaker 19b.

Figure 71 (K) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game ends after the battle victory performance.

When the variable display game ends, the decorative special symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 and the decorative reduced symbols in the variable display area stop changing, and a jackpot symbol (or a small jackpot symbol), for example "444" is displayed large in the center of the display screen as a decorative stopped symbol. A fanfare effect is also performed to notify players that the result of the variable display game has been a special result (jackpot). Note that the start memory display area is hidden, but it may be displayed. When the start memory display area is displayed, the pending display 633a in the pending consumption area 640, which is a changing pending display, is hidden when the variable display game ends. After that, as shown in (ki) of Figure 72, the display screen transitions to a round effect.

(K) in Figure 72 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the first round is being played in a round game after a jackpot (ROUND 1).

When a round of play is played, an image of the main character, a tiger character 701, corresponding to animation 3, selected as the presentation style, is displayed in the center of the display screen of the display device 41.

Item 592, which allows the player to select a presentation style during a round of play, is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen. For example, if the player selects (specifies) Real 1, the Real 1 item is displayed in a specific display format (e.g., a bold frame and bold text). The player then performs a confirm operation (setting confirmation operation), which causes the presentation style during the round of play to become Real 1. When the selected image of item 592 is displayed on the display screen, all three images of character 701, including those displayed in the background, are displayed simultaneously. The selected image of item 592 is displayed on a layer closer to the front (front side) of the background display layer, and at least a portion of character 701 in the background display is hidden by the selected image of item 592. If the selection operation for the presentation style is not performed before the end of the first round, the presentation style currently selected (specific display format) is determined as the presentation style during the round of play. Furthermore, if the operation to determine the presentation style is not performed by the end of the first round, the presentation style at the time of transition to round play (the presentation style displayed in the background, for example, Anime 3) may be determined as the presentation style during round play. It is also possible to select a single piece of music as the presentation style. By selecting and determining a single piece of music as the presentation style in this way, a series of presentation contents (stage, background, character images) corresponding to that piece of music are also set as the presentation style. In this way, by simply determining the main selection item (music) as the presentation style, the other secondary selection items (stage, background, character images) can be determined all at once without having to be set one by one, making it easy to switch to presentation contents with a consistent feel, increasing the excitement of the game.

Figure 72 (k) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the second round is being played in a round game following a jackpot.

When Real 1 is selected as the presentation style during round play, a live-action image 704 (moving image) of a tiger is displayed on the background image when the game transitions to the second round. Thereafter, a background display and round presentation based on the live-action image 704 of the tiger are executed as the selected Real 1 presentation style, and upon completion of the final round (maximum number of rounds, e.g., 10 rounds), an ending presentation is executed. In this way, by increasing the appearance frequency (occurrence frequency, occurrence cycle (number of repeated occurrences)) of the live-action image 704 of the tiger as the target image corresponding to the selected Real 1 presentation style compared to images of other characters (such as character 701), or by extending the display time of the live-action image 704 of the tiger compared to images of other characters, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the presentation characteristics of the selected presentation style, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(K) in Figure 72 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the ending performance is being executed.

In the ending presentation, for example, a presentation corresponding to the live-action image 704 of the tiger in Real 1, which is selected as the presentation style, is executed.

In addition, an item 592 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen for selecting the presentation style during the time-saving state that is executed after the ending presentation. Item 592 displayed during the ending presentation displays selection images corresponding to presentation styles, such as Anime 1-4 and Real 1, while the explanatory text explaining these presentation styles is hidden. By displaying only the selection images for the presentation styles in this way, a wider display area for the presentation on the display screen can be secured, making it easier to create effective presentations, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, because item 592 is displayed once at the start of a round of play, the presentation is easy for players to understand even when the explanatory text is hidden.

For example, when the player selects (specifies) the selected image of the tiger companion character 703 (animation 4), the selected image is displayed in a specific display mode (for example, a thick frame). Then, when the player performs a confirm operation, the presentation style for the subsequent time-saving state becomes animation 4. Also, when the selected image for item 592 is displayed on the display screen, a total of two images of character 701 are displayed simultaneously.

Figure 72 (k) shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the time-saving mode is initiated.

The variable display area 610 and variable display area 615 on the display screen display the stopped symbol "444" from the previous variable display game. The display screen also displays, for example, "Time-saving mode," indicating that the game is in a time-saving state (specific game state, time-saving mode). The second reserve display unit 630b displays one reserve display, including reserve display 633b. In a time-saving state in which the start memory corresponding to the main variable display game becomes the second start memory, the reserve display in the first reserve display unit 630a may be hidden. Meanwhile, the special chart 1 reserve number display unit 650 remains hidden, and displays the number "2" indicating the special chart 1 reserve number. Furthermore, the special chart 2 reserve number display unit 660 displays the number "1" indicating the special chart 2 reserve number.

In addition, an image (still image or video) of the companion tiger character 703 corresponding to Animation 4, selected as the presentation style, is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. This character 703 is displayed on the background layer, and is displayed behind (towards the back of the screen) the variable display area 610 and the starting memory display area.

(Sa) in Figure 72 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when a variable display game is being played in the time-saving mode.

When a change display game is executed in response to the change pending display 633b displayed in the pending consumption area 640 due to a pending shift, the decorative special symbols A to C (large symbols) are displayed in a normal change pattern ("↓↓↓") in the change display area 610 in the center of the display screen as the first half change. Similarly, the decorative reduced symbols (small symbols) are displayed in a normal change pattern ("↓↓↓") in the change display area 615 in the bottom right corner of the display screen.

The image of character 703 continues to be displayed behind variable display area 610. Therefore, even in the time-saving mode, character 703 does not impair visibility, and the player can easily see how the decorative special symbols A to C are displayed in the variable display area 610. In this way, by increasing the appearance frequency (occurrence frequency, occurrence cycle (number of recurrences)) of companion tiger character 703 as the target image corresponding to the selected animation 4 presentation style compared to the images of other characters (character 701, etc.), or by extending the display time of character 703 compared to the images of other characters, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the presentation characteristics of the selected presentation style, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(c) in Figure 72 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when a preview effect (showdown preview effect) occurs in the first half of the variation.

When a showdown preview effect occurs during the first half variation, for example, a cartoon frame 761 having multiple frame frames 762 of different shapes is displayed on the display screen. Here, if animation 4 is selected as the effect style, in addition to the main tiger character 701 and the sunglasses-wearing rival tiger character 702, a companion tiger character 703 is also displayed within the frame frame 762. For example, the companion tiger character 703 is displayed within the same frame frame 762 as the main tiger character 701, as if cheering on the main tiger character 701. At this time, effects 711 may be added around the main tiger character 701 and the companion tiger character 703, and the words "Friendship Power!" corresponding to the line spoken by the companion tiger character 703 may be displayed. In addition, the line may be output as audio from the upper speaker 19a or lower speaker 19b of the gaming machine 10.

In addition, within these frame frames 762, a total of three main character tiger characters 701 and three companion tiger characters 703 are displayed. Together with one character displayed in the background, a total of four characters 703 are displayed simultaneously on the display screen. The number of these characters 701 and 703 may be changed depending on the likelihood of a jackpot or the likelihood of developing into a reach effect. Additionally, the content of the dialogue, the color and size of the text, the color and shape of the effect 711, the movements of the characters 701-703, the weapons they are holding, etc. may be changed depending on the likelihood of a jackpot, etc. After that, the variable display game transitions to the latter half of the variable display, and reach effects, etc. are performed as appropriate.

[SP2 Reach Development Pattern Timing Chart]
Next, referring to Figures 73 and 74, a timing chart will be described for when the variable display game (special variable display game, game) becomes a reach effect and develops into SP2 reach. Note that the screen transition diagrams (a) to (f) in Figures 73 and 74 correspond to the screen transition diagrams (a) to (f) in Figures 71 and 72, and in the following explanation, the above-mentioned explanations in Figures 71 and 72 will be omitted as appropriate.

Figure 73 is a timing chart showing when a preview effect (showdown preview effect) occurs in the first half of a variable display game, and Figure 74 is a timing chart showing when a reach effect occurs in the second half of the game and develops into an SP2 reach. Note that the timing chart shows the flow of time horizontally (to the right), with the screen transitions indicated by the dashed arrows corresponding to (A) to (K).

As shown in Figure 73 (a), before the variable display game begins, the symbols (identification information, decorative special symbols A-C, decorative special symbols) are frozen, and the main character tiger character 701 (selected character) corresponding to Animation 3 selected as the presentation style is displayed alone in the background. Furthermore, the total number of characters displayed on the display screen is one (one character displayed in the background). Furthermore, music A corresponding to Animation 3 selected as the presentation style is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b. The decorative lamps (LEDs of the board decoration device 46) emit weak light. The LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 can also emit light in a similar manner. Furthermore, for example, when Animation 1 is selected as the presentation style, some of the illuminating decorative lamps may be turned off, or may emit light in a color different from the normal (white) color, such as purple or blue, or in a color different from when Animation 3 is selected as the presentation style (for example, a color based on red), or a song other than Music A may be played. In this way, the lighting and sound modes can be varied depending on the presentation style.

After that, when the variable display game is played as shown in Figure 73 (i), the symbols begin to change (variable display). Furthermore, the selected character (character 701) remains displayed as a single character in the background, and the total number of characters on the display screen remains at one. Furthermore, music A, which corresponds to animation style 3, and the weak illumination of the decorative lamps are also maintained.

When the preview performance (showdown preview performance) occurs in (c) of Figure 73, the image remains variable, and a cartoon frame 761 having multiple frame borders 762 (frames) is displayed on the front layer. Then, of the selected characters (characters 701) displayed on the display screen, four are displayed in the foreground and one in the background, for a total of five. Furthermore, the total number of characters displayed on the display screen is six (five in the foreground, one in the background). While playback of song A, which corresponds to performance style 3, continues, the intensity of the decorative lamp increases from weak to medium light, enhancing the performance effect of the showdown preview performance.

Next, as shown in (e) of Figure 74, when the latter half of the change progresses to SP2 Reach and a battle effect is executed, the symbols are displayed in a Reach state. The background display of the selected character (character 701) disappears, and only one character related to the battle effect is displayed in the foreground. The total number of characters displayed on the display screen becomes two (two characters displayed in the foreground). The music changes to music B corresponding to the battle effect, and the light intensity of the decorative lamp increases from medium to strong, enhancing the effect of the battle effect.

As shown in (E) of Figure 74, when a battle victory effect (battle victory effect) is performed after a battle effect, the symbols temporarily stop at the jackpot symbol (special result pattern, for example, "444"). In addition, one selected character (character 701) is displayed in the foreground, and the total number of characters displayed on the display screen becomes one (one displayed in the foreground). The music remains as music B corresponding to the battle effect, and the decorative lamp also remains brightly lit. Note that although music B is maintained in (E) of Figure 74 and (F) described below, it may be changed to another music corresponding to a battle victory or another music corresponding to a fanfare effect.

As shown in Figure 74 (a), when the variable display game ends after the battle victory effect, the symbols stop changing at the jackpot symbol ("444"). Additionally, the selected character (character 701) becomes invisible (0 characters displayed), and the number of all characters displayed on the display screen also becomes 0 (no characters displayed). Music B, which corresponds to the battle effect, remains the same, and the decorative lamps begin to flash, enhancing the effect of the fanfare effect.

[Timing chart of variable display game in time-saving mode]
Next, referring to Figure 75, we will explain the timing chart when a variable display game (special variable display game, game) is played in the time-saving state. Note that the screen transition diagrams (ko) to (shi) in Figure 75 correspond to the screen transition diagrams (ko) to (shi) in Figure 72.

Figure 75 is a timing chart showing when a preview effect (showdown preview effect) occurs during the first half of a variable display game in the time-saving mode. The timing chart shows the flow of time horizontally (to the right), with the screen transitions indicated by the dashed arrows corresponding to (ko) to (shi).

As shown in (ko) of Figure 75, before the variable display game starts in the time-saving state, the symbols (identification information, decorative special symbols A to C) are stopped, and one tiger companion character 703 (selected character) corresponding to animation 4 selected as the presentation style is displayed in the background. Furthermore, the total number of characters displayed on the display screen is one (one character displayed in the background). Furthermore, music C corresponding to animation 4 selected as the presentation style is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b, and the decorative lamp (LED of the board decoration device 46) emits a weak light.

After that, when the variable display game is played in the time-saving state as shown in (sa) of Figure 75, the symbols begin to change (variable display). Also, the selected character (character 703) remains displayed as a single character in the background, and the total number of characters on the display screen remains at one. Also, music C, which corresponds to animation style 4, and the weak illumination of the decorative lamps are maintained.

When a preview effect (showdown preview effect) occurs in the time-saving state as shown in (shi) of Figure 75, the image remains variable, and a cartoon frame 761 having multiple frame borders 762 (frames) is displayed on the front layer. Of the selected characters (characters 703) displayed on the display screen, three are displayed in the foreground and one in the background, for a total of four. The total number of characters displayed on the display screen is eight (seven in the foreground, one in the background). While playback of music C, which corresponds to animation style 4, continues, the decorative lamp's light intensity increases from weak to medium, enhancing the effect of the showdown preview effect.

In addition, in response to the appearance of the main tiger character 701, the music may be temporarily switched to music A corresponding to the presentation style (animation 3) of that character 701. Similarly, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be set to a lighting mode corresponding to the presentation style of animation 3 (for example, a lighting color based on red) and switched to a lighting mode corresponding to the presentation style of animation 3. Furthermore, if the lighting mode is switched to a lighting mode corresponding to the presentation style of animation 3 and a presentation by the main tiger character 701 is performed while music C corresponding to animation 4 is being played, the expected jackpot probability, etc. may be announced by the lighting mode of the main tiger character 701 rather than the lighting mode of the companion tiger character 703. Therefore, when presentations by characters 701 and 703 are simultaneously performed, the player needs to recognize that the lighting mode by character 701 is announcing the expected jackpot probability, which is advantageous for players with extensive gaming experience with gaming machine 10 and can improve the operation of gaming machine 10.

[Modified example of screen transition when a notice effect occurs in the first half of the variable display game]
Next, referring to Figure 76, we will explain a modified example of screen transition when a preview effect (showdown preview effect) occurs in the first half of a variable display game (special chart variable display game, game).

Figure 76 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order, and is a modified example of the screen transition when a preview effect occurs in the first half of the variable display game.

After the variable display shown in (i) of Figure 71 is performed, a showdown preview effect may be performed using multiple cut-ins, as shown in (u2) to (u4) of Figure 76 (continuous cut-in preview effect).

(U2) in Figure 76 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the first series of cut-ins (first showdown preview) is performed.

When the first series of cut-ins predicting a showdown is performed, for example, the main character tiger character 701 is displayed as a cut-in (first series) in the bottom left of the display screen. In the cut-in display, the character 701, which is displayed as a separate image, is inserted onto the display screen, cutting in on top of the image that has been displayed up until now. For example, an effect 711 is added around the character 701 displayed in the cut-in, and the words "Tiger Power!" corresponding to the line spoken by that character 701 are displayed. Additionally, the sound of the line may be output from the upper speaker 19a or lower speaker 19b of the gaming machine 10.

In the cut-in display, the image of the main character, the tiger character 701, corresponding to the animation 3 selected as the presentation style is primarily displayed, but if an animation other than animation 3 is selected, the character corresponding to the selected presentation style can be primarily displayed.

In addition, on a layer behind (rear to) the cut-in display, the protagonist tiger character 701 and a rival tiger character 702 wearing sunglasses are displayed facing each other (VS display), with text such as "showdown preview" displayed around them. The color and pattern of the frame 721 (edge of the display screen) of the showdown preview effect may be changed depending on the likelihood of the variable display game resulting in a jackpot or the likelihood of the game developing into a reach effect. The color and size of the display area of the cut-in display may also be changed depending on the likelihood of a jackpot, and the content of the dialogue within the cut-in display and the color of the effect 711 may also be changed. In Figure 76, the display area of the cut-in display is a rectangular area bordering the edge of the display screen, but it may also be an area of a specified shape (e.g., rectangular or round) in the center of the display screen.

Also, by displaying the first series of cut-ins in this way, two of the main character's tiger characters 701 are displayed on the display screen, and together with character 702, a total of three characters are displayed on the display screen.

(U3) in Figure 76 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the second consecutive cut-in (second time) showdown preview is performed.

When the second cut-in preview of the showdown is performed, for example, the main character tiger character 701 is displayed in a second cut-in display in the upper left of the display screen. Therefore, two cut-ins are displayed on the display screen. Around the character 701 displayed in the second cut-in display, for example, the words "Let's go!" corresponding to the character's lines are displayed.

Furthermore, when the second cut-in display is displayed, three of the main character's tiger characters 701 are displayed on the display screen, and together with character 702, a total of four characters are displayed on the display screen.

(U4) in Figure 76 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the second (third) cut-in preview of the showdown is performed.

When the third cut-in preview of the showdown is performed, for example, the main character tiger character 701 is displayed in a cut-in (third time) in the bottom right of the display screen. Therefore, three cut-ins are displayed on the display screen. Around the character 701 displayed in the third cut-in, for example, the words "Go!" corresponding to the line spoken by that character are displayed.

When the third cut-in display is displayed, four of the main character's tiger characters 701 are displayed on the display screen, and together with character 702, a total of five characters are displayed on the display screen. After that, as shown in (e) of Figure 71, the latter half of the variable display game can progress to a reach effect such as SP2 reach.

[Display screen layer]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the layers of the display screen will be described.

Figure 77 is a diagram explaining the layers of the display screen of the display device 41, and shows the display screen of (U4) in Figure 76 divided into layers. Specifically, the upper diagram in Figure 77 is the display screen of (U4) in Figure 76, and the lower diagram shows that display screen divided into layers. Note that while the layers of the display screen of (U4) in Figure 76 are explained, the same applies to the layers of the display screens of (U) in Figure 71 and (L) in Figure 72. Note that the performance control device 300 can composite (overlap) multiple layers and display them on the display screen of the display device 41 (B0017, B0020, etc.).

As shown in the lower diagram of Figure 77, the display screen can be displayed in a four-layer configuration, with the first layer at the forefront and the fourth layer at the back. Objects (targets) such as images, variable display areas, and start-up memory display areas are then individually set to which layer (layers 1-4) they will be displayed on. The number of layers is not limited to a four-layer configuration, and can be multiple layers other than four (two or more). It is also possible not to configure layers (i.e., one layer), but to determine the display order (display priority order) of each object and display each object separately.

For example, the first layer at the forefront displays the variable display area 615, special symbol 1 reserved number display section 650, and special symbol 2 reserved number display section 660, and these displays are displayed on the front layer (e.g., the forefront layer) with priority over cut-in displays, etc. By adopting this configuration, it becomes easier for players to see the small symbols in the variable display area 615, which are always displayed, making it easier for them to understand whether a variable display game is being played or not. In addition, because the number of reserved symbols for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are always displayed, it becomes easier for players to check how many start memories have been accumulated, making it easier for players to launch game balls at the timing they intend when stopping shots, etc.

Next, a showdown preview is displayed on the second layer, which is one layer behind the first layer. Within the second layer, cut-in displays are given priority over the VS display of characters 701 and 702. In this way, the display order of objects within the same layer can be set. Note that for the display screens in Figure 71 (U) and Figure 72 (L), a showdown preview using a cartoon frame 761 is displayed on the second layer.

The second layer may be further divided into multiple layers (e.g., layer 2A (foreground) to layer 2D (background)). For example, the third cut-in display may be displayed on the foreground layer 2A, the second cut-in display on the background layer 2B, the first cut-in display on the background layer 2C, and the VS display on the background layer 2D. By dividing the layers on which each object is displayed in this way, the display order can also be determined. Cut-in displays may also be displayed overlapping each other (e.g., the second and third cut-in displays may be displayed overlapping each other on top of (in front of) the first cut-in display), or may be displayed overlapping part or all of, for example, character 701 displayed within the cut-in display. In this case, by displaying another cut-in display on top of character 701, the visibility of character 701 may be reduced (or made invisible), but character 701 can continue to be displayed. Furthermore, the cut-in display displayed on top (later cut-in display) may be displayed larger (the display area may be larger) than the cut-in display displayed below (earlier cut-in display), and the size of the character 701 in the later cut-in display may be increased. The color of the frame, text, effect, etc. of the later cut-in display may be a color that suggests higher expectations than those of the earlier cut-in display (for example, red, gold, or rainbow). By displaying the later cut-in display, etc. larger in this way, or displaying displays related to the later cut-in display in a color that suggests higher expectations, it becomes easier to enhance the presentation effect that stirs up the player's anticipation for a jackpot, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Next, the variable display area 610 is displayed on the third layer, which is one layer behind the second layer. Therefore, when the showdown preview effect is displayed on the second layer, the decorative special symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 on the third layer behind it overlap with the showdown preview effect and become difficult to see. By adopting this configuration, the showdown preview effect can be made easier for players to see, enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, even if the visibility of the variable display area 610 becomes poor, the small symbols in the variable display area 615 on the first layer are always displayed, so the player can confirm that the variable display game is being played and can play with peace of mind.

In addition, the fourth layer (background layer), which is the backmost layer, displays the main character tiger character 701 and a frame 721 as background display. The background display character 701 is the target image corresponding to the presentation style of animation 3 that was visible before the preview presentation occurred (see (a) and (b) in Figure 71). By displaying the background display character 701 and frame 721 in this way, it is possible to create a background atmosphere that corresponds to the selected presentation style without impairing the visibility of other objects, and to provide the player with a highly empathetic gameplay that is in line with the theme of the presentation style. Note that the number of characters 701 (four) displayed in the second layer, which is in front of the third layer (design layer), is equal to or greater than the number of characters 701 (one) displayed in the fourth layer (background layer), which is behind the third layer. Therefore, more characters 701 are displayed in the front layers, which are displayed preferentially, making them more likely to catch the player's eye.

[Actions and Effects of Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes a presentation control means (presentation control device 300) capable of controlling presentations (e.g., preview presentations (showdown preview presentations)) related to the game (variable display game, special chart variable display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a selection means (e.g., a cross key switch 450 or an item 592) that allows a player to select a presentation style (characters, music, mode, background, etc., such as Anime 1 to 4 or Real 1) through operation by the player. The presentation control means is capable of displaying at least one target image (character image) corresponding to each presentation style on the display means. In a first presentation style (e.g., Anime 3), a first target image (e.g., the main character tiger character 701) corresponding to the first presentation style appears more frequently than a second target image (e.g., the companion tiger character 703 or the live-action tiger image 704) corresponding to a second presentation style (e.g., Anime 4 or Real 1). Furthermore, in the second presentation style, the second target image corresponding to the second presentation style appears more frequently than the first target image corresponding to the first presentation style, and when multiple first target images are displayed on the display means (display screen of the display device 41), the number of first target images displayed on a specific layer (e.g., the second layer) that is in front (on the front side) of a specified layer (e.g., the fourth layer (background layer)) is greater than the number of first target images displayed on the specified (back side) layer.

With this type of gaming machine 10, the frequency with which target images corresponding to each presentation style appear increases in each presentation style, making it easier for players to understand which presentation style is currently selected, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, regardless of the presentation style, multiple target images (first target images) corresponding to the first presentation style can appear as an indication of the game outcome, reflecting, for example, the likelihood of a jackpot, and other information about the game, such as the likelihood of a jackpot, can also be presented. In this way, regardless of the currently selected presentation style, the appearance of multiple characters in the first presentation style makes it easier for players to recognize, for example, that the likelihood of a jackpot is high, resulting in a game that is easy to understand. Furthermore, by increasing the number of first target images corresponding to the first presentation style displayed on a layer closer to the player, it becomes easier to prioritize the display without being obscured by other presentation styles or designs, making it easier for players to recognize that a character in the first presentation style has appeared.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can simultaneously display multiple first target images (e.g., the main character tiger character 701) on the display means (display screen of the display device 41), and can display multiple first target images both when the first presentation style (e.g., animation 3) is selected and when the second presentation style (e.g., animation 4, real 1) is selected. With this type of gaming machine 10, the appearance frequency of character images in the first presentation style increases regardless of the currently selected presentation style, so it is possible to notify the player of information about the game, such as the likelihood of a jackpot, using characters in the first presentation style, thereby increasing the player's anticipation for a jackpot.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, a selection means (such as the cross key switch 450 or item 592) is used to set a first presentation style (e.g., Anime 3) corresponding to a selected image (e.g., the tiger protagonist 701) from among multiple images (the five selection images in item 592) displayed on the display means (the display screen of the display device 41). The first target image corresponding to the first presentation style includes the selected selected image or a related image (e.g., an image recognizable as the tiger protagonist 701) that represents the same object as the selected image. With this gaming machine 10, the first presentation style is set simply by selecting an image, and the presentation style can also be switched simultaneously with a music piece (music A) or background related to the selected image. This allows for easy selection and switching of highly themed presentations corresponding to presentation styles, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, related images with different designs, etc., from the selected image used to select the first presentation style can also be used as the first target image if they represent the same object as the selected image, thereby broadening the scope of presentation and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is also equipped with a light-emitting means (decorative lamp (LED of the board decoration device 46)) capable of emitting light (or a sound output means (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) capable of outputting sound). The presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can vary the light-emitting mode (or sound mode) for each presentation style, and during the period (showdown preview presentation) when multiple first target images (e.g., the main character tiger character 701) are displayed, the same light-emitting mode (or sound mode) is used for both the first presentation style (e.g., animation 3) and the second presentation style (e.g., animation 4). According to this gaming machine 10, the light-emitting mode (light color, lighting/flashing mode) and sound (music) can be varied for each presentation style, enhancing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, during the period when multiple first target images corresponding to the first presentation style appear, the same light-emitting mode and sound mode are used for both the first and second presentation styles. This allows for the creation of highly themed presentations corresponding to the first target images, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment is equipped with a light-emitting means capable of emitting light (decorative lamp (LED of the board decoration device 46)) (or a sound output means capable of outputting sound (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b)). The presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can vary the light-emitting mode (or sound mode) for each presentation style, and during the period (showdown preview presentation) when multiple first target images (e.g., the main character tiger character 701) are displayed, the light-emitting mode (or sound mode) is varied between the first presentation style (e.g., animation 3) and the second presentation style (e.g., animation 4). According to such a gaming machine 10, the light-emitting mode (light color, lighting/flashing mode) and sound (music) can be varied for each presentation style, thereby increasing the excitement of the game. Additionally, during the period when multiple first target images corresponding to the first presentation style appear, the lighting and sound patterns differ between the first and second presentation styles, making it easy for players to understand which presentation style has been selected and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the number of first target images (main character tiger character 701) displayed in the layer (second layer) in front of the predetermined layer (third layer, design layer) is equal to or greater than the number of first target images displayed in the layer (fourth layer, background layer) behind the predetermined layer. With this gaming machine 10, more first target images are displayed in the front layer, which is preferentially displayed, making them more likely to catch the player's eye, thereby enhancing the presentation effect and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, when power is restored after a power outage in the first presentation style (e.g., Animation 3) or the second presentation style (e.g., Animation 4, Real 1), the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) sets the presentation style to the third presentation style (default presentation style, e.g., Animation 2), and is able to display multiple first target images (e.g., the main character, a tiger character 701) in the third presentation style. With this gaming machine 10, even in the default third presentation style, multiple first target images corresponding to the first presentation style can appear to perform a preview presentation, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the preview presentation and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment also includes sound output means (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b) capable of outputting sound. The presentation control means (presentation control device 300) causes the sound output means to output the same sound (e.g., song A) when multiple first target images (e.g., the main character tiger character 701) are displayed in any presentation style. This gaming machine 10 allows for highly themed presentations corresponding to the first target images, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can output sound or light corresponding to each presentation style from the output means (sound output means (upper speaker 19a or lower speaker) or light-emitting means (decorative lamp (LED of board decoration device 46))). When both a first target image (e.g., the main character tiger character 701, the character 701 in the first cut-in display (the character in the earlier cut-in display)) and a second target image (e.g., the companion tiger character 703, the character 701 in the second cut-in display (the character in the later cut-in display)) are displayed on the display means (the display screen of the display device 41), the output means sets an output mode (sound mode or light-emitting mode) corresponding to (compatible with) either the first or second target image. This gaming machine 10 can similarly produce highly themed presentations corresponding to either the first or second target image, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment is equipped with a light-emitting device (decorative lamp (LED of the board decoration device 46)) capable of emitting light and a sound output device (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker) capable of outputting sound. The effect control device (effect control device 300) notifies the player of the likelihood of entering a special game state (jackpot state) advantageous to the player through an effect that corresponds to (matches) either light or sound (for example, an effect that corresponds to light (e.g., the red-based light color of animation 3) notifies the likelihood of a jackpot). With this gaming machine 10, when multiple effects are performed simultaneously, the true likelihood of a jackpot is notified by an effect that corresponds to (matches) either light or sound, so the player needs to recognize which effect is indicating the likelihood of a jackpot. This is advantageous for players with extensive gaming experience on the gaming machine, thereby improving the operation of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment also includes an adjustment means (customization means = menu screen display + operation means) for adjusting the frequency at which multiple first target images (e.g., the main character tiger character 701) are displayed for each presentation style. This gaming machine 10 allows for the display frequency of multiple first target images that appear in each presentation style to be adjusted, so that first target images are displayed at an optimal frequency for each player, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can select a presentation style (characters such as Anime 1-4 and Real 1, music, mode, background) for the normal gaming state, and can select a presentation style different from that selected for the normal gaming state for a specific gaming state (probability bonus state (ST), time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. When the gaming state transitions from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state, the presentation style of the normal gaming state selected before the specific gaming state is inherited as the presentation style for the normal gaming state, and when the gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to a specific gaming state, the presentation style of the specific gaming state selected before the normal gaming state is not inherited as the presentation style for the specific gaming state. With this type of gaming machine 10, the previous customization of the presentation style can be carried over when transitioning from a specific gaming state, in which the player is unlikely to change, to a normal gaming state, while the previous customization of the presentation style is not carried over when transitioning from a normal gaming state, in which the player is likely to change, to a specific gaming state, thereby reducing the player's sense of discomfort.

[Third embodiment]
The third embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 78 to 83. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first and second embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first and second embodiments, and redundant descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The third embodiment relates to the selection of a presentation style and the presentation when the selected presentation style is switched to another presentation style.

[Player Setting Mode]
First, the player setting mode of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 78. Fig. 78 is a diagram illustrating the display screen of the display device 41 in the player setting mode of the third embodiment.

In the player setting mode of the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, when a player stops playing and is waiting for customers, allowing the customer waiting demo to be executed, and the player operates the effect button 25 or cross key switch 450 to enter the player setting mode, the hall/player setting mode process (B0011) displays a menu screen 590 on the display device 41, as shown in (A) of Figure 78. Note that (A) of Figure 78 is the same as (A) of Figure 70. The effect button 25, cross key switch 450, display device 41, and the effect control device 300 that controls them constitute a customization means that allows the effect style in the player setting mode, described below, to be customized (selectable, settable).

On the menu screen 590, an item display area 590a for "Machine Introduction," an item display area 590b for "Volume/Brightness Adjustment," an item display area 590c for "Machine Customization," an item display area 590d for "Beginner's Course," and an item display area 590e for "Game Log" are displayed in menu format, and can be set or adjusted by the player. Items specified by the player through selection operations using the cross key switch 450 are displayed in a specific display mode (the mode framed in a thick line in Figure 78 (A)).

Figure 78 (a) shows the settings screen to which you are directed when the "Machine Customization" item display area 590c is selected and confirmed. This settings screen displays a "YES" or "NO" item 591 for selecting whether or not to select (set) a presentation style, and items 595 and 596 for selecting the presentation style to be executed depending on the game status.

Item 595 displays the game state (normal game state, special game state, time-limited game state) for which the presentation style can be selected. In (i) of Figure 78, for example, the normal game state is selected.

Item 596 also displays explanatory text (the name of the item) corresponding to each of the presentation styles, such as normal mode, simple mode, premium mode, suggestion mode, Torataro waiting mode, ToraMi waiting mode, and high-reliability predictive mode. A selection image (still image or video) representing each presentation style may be displayed along with the explanatory text. The item specified by the selection operation is displayed in a specific display mode (the bold frame mode in (a) of Figure 78).

For example, in item 596, normal mode is a common presentation style and is the presentation style used by default. Simple mode is a presentation style that simplifies the presentation, and premium mode is a presentation style that makes it easier to execute premium (highly rare) presentations.

Suggestion mode is a presentation style that, when a start memory occurs, can suggest in advance the likelihood that the variable display game based on that start memory will result in a jackpot (special result).

The Torataro waiting mode is a presentation style in which, when Torataro appears as the main tiger character 701 (see, for example, Figure 70) of the gaming machine 10 model, the expectation of the variable display game based on that start memory winning a jackpot (special result) increases, while the Toragami waiting mode is a presentation style in which, when a female tiger character (Toragami) different from character 701 appears, the expectation of the variable display game based on that start memory winning a jackpot (special result) increases. On the other hand, for example, in modes other than the waiting modes for specific characters (Torataro waiting mode, Toragami waiting mode) (normal mode, simple mode, premium mode, suggestion mode, predictive high reliability mode), a variety of characters appear in a balanced manner.

Prediction high reliability mode (prediction chance mode) is a presentation style in which the prediction preview performance is more likely to be performed in the event of a jackpot, but less likely to be performed in the event of a miss.

Furthermore, in (A) of Figure 78, in addition to the "Back" display area 593 and the "Confirm" display area 594, a "Custom Reset" display area 597 is displayed, which resets the selected (customized) presentation style. If the "Back" display area 593 is selected and a confirmation operation is performed using the cross key switch 450, the settings are not confirmed and the screen returns to the menu screen 590. Also, if the "Confirm" display area 594 is selected and a confirmation operation (setting confirmation operation) is performed, the settings screen in (A) closes, the settings on the settings screen are confirmed, and the player setting mode screen closes (or the screen may transition to the menu screen 590). If the "Custom Reset" display area 597 is selected and a confirmation operation (custom reset operation) is performed, the presentation style selection item is reset to the initial state (return). In the initial state, for example, normal mode is selected as the presentation style in each game state (normal game state, probability variable game state, time-limited game state).

In addition, while the presentation style selection items are reset (returned) to their initial state, the volume and brightness are not reset and remain unchanged even when a custom reset operation is performed. Therefore, for players who continue to play by changing presentation styles, the volume and brightness they adjusted themselves are maintained without being reset, which reduces the sense of discomfort.

When the game transitions to the customer waiting state and, for example, the customer waiting demo screen ends (one cycle), the volume and brightness may be reset along with the presentation style (custom all reset). Also, while the customer waiting demo screen is displayed, a menu may be displayed to prompt whether or not to perform a custom reset or custom all reset. Furthermore, while the customer waiting demo screen is displayed, the currently selected presentation style may be displayed (custom display).

In this way, by selecting items 595 and 596, the player can select the presentation style for each game state. For example, in (a) of Figure 78, normal mode is selected as the presentation style for the regular game state. Note that to indicate the presentation style selected for the special probability game state or the time-limited game state, small letters such as "normal," "simple," or "premium" may be displayed around the "special probability game" or "time-limited" in item 595. Furthermore, instead of displaying these letters, the color of the letters and frame for "special probability game" or "time-limited" in item 595 may be changed depending on the presentation style that is set (for example, rainbow-colored letters and frame in "premium mode").

[SP2 Reach Development Pattern Screen Transition Example]
Next, referring to Figure 79, an example of screen transition when the variable display game (special chart variable display game, game) of the third embodiment enters a reach effect and develops into an SP2 reach will be described.
Details will be explained below.

Figure 79 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 of the third embodiment in chronological order, and is an example of a screen transition when a reach effect develops into an SP2 reach during a variable display game.

(Ta) in Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 before the variable display game (special chart variable display game, game) starts in normal game mode.

In normal mode, which is the selected presentation style, an image (still or video) of the main character, a tiger character 701, is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen of the display device 41 by lottery during the variable presentation setting process (Figure 66). The character 701 is displayed on the background layer, and is displayed behind (towards the back of the screen) the variable display area 610 and the starting memory display area (first hold display area 630a, second hold display area 630b, hold consumption area 640).

In addition, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the display device 41, a presentation style indicator 731 indicating that normal mode has been selected, and an operation prompt image 732 depicting the cross key switch 450 are displayed. The operation prompt image 732 suggests that the presentation style can be changed by operating the cross key switch 450, and can prompt a player who wants to change the presentation style to operate the cross key switch 450. For example, the operation prompt image 732 may display the key (button, e.g., the left and right keys) that switches the presentation style in a conspicuous color (e.g., red). Furthermore, the color of the corresponding key may change (e.g., from white to blue) in response to the player pressing the cross key switch 450.

The display screen of the display device 41, similar to (a) in Figure 71, is provided with multiple variable display areas 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, center area 610C), variable display area 615, and start memory display area (reserved consumption area 640, first reserved display section 630a, second reserved display section 630b). For example, decorative special patterns A to C (identification information, pattern) in variable display area 610 and the small pattern in variable display area 615 are displayed as a frozen pattern, such as "612." Three reserved displays, reserved displays 633a to 633c, are displayed on the first reserved display section 630a. Also, on the display screen, the number "3" indicating the reserved number for special chart 1 and the number "0" indicating the reserved number for special chart 2 are displayed on the special chart 1 reserved number display section 650 and special chart 2 reserved number display section 660, respectively.

When the variable display game starts, the three pending displays displayed in the first pending display section 630a move one by one to the right (pending shift), and one pending display 633a at the right end of the first pending display section 630a moves to the pending consumption area 640, and as shown in (c) of Figure 71, the pending display 633a is displayed within a square frame in the pending consumption area 640 as a variable pending display.

(c) in Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game has started and normal variable display is being performed as the first half of the variable display. As in (b) in Figure 71, the variable display game is executed ("↓↓↓") in response to the variable pending display 633a displayed in the pending consumption area 640 by the pending shift, and the image of the character 701 continues to be displayed behind the variable display area 610. Therefore, the player can easily see the variable display of the decorative special patterns A to C in the variable display area 610 without visibility being impaired by the character 701.

(Tsu) in Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the player switches the presentation style during the first half variation. The player operates the cross key switch 450 to switch the presentation style, for example, from normal mode to premium mode (mode change). As mentioned above, the operation of the cross key switch 450 establishes the player setting mode start condition in the hall/player setting mode processing (B0011), entering player setting mode. However, in (Tsu), the selection screen (setting screen) shown in Figure 78 (A) is not displayed. In other words, the presentation style display 731 performs the same function as the selection screen (setting screen). When the presentation style switches to premium mode, for example, the presentation style display 731 switches from "normal" to "premium," and a message such as "applied" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. By visually checking these displays, the player can easily recognize that the presentation style has switched to premium mode.

When the presentation style is switched to premium mode, for example, a predetermined effect (e.g., a white spiral effect 741 or an "!" character effect) indicating that premium mode is compatible (has been applied) is displayed in front of or around the hold displays 633b and 633c already displayed in the first hold display section 630a. The design of the hold consumption area 640 also changes to accommodate premium mode (e.g., changing from the square area "□" in (chi) to a diamond-shaped area "◇"). Therefore, a player who sees this effect can easily recognize that the premium mode presentation style has been applied (reflected) to the hold displays 633b and 633c already displayed (stored). Note that effects may be displayed not only on hold displays 633b and 633c, which are on standby before the variable display game is executed, but also on or around the variable display display 633a in the hold consumption area 640 during execution, if the switched presentation style is compatible with the variable display game during execution. Furthermore, even if the presentation style is switched to again, each time the style is switched, an effect indicating that the new presentation style (different presentation style) is available may be displayed, or the design of the pending consumption area 640 may be changed each time to indicate that the new presentation style has been applied. Also, each time the style is switched to a different style, the display of the presentation style indicator 731, such as "Normal" or "Premium," may be changed to correspond to the presentation style.

By applying the switched presentation style in this way immediately (instantly) to already displayed pending displays, rather than starting with a new pending display or waiting until all stored pending displays have been consumed, players can be excited about the variable display game based on already displayed pending displays (start memory), increasing their interest in the game. Furthermore, since there is no need to wait until all pending displays are consumed and players do not need to stop shooting, etc., the game can be played at a good tempo, and gaming establishments can also increase the utilization rate of gaming machines 10.

In addition, when premier mode is applied (reflected), the effect may be displayed as moving from presentation style display 731 to hold displays 633b and 633c. By generating an effect from presentation style display 731 displaying premier mode and displaying it as if it is flying to hold displays 633b and 633c in this way, the player can be easily notified that the presentation style of premier mode has been applied to hold displays 633b and 633c.

In addition, instead of displaying effects on the hold displays 633b, 633c according to the presentation style, a pedestal of a color, shape, pattern, etc. according to the presentation style may be displayed below the hold displays 633b, 633c, or the design (shape, etc.) of the hold displays 633b, 633c may be changed according to the presentation style. Also, instead of displaying effects, a display (notification) indicating that the presentation style will be changed, such as "Preparing," may be displayed above the hold displays 633b, 633c. This type of display also makes it easy for players to recognize that the changed presentation style is also being applied to the hold displays 633b, 633c that are already displayed (stored), building anticipation for the variable display game based on the hold displays. Note that multiple combinations of these types may be displayed simultaneously (for example, simultaneous display of effects + pedestal + change in hold display design + "Preparing").

In addition, when the presentation style is switched to premier mode, a live-action image 704 (video) of a tiger corresponding to that premier mode is displayed in the background image.

(T) in Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the latter half of the variation causes a reach effect, which develops into an SP2 reach and a battle effect is executed.

When a transition to a reach effect such as SP2 reach occurs, for example, the decorative special symbol A in the left area 610A of the variable display area and the decorative special symbol B in the right area 610B are displayed small at the top of the screen. The decorative special symbols A and B undergo a fine swaying fluctuation and are maintained in a temporary stopped state (for example, temporary stopping at "4").

When an SP2 reach battle effect is executed, a battle effect is displayed in the center of the display screen, depicting a battle between, for example, the protagonist tiger character 701 and the rival tiger character 702 wearing sunglasses, facing each other on the left and right, attacking each other in close combat. Note that, to better accommodate the premium mode, a premium battle effect (a battle effect with a low probability of execution (occurrence) in other modes such as normal mode) may be executed.

(To) in Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the main character tiger character 701 wins the battle presentation of the SP2 reach presentation and a battle victory presentation (battle victory presentation) is performed. Note that (To) in Figure 79 corresponds to (O) in Figure 71, but a presentation style display 731 and an operation prompt image 732 are displayed.

Then, as the battle presentation progresses, when the main character, the tiger character 701, wins the battle, the decorative special symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 temporarily stop (for example, "444"). Additionally, as the decorative special symbols A to C temporarily stop, a battle victory presentation is performed in the center of the display screen, and the character 701 appears to have won the battle.

(Na) in Figure 79 shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game ends after the battle victory effect. Note that (Na) in Figure 79 corresponds to (Ka) in Figure 71, but the effect style display 731 and operation prompt image 732 are displayed.

When the variable display game ends, the decorative special symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 and the reduced decorative symbols in the variable display area stop changing, and a large decorative stop symbol, such as "444" (or a small win symbol), is displayed in the center of the display screen. A fanfare effect is also played to announce that a special result (jackpot) has occurred. Afterwards, the display screen transitions to a round effect, as described above in (K) of Figure 72, for example.

[Modified example of screen transition of SP2 reach development pattern]
Next, referring to Figure 80, we will explain a modified example of screen transition when the variable display game (special chart variable display game, game) of the third embodiment enters a reach effect and develops into an SP2 reach.

Figure 80 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 of the third embodiment in chronological order, and is a modified example of the screen transition when the reach effect develops into an SP2 reach during a variable display game.

When the presentation style is, for example, a high-reliability predictive mode when transitioning to a reach presentation such as an SP2 reach, a predictive preview presentation (preview presentation) may be executed to change the color of the hold display 633b in the first hold display section 630a (for example, red, gold, or rainbow colors (shown as a "●" in (te1) of Figure 80)). Furthermore, a predictive zone presentation (preview background presentation) may be executed to change the background display, such as the frame 721 on the edge of the display screen, in accordance with the predictive preview presentation. To indicate that the presentation style is a high-reliability predictive mode, the presentation style display 731 displays "high-reliability predictive mode." The presentation style display 731 may be displayed in an appropriately small size to make it easier to secure presentation space on the display screen, or may be displayed in an abbreviation to the extent that the presentation style is clear (for example, "preview mode," "preview," or "high-reliability predictive" (the same as "normal" and "premium" in Figure 79)). Also, when the look-ahead high reliability mode is selected, the words "Applied" (Figure 79 (tsu)) may be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen.

Note that after the preview preview performance ends, the hold display 633b of the first hold display unit 630a returns to its normal display mode as shown by (and) in Figure 79, but the display mode (color, etc.) that changed during the preview preview performance may be maintained as is.

[Examples of performances according to the production style]
Next, referring to Figure 81, an example of the execution of a presentation according to the presentation style of the third embodiment will be described.

Figure 81 is a table showing the relationship between the presentation style and the presentation to be executed in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 81, presentation styles are divided into a first presentation style, which does not affect (change) the look-ahead presentation even when selected, and a second presentation style, which affects (changes) the look-ahead presentation when selected. In other words, in the first presentation style, the look-ahead presentation is executed without changing the normal method (default allocation in FIG. 83), while in the second presentation style, the look-ahead presentation is executed in a different way than normal (for example, high reliability allocation in FIG. 83). Presentation styles classified as the first presentation style include, for example, premium mode, high air generation rate mode, in which air is more likely to be blown toward the player from the operating handle 24, and simple mode. Presentation styles classified as the second presentation style include, for example, high look-ahead reliability mode (look-ahead chance mode). Note that normal mode, waiting mode by each character, and suggestion mode are classified as the first presentation style, which does not affect the look-ahead presentation in the normal way when selected, but may also be second presentation styles, which affect the look-ahead presentation in the normal way when selected. Additionally, the high air occurrence rate mode may be set as the second presentation style and executed in conjunction with the pre-reading presentation.

When the first presentation style is selected, the first presentation style can be applied (applicable) not only to new holds (new holds) that occur after the selection, but also to existing holds (existing holds) in relation to the presentation (during the change) of the variable display game based on the hold (hold display, start memory). Therefore, after switching the presentation style, the corresponding during the change will be executed even for existing holds, enhancing the excitement of the game. Note that during the change are effects executed during the change, such as reach effects and preview effects. For example, as shown in Figure 79, when the first presentation style, premium mode, is selected, if the variable display game based on the existing holds corresponding to hold displays 633b and 633c is executed after the jackpot state ends, the presentation (during the change) based on this variable display game will be more likely to produce premium effects if a jackpot occurs according to the premium mode (note that the selection of premium mode is maintained even after the jackpot state ends).

On the other hand, if the first presentation style is selected, the pre-reading effects (pre-reading preview effects, preview effects) will not be affected for either newly occurring holds or existing holds.

Furthermore, when the second presentation style is selected, the look-ahead effects (look-ahead preview effects, preview effects) of the second presentation style can only be applied to new holds that occur after the selection (applicable). The look-ahead effects of the second presentation style are not applied to existing holds (not applied), and the look-ahead effects are executed in the normal manner (default allocation in Figure 83). Therefore, if the look-ahead effects are being executed in a style other than the second presentation style before selection for an existing hold (the execution timing of the look-ahead effects extends before and after the selection of the second presentation style), or if the look-ahead effects after selection for an existing hold are scheduled to be executed in a style other than the second presentation style (the execution timing of the look-ahead effects is after the selection of the second presentation style), it is possible to prevent the look-ahead effects of the second presentation style selected after the existing hold occurs from being executed, avoiding confusion for players who were expecting the look-ahead effects to be executed in the normal manner.

Note that because the first presentation style, premium mode, can be applied to existing holds (changes based on existing holds), in (tsu) of Figure 79, an effect (e.g., a white swirl effect 741 or an "!" character effect) is displayed above the already-held hold displays 633b, 633c to indicate that the presentation style (e.g., premium mode) is compatible (has been applied). On the other hand, when the second presentation style, high-reliability predictive mode, is selected as in (te1) of Figure 80, it is possible to prevent the effect from being displayed on the already-held hold displays 633b, 633c. By not displaying the effect in this way, it is easier for the player to recognize that the presentation style before selection is maintained for already-held holds, resulting in an easy-to-understand presentation. Note that the second presentation style can be applied at least to new holds that occur after the second presentation style is selected, so when the second presentation style is selected, words such as "Applied" (Figure 79 (tsu)) may be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of (te1).

On the other hand, when the second presentation style is selected, the presentation of the variable display game based on the hold may be unaffected (unchanged) for both new holds that occur after the second presentation style is selected and existing holds that already occurred before the second presentation style was selected. This configuration prevents the presentation from becoming tedious when the second presentation style for the variable display is applied in conjunction with the pre-reading presentation, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Exceptionally, the hold change notice, which changes the mode of the variable hold display as a presentation for the variable display game, may be subject to the second presentation style being applied to both new holds that occur and existing holds.

In addition, for newly occurring holds, the presentation of the variable display game based on the hold may be executed in accordance with the second presentation mode. According to this embodiment, the pre-reading presentation of the newly occurring hold and the during-change presentation of the variable display game based on the hold can be executed in a related (coordinated) manner, such as by matching display colors and characters, thereby maintaining the continuity (consistency, story-likeness) of the presentation using the second presentation mode, and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, for existing holds, the during-change presentation corresponding to the second presentation mode selected as the presentation mode may not be executed, and the during-change presentation corresponding to the presentation mode before selection may be executed. According to this embodiment, the pre-reading presentation of the existing hold and the during-change presentation of the variable display game based on the existing hold can be executed in a related manner, such as by matching display colors and characters, thereby maintaining the continuity (consistency, story-likeness) of the presentation using the presentation mode before the second presentation mode was selected, and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

When the second presentation style is selected, a pre-reading effect may be applied to an already reserved item, as in the modified example described above in Figure 80. In this case, it may be determined whether a pre-reading effect has been executed for an already reserved item. If a pre-reading effect has not been executed before the selection of the second presentation style, a pre-reading effect corresponding to the switched second presentation style may be executed. The pre-reading effects before and after the presentation style change may be repeated to increase the amount of effects. Therefore, when the presentation style is changed multiple times, an effect display indicating that the new presentation style is compatible, a design change to the reserved consumption area 640, or a display change to the presentation style display 731 may be performed each time. This configuration may provide highly satisfying effects for players who expect a variety of effects to be executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, random numbers (random value values) for the pre-reading lottery may be extracted and saved in advance when each start memory (hold) is generated. When the pre-reading effect is actually executed, a pre-reading lottery table corresponding to each presentation style may be used to determine and execute the effect corresponding to the random value value. By adopting this configuration, even if a player switches presentation styles multiple times, the presentation executed as a look-ahead presentation is uniquely determined by the saved (stored) random number value, eliminating the need to redo the look-ahead lottery multiple times and reducing the processing burden.

As another example of a second presentation style capable of implementing a predictive effect, an immediate preview effect (instant read effect) may be implemented, which immediately predicts the likelihood of a jackpot when a start memory (hold) occurs, i.e., when a win occurs. For example, the immediate preview effect may be implemented by flashing or enlarging the hold display (start memory display) in addition to a hold change notification in which the color of the hold display on the display screen changes, or by causing the light-emitting means (decorative lamp (LED of the board decoration device 46)) of the gaming machine 10 to emit light in a predetermined manner (e.g., strong light, flashing, color change (red or rainbow)). This type of implementation allows the player to immediately recognize the likelihood of a jackpot when a start memory occurs. Therefore, by subsequently switching the presentation style to another presentation style (e.g., the premium mode of the first presentation style), the player can enjoy the in-flight effects of the variable display game based on the start memory in the selected other presentation style, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Preview notice]
Next, the aspects of the pre-reading notice (pre-reading notice effect, notice effect) and the pre-reading notice distribution (selection) table will be described with reference to Figures 82 and 83. In the pre-reading notice of this embodiment, a hold change notice that changes the aspect of the hold display (start memory) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, as well as a specific image display effect that displays a specific image (character image, etc.) as needed.

Figure 82 shows an example of a pre-reading notice type (pre-reading notice mode) in the third embodiment. Figure 83 shows an example of a pre-reading notice allocation (selection) table in the third embodiment.

As shown in Figure 82, three types of pre-reading notice types are defined, for example, first pre-reading notice, second pre-reading notice, and third pre-reading notice, depending on the reliability (expectation of a jackpot) of the variable display game that is executed based on the start memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice. Specifically, the reliability (expectation of a jackpot) increases in the order of first pre-reading notice, second pre-reading notice, and third pre-reading notice.

Also, as shown in Figure 82, the hold display mode for hold change notices varies in color depending on the pre-read notice. In addition to the color of the hold display, the shape may also be changed, or it may flash, etc.

The presence or absence of a look-ahead zone effect (look-ahead background effect) may also be set according to the type of look-ahead preview. In this case, the presence or absence of a look-ahead zone effect can be set for each look-ahead preview in the table of Figure 82. For example, the higher the reliability (expectation) of the look-ahead preview, the more likely it is that a look-ahead zone effect will be performed, and if the reliability (expectation) of the look-ahead preview is low, the look-ahead zone effect may be less likely to be performed (no look-ahead zone effect for the first look-ahead preview, look-ahead zone effect for the second and third look-ahead previews).

Display control of the pending display (start memory) is performed by the performance control device 300, which functions as a pending display means (start memory display means) that controls the display mode of the pending display to indicate the expectation (reliability) of the special chart variation display game.

Next, we will explain the pre-reading notice allocation (selection) table with reference to Figure 83.

Figure 83 (A) is the pre-reading notice allocation table 1 when the result of the variable display game based on the corresponding start memory is a miss, and Figure 83 (B) is the pre-reading notice allocation table 2 when the result is a jackpot. Whether the result of the variable display game based on the start memory is a miss or a jackpot can be determined from the information in the pre-reading symbol command (pre-reading stop symbol command).

The look-ahead notice distribution table sets the look-ahead notice type and the selection rate (default) of the corresponding look-ahead notice type for each reach system information as information from the look-ahead variation command (look-ahead variation pattern command). It is also configured so that the higher the reliability (expectation) of the reach, the more likely it is that a look-ahead notice type with a high expectation will be selected. Furthermore, when the result of the variable display game as information from the look-ahead symbol command (look-ahead stop symbol command) is a jackpot, a more reliable look-ahead notice (look-ahead notice effect, look-ahead effect) is more likely to be executed. Note that in Figure 83 (A), "no reach" corresponds to shortened variation and normal variation.

Specifically, if the result of the variable display game based on the start memory is a miss (Figure 83 (A)), the selection rate for the first pre-reading notice type when there is no reach is 1%, and the selection rate for no pre-reading notice (no change) is 99%. Furthermore, in an N reach, the selection rate for the first pre-reading notice is 2%, and the selection rate for no change is 98%.

In an SP1 reach, the second pre-reading notice can also be selected, with the selection rate for the second pre-reading notice being 10%, the selection rate for the first pre-reading notice being 20%, and no change being 70%. Also, in an SP2 reach, the third pre-reading notice can be selected, with the selection rate for the third pre-reading notice being 5%, the selection rate for the second pre-reading notice being 10%, the selection rate for the first pre-reading notice being 15%, and no change being 70%.

On the other hand, in an SP3 reach, the first pre-reading notice is no longer a selection option and will never be selected, with the selection rate for the third pre-reading notice being 20%, the selection rate for the second pre-reading notice being 10%, and no change being 70%. In an SP3 reach, which has the highest reach reliability, the selection rate for the third pre-reading notice (20%) is higher than the selection rate for the second pre-reading notice (10%), making it easier to select the more promising pre-reading notice type.

Also, if the result of the variable display game based on the start memory is a jackpot (Figure 83 (B)), the reach system information does not have a table with no reach, so a reach will always occur, and in an N reach, the selection rate for the first advance notice is 10%, and no change is 90%.

In an SP1 reach, the selection rate for the third preview announcement is 20%, the selection rate for the second preview announcement is 15%, the selection rate for the first preview announcement is 5%, and no change is 60%. In an SP2 reach, the selection rate for the third preview announcement is 30%, the selection rate for the second preview announcement is 20%, the selection rate for the first preview announcement is 10%, and no change is 40%. In an SP3 reach, the selection rate for the third preview announcement is 40%, the selection rate for the second preview announcement is 5%, the selection rate for the first preview announcement is 5%, and no change is 50%. The higher the reach reliability of the reach type (especially SP3 reach), the higher the selection rate for the third preview announcement is compared to the other preview announcements, making it easier to select a more promising preview type.

Furthermore, when the look-ahead high reliability mode (high reliability mode) is selected as the presentation style and the result of the variable display game is a miss or a jackpot, the selection rate (high reliability mode) corresponding to the look-ahead high reliability mode in the rightmost column of Figures 83 (A) and (B) is used as the table for misses or jackpots, instead of the normal selection rate (default) for the other presentation styles described above. A look-ahead lottery process is executed (B1712) to draw a look-ahead effect according to a look-ahead notice allocation table such as that shown in Figure 83, but when a look-ahead effect is applied to an already-held item as shown in Figure 80, the look-ahead effect may be re-drawn each time the look-ahead high reliability mode is changed, or only the lottery drawn in the first look-ahead high reliability mode for an already-held item may be valid.

In the miss table for the selection rate (high reliability mode) corresponding to the look-ahead high reliability mode, for example, the selection rate for the first look-ahead notice of an SP2 reach is 5%, which is lower than the normal selection rate (default) of 15%, and the selection rate for the second look-ahead notice is 5%, which is lower than the normal selection rate of 10%. Furthermore, the selection rate for the third look-ahead notice of an SP2 reach is 3%, which is lower than the normal selection rate (default) of 5%, resulting in no change of 87%. Furthermore, the selection rate for the third look-ahead notice of an SP3 reach is 5%, which is lower than the normal selection rate of 20%, and the selection rate for the second look-ahead notice is 5%, which is lower than the normal selection rate of 10%, resulting in no change of 90%. In this way, in the look-ahead high reliability mode, the probability of a look-ahead notice being made in the miss table is lower than normal, making it less likely that a look-ahead notice will occur in a pending display that results in a miss, thereby improving the reliability (expectation, jackpot expectation) when a look-ahead notice does occur.

In addition, in the table for jackpots with selection rates (high reliability mode) corresponding to the look-ahead high reliability mode, for example, the selection rate for the third look-ahead notice of an N reach is 60%, which is higher than the normal selection rate (default) of 0%, with no change being 30%. The selection rate for the third look-ahead notice of an SP1 reach is 65%, which is higher than the normal selection rate (default) of 20%, with no change being 15%. The selection rate for the third look-ahead notice of an SP2 reach is 68%, which is higher than the normal selection rate (default) of 30%, with no change being 2%. In addition, the selection rate for the third look-ahead notice of an SP3 reach is 88%, which is higher than the normal selection rate of 40%, with no change being 2%. In this way, in the high-reliability look-ahead mode, the probability of a look-ahead prediction being made on the jackpot table is higher than usual, making it more likely that the reserve display for a jackpot (special result) will change color to red reserve or the like in the look-ahead prediction (making red reserve or the like more likely to appear), thereby improving the reliability of the look-ahead prediction (expectation, jackpot expectation).

[Actions and Effects of the Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control device 300) capable of executing presentations related to a game (a variable display game, a special symbol variable display game). The gaming machine 10 includes a start storage means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of storing a start memory (reserved) as a right to play a game, and a selection means (customization means) for selecting a presentation style through a player's operation. When a first presentation style (e.g., a premium mode, a high air occurrence rate mode, or a simple mode) is selected, the presentation control means can change (apply) presentations (presenting a variable presentation, presenting a variable presentation) related to the game based on the start memory (reserved) stored before the first presentation style was selected in accordance with the first presentation style, and when a second presentation style (e.g., a high-reliability look-ahead mode (a chance look-ahead mode)) is selected, the presentation control means does not change (apply) presentations related to the game based on the start memory (reserved) stored before the second presentation style was selected in accordance with the second presentation style.

With this gaming machine 10, when a first presentation style is selected as the presentation style, the selected first presentation style can be applied and executed to presentations (in-flight presentations) related to games based on already-stored holds (pre-flights, start-up memory). As a result, players are more likely to be excited not only about new holds that arise after the first presentation style is selected, but also about in-flight presentations based on pre-flights, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, when a second presentation style is selected, the second presentation style is not applied to in-flight presentations based on pre-flights. Therefore, even when a second presentation style is selected, the pre-flight prediction presentation for pre-flights and the in-flight presentations for the in-flight display game based on pre-flights can be executed in a coordinated manner, such as by aligning display colors and characters, using the presentation style before the second presentation style was selected. This maintains the continuity (consistency, story-like nature) of the presentations based on the presentation style before the second presentation style was selected, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game. In this way, because the circumstances under which presentation styles are applied to pre-flights differ between the first and second presentation styles, flexibility in the application of presentation styles is achieved, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) displays a predetermined display (the switched presentation style display 731, text such as "Applied") on the display means (display device 41) when a presentation style is selected. This gaming machine 10 can easily notify the player that the presentation style has been switched to the selected style, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can display a start memory display (hold display) corresponding to the start memory (hold) on the display means (e.g., display device 41). When a first presentation style (e.g., premium mode, high air occurrence rate mode, simple mode) is selected, a predetermined display (e.g., a white vortex effect 741 or an exclamation mark effect) is displayed on the start memory display (e.g., hold display 633b, 633c) corresponding to the start memory stored before the first presentation style was selected. This gaming machine 10 makes it easy for the player to recognize that the selected first presentation style has also been applied to already-held items, making the game easier to understand and increasing the enjoyment of the game. For example, when a presentation (changing presentation) related to a game based on a start memory (already-held) stored before the first presentation style was selected can be changed according to the first presentation style, an effect is displayed on the start memory display corresponding to the start memory.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can display a start memory display (hold display) corresponding to the start memory (hold) on the display means (e.g., display device 41), and when the presentation (variable presentation) related to the game based on the start memory (already held) that was stored before the first presentation style (e.g., premium mode, high air occurrence rate mode, simple mode) was selected can be changed according to the first presentation style, the image (e.g., the color, shape, pattern, etc. of the base, the design of the hold display, the design of the hold consumption area 640) related to the start memory display corresponding to the start memory (e.g., hold display 633b, 633c) is changed. This gaming machine 10 can clearly notify the player that the selected first presentation style has been applied to the already held item, enhancing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is equipped with a pre-determination means (gaming control device 100) that can determine information about the game (e.g., game result, fluctuation pattern) in advance before the game is executed based on the start memory (pending) stored by the start memory means (gaming control device 100). The presentation control means (e.g., presentation control device 300) can execute preview presentations (pre-read preview presentations, pre-read presentations, pre-read previews) based on the determination results of the pre-determination means, and does not change the preview presentation related to the start memory (already pending) that was stored before the selection, regardless of whether the first presentation style (e.g., premium mode, high air occurrence rate mode, simple mode) or the second presentation style (e.g., pre-read high reliability mode (pre-read chance mode)) is selected. With this type of gaming machine 10, if a pre-reading effect is being executed before selection for an already reserved item (the execution timing of the pre-reading effect spans both before and after selection), or if a pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed before selection for an already reserved item (the execution timing of the pre-reading effect is after selection), it is possible to prevent duplicate execution of the pre-reading effect of the selected new presentation style, thereby avoiding excessive presentation.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the presentation control means (presentation control device 300) can execute, in the selected presentation style, preview presentations (preview preview presentations, preview presentations, preview previews) related to the start memory that occur after the selection, and presentations related to the game based on that start memory (in-flight presentations) regardless of whether the first presentation style (e.g., premier mode, high air occurrence rate mode, simple mode) or the second presentation style (e.g., preview high reliability mode (preview chance mode)) is selected. With this gaming machine 10, regardless of which presentation style is selected, the selected presentation style can be applied to the preview preview presentations and in-flight presentations related to the start memory that occur after the presentation style is selected (after mode selection). This allows the player to enjoy the presentation in the selected presentation style, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 84 to 96. Note that configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and redundant descriptions will be omitted as appropriate. The fourth embodiment relates to the manner in which performance parameters, which are parameters related to performance, are changed.

In the fourth embodiment, the performance parameters indicate the strength and flashiness of the performance, and characterize the performance through the display colors of images such as character displays, effect displays, and background displays on the display device 41, the size and shape of characters (non-letter figures) displayed on the display device 41, the size and font of character displays, the light color and light intensity of the performance LEDs, the brightness of the display device 41, the volume, quality, and pitch of the sound output from the speaker, and the amount of movement of the movable props.

The presentation parameters are associated with the likelihood of a jackpot (including a V-winning jackpot after a minor jackpot), and the likelihood of a jackpot can be reported via the presentation parameters. The presentation parameters may also be used to report not only the likelihood of a jackpot, but also the likelihood of a support jackpot or the likelihood of a reach presentation developing. The likelihood of a jackpot increases (increases) in the order of presentation parameters (presentation strength) from weak to medium to strong to strongest. For example, simply, if the presentation parameters are made more likely to appear in the order of strongest to strong to medium to weak in the event of a miss (weak being most likely to appear), and conversely, if the presentation parameters are made more likely to appear in the order of weak to medium to strong to strongest in the event of a jackpot (strongest being most likely to appear), the likelihood of a jackpot increases in the order of weak to medium to strong to strongest. Note that strongest is the presentation parameter with the highest likelihood of a jackpot among those that may result in a miss in the variable display game, and excludes presentation parameters that guarantee a jackpot (such as rainbows or manufacturer patterns (cherry blossoms) in the case of colors or patterns).

The expected probability of a jackpot may differ depending on the type of effect (step-up preview effect, dialogue preview effect, cut-in preview effect, group preview effect, timer preview effect, pseudo-continuous effect, reach effect, etc.) even with the same effect parameters, but for the same type of effect, the expected probability of a jackpot increases in the order of weak → medium → strong → strongest. Also, for any type of effect with the strongest effect parameters, the expected probability of a jackpot may be higher than for different types of effects with weak, medium, or strong effect parameters.

The weak, medium, strong, and strongest presentation parameters may be associated with the display colors white (or blue), green, red, and gold, respectively. In this case, the likelihood of a jackpot increases (increases) in the order of display colors white (or blue) → green → red → gold. Furthermore, the weak, medium, strong, and strongest presentation parameters may be associated with the size, light output, brightness, volume, or movement amount of small, medium, large, and maximum. In this case, the likelihood of a jackpot increases (increases) in the order of size, light output, brightness, volume, or movement amount of small → medium → large → maximum.

In this embodiment, the display color of an image will be mainly described as a performance parameter, but the same applies to other parameters such as light intensity and volume. Note that the display color of an image such as a character is the color inside its outline, and the outline and other necessary parts may be displayed in an achromatic color other than white (black in this case).

[Variable performance setting processing]
Fig. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure for variable performance setting processing according to the fourth embodiment. The variable performance setting processing is executed by the performance control device 300. In Fig. 84, the same step numbers are used for processing with the same content as Fig. 66 of the first embodiment, and explanations thereof will be omitted.

Steps B2002a, B2004a, and B2007a are modifications to the processing of B2002, B2004, and B2007 in FIG. 66, respectively. In these steps, the first half preview allocation group address table or the second half preview allocation group address table is set in accordance with the number of presentation points, machine code, special symbol type, presentation mode, setting information, etc., as well as the presentation style (detailed mode, etc.) selected by the player via the selection means (selection screen, etc.). This allows a preview presentation (preview) to be drawn by allocation that corresponds to the presentation style selected by the player, in addition to the number of presentation points, machine code, special symbol type, presentation mode, setting information, etc. The preview presentation can not only notify the probability of the special symbol variable display game becoming a jackpot (including a V prize jackpot), but can also notify (suggest) that a jackpot will occur.

By making the allocation of preview effects dependent on the presentation style (detail mode, etc.), for example, in a specific character waiting mode in which a player waits in anticipation for the appearance of a specific character 701, the appearance rate (i.e., average number of appearances) of a specific display effect displaying a specific character 701 in one special symbol variation display game can be made higher than in other modes. This increases the appearance rate of the specific character 701 corresponding to that mode in the specific character waiting mode, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game in the specific character waiting mode. Note that the appearance rate of a specific display effect in one special symbol variation display game may be made higher in the specific character waiting mode than in other modes only if that special symbol variation display game is a jackpot. This increases the appearance rate of the specific character 701 in the specific character waiting mode only if the special symbol variation display game is a jackpot, so the player will have high anticipation for the appearance of the specific character 701, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game in the specific character waiting mode.

For example, the specific character waiting mode (predetermined presentation style) is the Tiger Taro waiting mode, the specific character 701 is "Tiger Taro" corresponding to the specific character waiting mode, and the predetermined display presentation is a Tiger Cut-in Preview (TC) in which the specific character 701 ("Tiger Taro") is suddenly displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

As with the first and second embodiments, the game control device 100 determines the presentation mode (normal mode, remaining reserve consumption mode, time-saving modes #1A, #1B, #3, #4, jackpot mode (presentation mode 1), etc.) according to the game status, etc., using the presentation mode number. The player can then select a detailed presentation style for each presentation mode via selection means (such as the cross key switch 450 or selection screen), and the presentation control device 300 executes the presentation based on the selected presentation style. In the fourth embodiment, the presentation style is a detailed mode (detailed mode) selected by the player and set by the presentation control device 300. As with the third embodiment, the detailed modes include normal mode, simple mode, premium mode, suggestion mode, Torataro waiting mode (specific character waiting mode), ToraMi waiting mode, and predictive high reliability mode.

After step B2012, the presentation control device 300 draws and sets a presentation parameter change scenario based on the presentation style, the content of the change presentation (change time), and the presence or absence of a predetermined display presentation (tiger cut-in announcement (TC)) and its appearance timing (B3000). Here, the content of the change presentation refers to reach content such as no reach, normal reach (N reach (NR)), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), and special 3 reach (SP3 reach). Note that in the fourth embodiment, the format is normal change (first half change) → N reach → SP1 reach → SP2 reach → SP3 reach in this order. Therefore, the content of the change presentation corresponds to the change time of the special chart change display game (total change time value of A4606), and the change time becomes longer as the reach stage progresses to a more advanced stage. In this embodiment, when the content of the variable effect is N Reach, SP1 Reach, SP2 Reach, or SP3 Reach, this means that it will develop to N Reach, SP1 Reach, SP2 Reach, or SP3 Reach, respectively.

After step B3000, the effect control device 300 adjusts the effect content according to the effect parameter change scenario (B3001). Next, the effect content that appears after the specified display effect (tiger cut-in notice) is adjusted (B3002). In particular, the content of some or all of the notice effects may be adjusted, and the content of the notice effects selected in steps B2006, B2009, and B2011 may be changed. After step B3002, steps B2013-B2018 are executed using the adjusted effect content, increasing the excitement of the game.

In steps B3001 and B3002, the preview performance content is adjusted by replacing performance parameters (particularly the display color on display device 41), and the performance parameters change based on the change scenario. Furthermore, the preview performance content is adjusted in steps B3001 and B3002 by replacing characters (non-text graphics) and text displayed on display device 41. In this embodiment, the content of some of the preview performances can be adjusted, such as predetermined step-up preview performances, predetermined dialogue preview performances, background performances, predetermined reach performances (battle performances, battle performances), and pre-reading performances when hold shifts at the start of a change (hold change preview for hold during a change), but the content of all preview performances may also be adjusted.

In step B3000, a change scenario for the effect parameters may be set only for a predetermined effect style (in this embodiment, normal mode and specific character waiting mode), and the effect content determined in steps B2001 to B2012 of the variable effect setting process may be executed as is for other effect styles other than the predetermined effect style (i.e., the processes of steps B3000 to B3002 do not actually need to be executed).

In addition, in the variable effect setting process, before step B2001, the presence or absence of a predetermined display effect (tiger cut-in notice) and the timing of its appearance may first be determined by lottery, and a change scenario for the effect parameters may be set by lottery depending on the presentation style, change time, and the presence or absence of the predetermined display effect and the timing of its appearance. Here, the change time can be determined from the change system command (change command). After that, a first half notice allocation group address table and a second half notice allocation group address table may be set according to the change scenario for the effect parameters, and a lottery may be performed for the notice so that the change scenario is realized.

[Allocation of scenarios for changes in performance parameters]
85 and 86 are allocation tables illustrating the allocation (lottery) of change scenarios for performance parameters in step B3000 of the variable performance setting process (FIG. 84). The allocation of change scenarios differs for each detailed mode as a performance style, with FIG. 85 showing allocation in normal mode and FIG. 86 showing allocation in a specific character waiting mode (Torataro waiting mode). Note that cells (grids) without a value in FIGS. 85 and 86 represent 0%.

In this embodiment, the change scenario for presentation parameters within the entire special chart change display game (overall overview scenario, overall change pattern) is a combination of presentation parameter change modes defined for multiple sections within the special chart change display game. This allows for detailed change scenarios to be set. When presentation parameters change, they change at a predetermined timing within each section. Note that a change scenario may be defined without dividing them into multiple sections. The multiple sections are three sections for one start memory (pending): a look-ahead section, and the first half change section and second half change section of the special chart change display game (the change) based on that start memory (pending). However, one of the sections may be omitted, leaving only two sections. For example, the look-ahead section may be omitted, leaving only two sections: the first half change section and the second half change section. Note that the first half change section is the section before the occurrence of a reach in which the first half change occurs, and the second half change section is the section after the occurrence of a reach in which the second half change occurs.

In Figures 85 and 86, the look-ahead section is a section in which a hold change notice for the changing hold display is executed as a look-ahead effect when a hold shift occurs at the start of the special symbol change display game based on the start memory (at the start of the change). However, the look-ahead section is not limited to this, and may be a section that starts when the game ball that generates the start memory enters the start winning slot, and may also include the period in which a hold change notice is executed at the time of entry that generates the start memory, and the period in which subsequent consecutive notice effects (chance eye look-ahead effect for decorative stop symbols) and look-ahead zone effects are executed. Note that if the look-ahead section starts at entry, the drawing of the specified display effect (tiger cut-in notice (TC)) and the drawing of the change scenario in step B3000 are executed simultaneously with or immediately after the look-ahead lottery process (B1712) that draws the look-ahead effect, and the display content of the look-ahead effect is set corresponding to the change scenario (B1716, B1717).

Figures 85 and 86 show examples of display color change modes as effect parameter change modes. The effect parameter change modes, which indicate the mode of effect parameter change, include a change in effect parameter from weak to medium, strong, or gold (weak → medium, weak → strong, weak → gold), a change in effect parameter from medium to strong or gold (medium → strong, medium → gold), and a change in effect parameter from strong to gold (strong → gold). The effect parameter change modes also include no change (weak → weak, medium → medium, strong → strong, gold → gold). Here, "weak," which has a low jackpot expectation, is white or blue, "medium," which has a medium jackpot expectation, is green, and "strong," which has a high jackpot expectation, is red. "Gold" has an even higher jackpot expectation than "strong."

In this embodiment, at least in normal mode and specific character waiting mode, the presentation parameters for the earlier section (previous section) are set to be the same as or weaker than the presentation parameters for the later section. This makes the presentation related to a single start memory and the special chart variation display game based on that start memory more flashy over time, increasing the enjoyment of the game. Note that only in specific character waiting mode, where the player waits for the appearance of specific character 701, the presentation parameters for the earlier section may be set to be the same as or weaker than the presentation parameters for the later section (this is not done in normal mode), creating a difference from normal mode and increasing the enjoyment of the game in specific character waiting mode.

As shown in Figure 85, in normal mode, one of 20 change scenarios (N1 to N20) can be assigned (drawn by lottery) as the effect parameter change scenario. In normal mode, all of the 10 change patterns (weak → weak, weak → medium, medium → medium, weak → strong, medium → strong, strong → strong, weak → gold, medium → gold, strong → gold, and gold → gold) can be set as the effect parameter change patterns in the first and second change sections. Furthermore, of these 10 patterns, only four can be set as the effect parameter change patterns in the normal mode look-ahead section: a change from weak (weak → medium, weak → strong, weak → gold) and a maintaining of weak (weak → weak). Note that by assigning (drawing by lottery) the effect parameter change scenario, the effect parameter change pattern is also assigned and set at the same time.

In normal mode, if the content of the change presentation is no reach or a normal reach (N reach), the player will win change scenario N1, which has a 100% allocation rate, and will not win change scenarios N2 to N20. Similarly, if the content of the change presentation is an SP1 reach, the player will win one of change scenarios N1 to N7, and will not win change scenarios N8 to N20. If the content of the change presentation is an SP2 reach, the player will win one of change scenarios N1 to N10, and will not win change scenarios N11 to N20. In normal mode, if the content of the change presentation is an SP3 reach, the player can win any of change scenarios N1 to N20. Note that if the content of the change presentation is anything other than an SP3 reach, the player will not win change scenarios N11 to N20, in which the presentation parameter changes to gold. In this way, the more the reach develops, the more change scenario options there are, resulting in a richer variety.

As shown in Figure 86, in the specific character waiting mode, one of the five change scenarios N1, N2, N5, N11, and N17 can be set by allocation (lottery). If the change presentation content is no reach, one of the two change scenarios N1 and N11 will be selected. If the change presentation content is a normal reach (N reach), one of the three change scenarios N1, N11, and N17 will be selected. If the change presentation content is an SP1 reach or SP2 reach, one of the four change scenarios N1, N2, N11, and N17 will be selected. In the specific character waiting mode, if the change presentation content is an SP3 reach, one of the five change scenarios N1, N2, N5, N11, and N17 will be selected. In this way, the more the reach develops, the more change scenario options there are, resulting in a richer variety.

All change scenarios that can be selected (set) in specific character waiting mode are included in the change scenarios that can be selected (set) in normal mode, simplifying control and making the presentation in specific character waiting mode simpler than in normal mode, adding variety and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, to further increase the difference between specific character waiting mode and normal mode, the allocation rate for change scenarios N11 and N17 in normal mode can be set to 0, making change scenarios N11 and N17 unselectable.

In specific character waiting mode, as the effect parameter change mode in the first half of the variable section before a reach occurs, of the 10 possible change modes (multiple change modes: Weak → Weak, Weak → Medium, Medium → Medium, Weak → Strong, Medium → Strong, Strong → Strong, Weak → Gold, Medium → Gold, Strong → Gold, Gold → Gold), only two (only a portion) of the possible change modes are possible: a change from "Weak" (low jackpot expectation) to "Gold" (high jackpot expectation) (Weak → Gold), and a mode that maintains weak (Weak → Weak). As the effect parameter change mode in the second half of the variable section after a reach occurs, of the 10 possible change modes, only five (only a portion) of the possible change modes are possible: a change from weak (Weak → Medium, Weak → Strong, Weak → Gold) and a mode that maintains weak or gold (Weak → Weak, Gold → Gold). Furthermore, as the effect parameter change mode in the look-ahead section of specific character waiting mode, of the four possible change modes in the look-ahead section of normal mode, only one (only a portion) of the possible change modes is possible: a mode that maintains weak (Weak → Weak). Therefore, the hold change notice as a pre-reading effect in specific character waiting mode either changes the color of the hold display from white to blue, or is not executed. Furthermore, by allocating (drawing) the effect parameter change scenario, the effect parameter change mode is also allocated and set at the same time.

In this way, all of the effect parameter change modes in the specific character waiting mode are included in the effect parameter change modes in normal mode, simplifying effect control and making the effects in the specific character waiting mode simpler than in normal mode, adding variety and increasing the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, the effect parameter change modes in the specific character waiting mode include a change from weak (first parameter) to gold (second parameter) (weak → gold), but do not include medium → gold or strong → gold, further enhancing the effects in the specific character waiting mode. Furthermore, to further increase the difference between the specific character waiting mode and normal mode, the allocation rate for change scenarios N11 and N17 in normal mode may be set to 0, making change scenarios N11 and N17 unselectable, and the effect parameter change mode that changes from weak to gold (weak → gold) may not be set during the special chart change display game (first half change section and second half change section).

Furthermore, the effect parameter change mode in the specific character waiting mode does not select a mode in which gold is maintained throughout both the first and second fluctuation sections (gold → gold) (change scenario N20 is not selected). Therefore, in the specific character waiting mode, the selection rate of the effect parameter change mode in which weak is changed to gold (weak → gold) during the special chart fluctuation display game (first and second fluctuation sections) increases, increasing the possibility of interesting effects appearing and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in Figures 85 and 86, the allocation rate (lottery probability, selection rate) of the change scenario for the presentation parameters is set according to the content of the change presentation, including the presentation style (detailed mode), the type of reach presentation (N reach, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, SP3 reach), and the presence or absence of a predetermined display presentation (tiger cut-in notice (TC)) and its appearance timing. Here, the content of the change presentation (change time, execution time of the special chart change display game) can be determined from the change system commands (change command, instructions corresponding to change time) sent from the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300. In this way, the change scenario set by lottery (allocation) can vary in what is likely to be drawn depending on the presentation style, the content of the change presentation, and the presence or absence of a predetermined display presentation and its appearance timing, adding variety to the presentation and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Note that for combinations of variable effect content, and the presence or absence of predetermined display effects and their appearance timing that are not listed in Figures 85 and 86, either the change scenario for effect parameters will not be drawn or set, or all change scenarios will be drawn with a 0% probability, and no adjustment of the effect content according to the change scenario will be made, and the effect content determined in steps B2001 to B2012 of the variable effect setting process will be executed as is (i.e., the processing of steps B3000 to B3002 does not actually have to be executed). For example, in normal mode, if the variable effect content is SP1 reach and the predetermined display effect (TC) is only present before the reach, the effect content determined in steps B2001 to B2012 of the variable effect setting process will be executed as is.

The appearance of the specified display effect (TC) occurs at five times: before a reach, during an N reach (during NR), during an SP1 reach (during SP1), during an SP2 reach (during SP2), and during an SP3 reach (during SP3). At each of the five times, the presence or absence of the specified display effect is determined by lottery with a probability based on whether the special chart variable display game results in a miss or a jackpot (including a V prize jackpot) (see also Figure 90). If the variable effect does not result in a reach, the presence or absence of the specified display effect is determined by lottery only once for the time before the reach. If the variable effect is an N reach, the presence or absence of the specified display effect is determined twice for the time before the reach and during the N reach. If the variable effect is an SP1 reach, the presence or absence of the specified display effect can be determined twice for any two of the time before the reach, during the N reach, and during the SP1 reach. If the content of the variable effect is an SP2 reach, the presence or absence of a specified display effect can be drawn twice for any two of the timings before the reach, during N reach, during SP1 reach, and during SP2 reach. If the content of the variable effect is an SP3 reach, the presence or absence of a specified display effect can be drawn twice for any two of the timings before the reach, during N reach, during SP1 reach, during SP2 reach, and during SP3 reach. The choice of which of the two draws will be made for three or more timings may also be determined by lottery. In this way, the specified display effect (TC) will be won and appear no more than twice. It is also possible to draw lots for the presence or absence of a specified display effect at each of five timings in order, and stop subsequent draws if the specified display effect is won twice.

Note that the specified display effect resulting from the first win is not a confirmation effect, but the specified display effect resulting from the second win is a confirmation effect where the expected probability of a jackpot is equal to or greater than a specified value (for example, 99.8%), which is approximately 100%. Confirmation effects almost never appear in the case of a loss, so in the case of a loss, the specified display effect will appear either 0 or 1 times. For this reason, in the allocation tables of Figures 85 and 86, when the specified display effect (TC) appears twice, the allocation rate is defined only in the case of a jackpot.

In the normal mode of Figure 85, for example, when the content of the variable effect is SP2 reach and the specified display effect (TC) is a miss variable that occurs during SP1 reach or SP2 reach (during SP1/2) (9th column from the left in Figure 85), change scenarios N1 to N10 are drawn at the specified allocation rates (18.0%, 12.0%, 12.0%, 12.0%, 10.0%, 10.0%, 10.0%, 6.0%, 6.0%, 4.0%). For example, when the content of the variable effect is SP3 reach and the predetermined display effect (TC) is a jackpot variation that occurs during N reach (NR) and SP3 reach (rightmost column in Figure 85), the change scenarios N1 to N20 are each drawn at a predetermined allocation rate (5.0%, 3.0%, 3.0%, 3.0%, 7.0%, 7.0%, 7.0%, 22.0%, 22.0%, 11.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%, 1.0%).

In the specific character waiting mode of Figure 86, for example, in the case of a jackpot fluctuation in which the content of the fluctuation effect is SP1 reach and there is no specified display effect (TC) (fifth column from the left in Figure 86), change scenarios N1, N2, N11, and N17 are drawn at the specified allocation rates (5%, 5%, 30%, 60%). For example, in the case of a jackpot fluctuation in which the content of the fluctuation effect is SP3 reach and the specified display effect (TC) only occurs during N reach (NR) (sixth column from the right in Figure 86), change scenarios N5, N11, and N17 are drawn at the specified allocation rates (50%, 30%, 20%). For example, if the content of the variable effect is SP3 reach and the specified display effect (TC) is a jackpot variable that occurs during N reach (NR) and SP3 reach (the rightmost column in Figure 85), the change scenarios N5, N11, and N17 will each be drawn at a specified allocation rate (20%, 30%, 50%).

The probability that either change scenario N11 or change scenario N17 will be selected (the sum of the allocation rates for N11 and N17) is greater in specific character waiting mode than in normal mode. This means that the effect parameter change pattern (weak → gold) from weak to gold during the special chart change display game (first half change section and second half change section) occurs with a higher probability in specific character waiting mode than in normal mode, increasing the excitement of the game.

By the way, for a given combination of the content of the variable effects, and the presence or absence of a specified display effect and its appearance timing, a change scenario in which the allocation rate is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss has a higher expectation of a jackpot (including a V-winning jackpot) than a change scenario in which this is not the case.

Therefore, in normal mode, except for cases where a jackpot is confirmed by winning the specified display effect (TC) twice (jackpot expectation rate = approximately 100% for all change scenarios), the jackpot expectation rate for change scenarios N11 to N20 is higher than for other change scenarios N1 to N10. In other words, the jackpot expectation rate is higher for change scenarios that include a change in effect parameter that changes to gold (weak → gold, medium → gold, strong → gold) or a change in effect parameter that maintains gold (gold → gold) than for change scenarios that do not.

In addition, in specific character waiting mode, the expected probability of a jackpot can increase (become higher) according to the magnitude relationship of change scenarios N1, N2, N5≦N11≦N17. In other words, the expected probability of a jackpot is higher for change scenarios that include a presentation parameter change pattern that changes to gold (weak → gold) or a presentation parameter change pattern that maintains gold (gold → gold) than for change scenarios that do not. Note that the allocation rate may be changed from Figure 86 so that, except for cases where a jackpot is confirmed by winning the specified display effect (TC) twice, the expected probability of a jackpot clearly increases (becomes higher) in order according to the magnitude relationship of change scenarios N1<N2<N5<N11<N17.

When change scenario N11 is selected, a change from weak (first parameter) to gold (second parameter) occurs in the latter half of the variation (after a reach occurs). When change scenario N17 is selected, a change from weak (first parameter) to gold (second parameter) occurs in the first half of the variation (before a reach occurs). When change scenario N11 or change scenario N17 is selected in specific character waiting mode (Torataro waiting mode), the effect can be executed with weak (first parameter, white or blue) from the start of the special chart variation display game until it changes to gold (second parameter).

In order to increase the difference between the specific character waiting mode and normal mode, unlike Figure 85, in normal mode the allocation rate for change scenarios N11 and N17 can be set to 0, making change scenarios N11 and N17 unselectable, and eliminating the effect parameter change pattern (weak → gold) from weak (first parameter) to gold (second parameter) during the special chart change display game (first half change section and second half change section).

In the specific character waiting mode, the predetermined effect displayed on the display device 41 can be executed with gold effect parameters in response to the effect parameter change from weak to gold. The expected jackpot probability for an effect executed with weak (first parameter) is set lower than the expected jackpot probability for a predetermined effect executed with gold (second parameter). Therefore, when change scenario N11 or change scenario N17 is selected, after the effect is executed with weak (white or blue) effect parameters from the start of the special chart change display game, a predetermined effect with gold can be suddenly executed according to the change scenario, surprising the player and increasing their interest in the game. Here, the effect executed with weak (first parameter) may consist solely of effects other than the predetermined effect, or it may include both effects other than the predetermined effect and the predetermined effect.

Furthermore, when change scenario N11 or change scenario N17 is selected, for the three sections (prediction section, first half variable section, second half variable section), the expectation level for the weak effect that can be set for the earlier section is lower than the expectation level for the gold effect that can be set for the later section. Therefore, with regard to one start memory and the effects related to the special chart variable display game based on that start memory, the expectation level for a jackpot increases over time, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a specific character 701 (first character, for example, "Torataro") that corresponds to the specific character waiting mode (Torataro waiting mode, predetermined presentation style), and a predetermined presentation in which the specific character 701 is displayed on the display device 41 is executed in accordance with the specific character waiting mode. Therefore, in the specific character waiting mode, the player will look forward to the predetermined presentation in which the specific character 701 is displayed in gold (second parameter), which has a high probability of a jackpot, making the game more interesting and enhancing the player's enjoyment.

[Variation (allocation of first half change mode and second half change mode of performance parameters)]
Figures 87 to 89 show modified examples of the setting of the effect parameter change mode. Figure 87 is an allocation table illustrating the allocation (lottery) of the first half change mode, which is the effect parameter change mode in the first half change section (common to normal mode and specific character waiting mode). Figures 88 and 89 are allocation tables illustrating the allocation (lottery) of the second half change mode, which is the effect parameter change mode in the second half change section. Figure 88 is an allocation table in normal mode, and Figure 89 is an allocation table in specific character waiting mode.

As described above, the effect parameter change scenario was set (drawn by lottery) based on the allocation of Figures 85 and 86, and the effect parameter change mode was also set at the same time. In other words, the effect parameter change mode included in the winning change scenario was set as is.

However, in this modified example, a further lottery is held based on the selected change scenario, and the presentation parameter change mode is set. For this reason, the change scenario selected through the allocation of Figures 85 and 86 is used as the overall outline scenario. The overall outline scenario consists of a look-ahead scenario, which is the scenario for the look-ahead section, a first half outline scenario, which is the scenario for the first half variation section, and a second half outline scenario, which is the scenario for the second half variation section. Then, through allocation corresponding to each first half outline scenario, the presentation parameter change mode for the first half variation section is further drawn and set. Similarly, through allocation corresponding to each second half outline scenario, the presentation parameter change mode for the second half variation section is further drawn and set. Note that in this modified example as well, the look-ahead scenario drawn through allocation of the overall outline scenario of Figures 85 and 86 is set as is as the presentation parameter change mode for the look-ahead section.

The first half outline scenario and second half outline scenario correspond to the aforementioned change patterns of performance parameters in the first half fluctuation section and second half fluctuation section, respectively. Therefore, in normal mode, 10 first half outline scenarios can be set as shown in Figure 85 (weak → weak, weak → medium, medium → medium, weak → strong, medium → strong, strong → strong, weak → gold, medium → gold, strong → gold, gold → gold), while in specific character waiting mode, 2 patterns can be set as shown in Figure 86 (weak → weak, weak → gold). In normal mode, the above 10 patterns can be set as shown in Figure 85, while in specific character waiting mode, 5 patterns can be set as shown in Figure 86 (weak → weak, weak → medium, weak → strong, weak → gold, gold → gold).

For each first half outline scenario (10 possibilities in normal mode, 2 possibilities in specific character waiting mode), there is a first half change mode allocation table like that shown in Figure 87. Note that Figure 87 shows an example of an allocation table when the first half outline scenario is weak → gold. As shown in Figure 87, the allocation rate (lottery probability, selection rate) for the first half change mode is set according to the content of the change effect, and the presence or absence of a specified display effect (tiger cut-in announcement (TC)) and the timing of its appearance. This is the same as Figures 85 and 86.

The first half change mode can be set to one of 20 patterns (V1 to V20) by allocation. For the first half change mode, preview effects are divided into main previews and sub previews, and the first half change mode of the main preview and the first half change mode of the sub preview are set. For example, main previews include step-up preview effects, dialogue preview effects, and conversation previews, while sub previews include timer preview effects, pseudo-continuous effects, and group previews. Here, pseudo-continuous effects are effects in which pseudo-changes that change and temporarily stop the decorative special symbol (identification information) are performed a predetermined number of times in a single special symbol change display game. Timer preview effects are effects in which a timer is displayed to show the time until a specific effect.

For patterns V1 to V10, the change pattern in the first half of the main preview is in line with the first half outline scenario (here, weak to gold), but the change pattern in the first half of the sub preview is weak to weak, weak to medium, medium to medium, weak to strong, medium to strong, strong to strong, weak to gold, medium to gold, strong to gold, and gold to gold (10 combinations in total). Conversely, for patterns V11 to V20, the change pattern in the first half of the sub preview is in line with the first half outline scenario (here, weak to gold), but the change pattern in the first half of the sub preview is weak to weak, weak to medium, medium to medium, weak to strong, medium to strong, strong to strong, weak to gold, medium to gold, strong to gold, and gold to gold (10 combinations in total). Note that if the first half outline scenario is weak to gold, as shown in Figure 87, the V1, V11, and V17 patterns will not be won (allocation rate 0%).

In this way, in this modified example, one of the first half change modes of the main preview and the first half change mode of the sub preview is set to a mode according to the first half outline scenario, while the other is allocated (drawn by lottery) according to the allocation rate shown in Figure 87. Therefore, fluctuations occur in the first half change mode, which is the presentation parameter change mode in the first half variable section, and the game is not lacking in excitement, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

For each second half outline scenario (10 possibilities in normal mode, 5 possibilities in specific character waiting mode), there is an allocation table for second half change modes as shown in Figures 88 and 99. Note that Figure 88 illustrates an example of an allocation table when the second half outline scenario is weak → gold in normal mode. Figure 89 illustrates an example of an allocation table when the second half outline scenario is weak → gold in specific character waiting mode. As shown in Figures 88 and 99, the allocation rate (lottery probability, selection rate) for second half change modes is set according to the presentation style (detailed mode), the content of the variable presentation, and the presence or absence of a specified display presentation (tiger cut-in announcement (TC)) and the timing of its appearance. This is the same as Figures 85 and 86.

The second half change mode can be set to one of 20 patterns (W1 to W20) by allocation. For the second half change mode, the second half variable section is further divided into a normal reach section, an SP1 reach or SP2 reach (SP1/2 reach) section, and an SP3 reach section in chronological order, and performance parameters are set for each of these sections.

In patterns W1 to W20, the latter half change patterns are as follows for the normal reach section, SP1/2 reach section, and SP3 reach section, in the order of weak → weak → weak, weak → weak → medium, weak → medium → medium, medium → medium → medium, weak → weak → strong, weak → medium → strong, medium → medium → strong, weak → strong → strong, strong → strong, weak → weak → gold, weak → medium → gold, medium → medium → gold, weak → strong → gold, medium → strong → gold, strong → strong → gold, weak → gold → gold, medium → gold → gold, strong → gold → gold, gold → gold (20 patterns in total). Furthermore, if the second half outline scenario is Weak → Gold, as shown in Figure 88, you will not win patterns W1 to W16 in normal mode (allocation rate 0%), and as shown in Figure 89, you will not win patterns W1 to W10 or W12 to W16 in specific character waiting mode (allocation rate 0%).

In the normal mode of Figure 88, allocation only occurs when the content of the variable presentation is an SP3 reach, because, like in the normal mode of Figure 85, it is only in the case of an SP3 reach that it is possible to win the variable scenario N11, where the second half outline scenario is weak → gold. Also, in the specific character waiting mode of Figure 89, the allocation rate of the W11 pattern weak → weak → gold is 100% for no reach, but there is no actual effect as there is no second half variation. Also, in the specific character waiting mode of Figure 89, the allocation rate of the W11 pattern weak → weak → gold is 100% for normal reach, but because it does not develop into SP1, the presentation parameters do not actually change in the second half variation, and the second half variation ends with weak.

In this way, in this modified example, a second stage of allocation is carried out as shown in Figures 88 and 89 based on the second-stage outline scenario (outline of the presentation parameter change pattern for the second-stage variable section) selected in the first stage of allocation in Figures 85 and 86. Therefore, the final second-stage change pattern (presentation parameter change pattern for the second-stage variable section) is set with some fluctuation from the outline presentation parameter change pattern (second-stage outline scenario) set in the first stage of allocation. This fluctuation prevents the game from becoming less interesting and increases the enjoyment of the game.

In Figures 88 and 89, the second half outline scenario starts with weak → gold, then fluctuates to stronger performance parameters, such as medium → gold → gold, strong → gold → gold, and gold → gold → gold, but it is also possible for the performance parameters to fluctuate to weaker performance parameters, or to both strong and weak performance parameters.

[Time chart]
90 is a time chart showing the change in the effect parameters and the occurrence of a predetermined display effect (tiger cut-in notice (TC)). These changes are shown in relation to the change in the special decorative symbol for one special decorative symbol change display game.

Regarding the first decorative special symbol variation display game, the decorative special symbols will undergo the normal variation (first half variation) while the symbol is stopped and before the reach, and after the reach, the second half variation will gradually develop into an N reach variation, SP1 reach variation, SP2 reach variation, and SP3 reach variation, after which all decorative special symbols will temporarily stop and then completely stop.

Note that there may be no reach, or the reach may not develop into an SP1 reach fluctuation, SP2 reach fluctuation, or SP3 reach fluctuation. The fluctuation time becomes longer as it develops. In this embodiment, the content of the fluctuation presentation, N reach, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach, means that they will develop to N reach, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach, respectively. Note that instead of developing in order, it is also possible for N reach to become SP2 reach or SP3 reach without SP1 reach, or for N reach to become SP3 reach without SP1 reach or SP2 reach. Note that for simplicity, even in this configuration, the fluctuation time will increase (become longer) in the order N reach < SP1 reach < SP2 reach < SP3 reach.

During the special chart fluctuation display game (both the first and second fluctuation sections), if there is no change to gold (strongest), the effect parameters (effect strength) change from weak to weak, weak to medium, medium to medium, weak to strong, medium to strong, strong to strong, and weak to medium to strong in normal mode (Figure 85), corresponding to change scenarios N1 to N10. If there is a change to gold in the first fluctuation section (first half change to gold), in normal mode (Figure 85), there are change patterns from weak to gold, medium to gold, and strong to gold in the special chart fluctuation display game, corresponding to change scenarios N17 to N19. If there is a change to gold in the second half fluctuation section (second half change to gold), in normal mode (Figure 85), there are change patterns from weak to gold, medium to gold, strong to gold, weak to medium to gold, weak to strong to gold, and medium to strong to gold in the special chart fluctuation display game, corresponding to change scenarios N11 to N16. Additionally, in normal mode (Figure 85), in response to change scenario N20, there is also a change in which the gold effect parameter is maintained during the special chart change display game.

On the other hand, in the specific character waiting mode (Figure 86), if there is no change to gold, the performance parameters during the special chart fluctuation display game will change from weak to weak, weak to medium, and weak to strong, corresponding to change scenarios N1, N2, and N5. If there is a change to gold in the first half fluctuation section (first half change to gold), in the specific character waiting mode (Figure 86), there will be a change from weak to gold during the special chart fluctuation display game, corresponding to change scenario N17. If there is a change to gold in the second half fluctuation section (second half change to gold), in the specific character waiting mode (Figure 86), there will be a change from weak to gold during the special chart fluctuation display game, corresponding to change scenario N11. Also, in the specific character waiting mode (Figure 86), there is no change mode (corresponding to change scenario N20) in which the performance parameter gold is maintained during the special chart fluctuation display game.

In this way, in the specific character waiting mode, when a change to gold occurs during the special symbol change display game, only the sudden change from weak to gold occurs; there are no gradual changes such as medium to gold, strong to gold, weak to medium to gold, weak to strong to gold, or medium to strong to gold. Because only sudden changes (weak to gold) can be made, the presentation is more dynamic and the enjoyment of the game is enhanced. In particular, if a sudden change (weak to gold) is made in accordance with a predetermined presentation that makes the specific character 701 corresponding to the specific character waiting mode appear on the display screen of the display device 41, and the specific character 701 is displayed in gold (the predetermined presentation is executed in gold), this motivates the player to anticipate the appearance of the specific character 701 in the specific character waiting mode, further enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The tiger cut-in notice (TC) at the bottom of Figure 90 is a predetermined display effect executed with gold (strongest) effect parameters, in which a gold specific character 701 ("Torataro") suddenly interrupts other effects and is displayed large on the display screen of the display device 41. As mentioned above, the predetermined display effect (TC) occurs if the lottery is won at one of five timings: before a reach, during an N reach, during an SP1 reach, during an SP2 reach, and during an SP3 reach. Note that in Figure 90, it is preferable for the timing of occurrence during an N reach, during an SP1 reach, during an SP2 reach, and during an SP3 reach to be at the start of each, to allow for some leeway, but other timings are also acceptable.

As mentioned above, there are two chances to draw whether or not a specific display effect will appear at any two of the five timings, and the specific display effect (TC) will only appear twice. The second specific display effect will confirm a jackpot (it almost never appears in the case of a loss).

In the specific character waiting mode, by adjusting the content of the preview effects (B3001), after the execution of a predetermined effect in gold, some effects (step-up preview effects, dialogue preview effects, reach effects, background effects, etc.) will be executed with gold (strongest) effect parameters. This makes the player feel that the subsequent effects have become more flashy when a predetermined effect corresponding to the specific character waiting mode appears, and they will wait for the appearance of the predetermined effect in the specific character waiting mode, increasing the player's interest in the game. Note that effects other than some effects do not need to be executed with gold effect parameters after the execution of a predetermined effect.

In addition, in the specific character waiting mode, by adjusting the content of the preview effect (B3002), after the execution of the predetermined gold display effect (tiger cut-in preview (TC)), some of the effects will be executed with gold effect parameters. This makes the player feel that the subsequent effects have become more flashy due to the appearance of the predetermined display effect, and they will wait for the appearance of the predetermined display effect (TC) in the specific character waiting mode, increasing the enjoyment of the game. After the execution of the predetermined gold display effect, some of the effects may be executed with red (strong effect parameters, third parameter) effect parameters instead of gold. Note that effects other than some of the effects do not need to be executed with gold (or red) effect parameters after the execution of the predetermined display effect.

In addition, in normal mode, if a predetermined effect or predetermined display effect is executed in gold, some of the effects may be executed with gold effect parameters after the execution of the predetermined effect or predetermined display effect. However, it is also possible to set a difference from the specific character waiting mode, and configure the system so that some of the effects are not executed with gold effect parameters after the execution of a predetermined effect or predetermined display effect in gold.

In addition, in the specific character waiting mode, the specific character 701 ("Torataro") corresponding to the specific character waiting mode is displayed only in white or blue (weak effect parameters) until the timing at which the effect parameter changes from weak to gold in accordance with the change scenario, or the timing at which the specified gold display effect (tiger cut-in announcement (TC)) is executed, whichever occurs first. This makes the player wait with even stronger anticipation for the appearance of the gold specific character 701, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

[Screen transition example 1]
91A to 91C are an example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fourth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 91A to 91C correspond to the case where there is a first half change to gold (a change to gold in the first half fluctuation section) in FIG. 90. Note that, below, the display color of an object such as a character is the color used inside the outline of the object, and the outline and other necessary parts are displayed in achromatic colors other than white (black in this case).

In Figure 91A (a), immediately after power-on, the gaming machine 10 is in player setting mode while waiting for customers (waiting state). Here, as in Figure 78 (a), the display screen of the display device 41 is the selection screen (setting screen) for the presentation style (detailed mode). Then, after the player selects normal mode in the normal game state in response to operation of the cross key switch 450, the normal mode setting is confirmed by selecting the display area 594.

Next, (b) shows the state immediately before the variable display game (here, the decorative special chart 1 variable display game) begins in normal game mode. Note that (b) is the same as FIG. 79(ta) and FIG. 71(a) except that the character 701 is not displayed. (b) differs from FIG. 71(a) in that a presentation style display 731 and an operation prompt image 732 are displayed on the display screen. The presentation style display 731 displays normal mode, which is the currently set detailed mode (presentation style), as "normal." The operation prompt image 732 imitates the cross key switch 450 (operation means) and indicates that the detailed mode can be changed even during gameplay (while the variable display game is being executed) by operating the cross key switch 450. The operation prompt image 732 can prompt a player who wishes to switch the presentation style to operate the cross key switch 450. The display screen including the presentation style display 731 and the operation prompt image 732, and operation means such as the cross key switch 450, constitute customization means.

The special chart 1 reserve number display section 650 and the special chart 2 reserve number display section 660 show the reserve number for special chart 1 and the reserve number for special chart 2, respectively. The first reserve display section 630a can display the reserve display 633a (start memory display) corresponding to the first start memory as a circle before the execution of a variable display game based on that first start memory, and the second reserve display section 630b can display the reserve display corresponding to the second start memory before the execution of a variable display game based on that second start memory. The reserve consumption area 640 displays a variable reserve display as the reserve display corresponding to the start memory related to the variable display game currently being executed (being consumed).

Next, in (c), the variable display game (decorative special chart 1 variable display game) starts, and normal variable display (normal variable) is displayed as the first half variable (variation before the reach) in the variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, center area 610C) and variable display area 615. Here, the variable display setting process performed at the start of the variable display game (when a variable command is received) sets the display parameter change scenario N1 (weak → weak for both the first half variable and the second half variable) according to the allocation corresponding to normal mode (Figure 85), and as the line preview display 818, character 703 is displayed in white (weak display parameters), and the line "Maybe it's a chance?" from character 703 is displayed in white (weak display parameters) in a speech bubble. At the same time, the sound of this line is output from the speaker at a low volume (weak display parameters). Note that (c) is the same as Figure 79(c) and Figure 71(i) except that character 703 is displayed instead of character 701.

Next, in (d), during play (while the variable display game is running), the detailed mode is changed from normal mode to the specific character waiting mode, Torataro waiting mode, by operating the cross key switch 450. The presentation style display 731 then displays the currently set detailed mode as "Torataro waiting." Here, when the specific character waiting mode (Torataro waiting mode) is selected and set, the same processing as the variable presentation setting processing (FIG. 84) is executed within the hall/player setting mode processing (B0420-B0423 in FIG. 69), and the presentation parameter change scenario N17 (weak → gold in the first half of the change, gold → gold in the second half of the change) is set by the allocation corresponding to the specific character waiting mode (FIG. 86). From then on, in FIG. 91, the specific character waiting mode continues until the end of the variable display game.

In the above Figure 91A (a), (b), and (c), the Torataro mode may be selected and set from the point in time of (a), and the presentation parameter change scenario N17 may be set when the variable display game begins. In this case, the presentation style display 731 is simply changed to "Waiting for Torataro" in (b) and (c), and the presentation itself is the same as in Figure 91 (the dialogue preview presentation 818 in (c) may not be necessary).

Next, in (e), a step-up preview effect (see also Figure 94) begins during the first half of the variation. The step-up preview effect announces the likelihood of the variable display game winning a jackpot through a series of effects that are set in multiple stages and are executed sequentially from the lowest stage (step) to the specified stage (step). The higher the specified stage, the higher the likelihood of winning a jackpot.

The step-up preview effect in Figure 91 displays different images (characters, etc.) for each stage within a window 810 (frame) set in the center of the display screen. Furthermore, as the stage progresses, the size of the window 810 and the characters displayed therein increases. In (e), the first stage (SU1) of the step-up preview effect is displayed with character 703 in white (weak performance parameters). The step-up preview effect is displayed on a layer in front of the currently changing decorative special pattern, and the window 810 and the characters displayed within it are displayed in such a way as to hide the currently changing decorative special pattern.

Next, in (f), character 706 is displayed in blue (weak effect parameter) as the second stage (SU2) of the step-up preview effect. The size of window 810 and the character displayed therein are larger than in (e). Note that originally, as the second stage (SU2) of the normal step-up preview effect, an effect should have been performed in which character 706 is displayed in green (medium effect parameter) as in Example 1 of Figure 94 (the effect determined in B2011 of the variable effect setting process). However, because (f) is before the effect parameter has changed from weak to gold, the content of the effect has been adjusted (B3001) in accordance with change scenario N17, and the character's display color has been changed from the original green (medium effect parameter) to blue (weak effect parameter, first parameter).

Next, in (g) of Figure 91B, as the third stage (SU3) of the step-up preview effect, an effect (first character effect) is performed in which the specific character 701 (first character, "Torataro") corresponding to the specific character waiting mode (Torataro waiting mode, predetermined effect style) is displayed in gold (strongest effect parameter, second parameter).

Originally, the third stage (SU3) of the normal step-up preview effect should have been an effect in which character 707 (third character) is displayed in red (strong effect parameters, third parameters) (third character effect, effect determined in B2011 of the variable effect setting process) as shown in Example 1 of Figure 94. However, the content of the effect was adjusted (B3001) in accordance with change scenario N17, and character 707 (third character) that was originally displayed was replaced with specific character 701 (first character, "Torataro"), and the character's display color was changed from the original red (strong effect parameters, third parameters) to gold (strongest effect parameters, second parameters). In this way, in the specific character waiting mode, by replacing other effects with a predetermined effect with a high probability of winning, in which specific character 701 corresponding to the specific character waiting mode is displayed in gold, players will be pleased and their interest in the game will be increased.

In the specific character waiting mode of Figure 91, before the gold specific character 701 is displayed in (g), the presentation is adjusted so that the specific character 701 is not displayed (does not appear on the display screen) in the variable display game being executed, or is displayed only in white or blue (weak presentation parameters). This makes the player wait with even stronger anticipation for the appearance of the gold specific character 701, increasing the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, by adjusting the content of the effect in accordance with change scenario N17, the background effect that displays the background of the display screen after the specific character 701 is displayed in gold is also executed with gold effect parameters, and a gold background is displayed on the display screen. Thereafter, the gold background display is maintained until the three decorative special symbols temporarily stop at (m). Note that by adjusting the content of the background effect in accordance with change scenario N17, the default background displayed in white or blue-based display colors (weak effect parameters) is maintained on the display screens (d) to (f) prior to (g). Note that with regard to the background, even if it is not a white or blue-based display color, the default display color (other than green, red, or gold) may be used as the weak effect parameter.

On the other hand, as an effect whose effect content is not adjusted, that is, an effect that is not subject to effect content adjustment according to the change scenario, a group preview, in which multiple predetermined images (here, star marks ☆) are moved in a group across the display screen, is executed with a predetermined image of green (medium effect parameter). Because it is not subject to effect content adjustment, the group preview can be executed with green (medium effect parameter) rather than gold (the strongest effect parameter). The group preview may also be executed as a sub-preview in the modified example of Figure 87. The step-up preview effect, which is subject to effect content adjustment, is displayed on a layer in front of the group preview, which is not subject to effect content adjustment, and window 810 and the characters displayed therein are displayed so as to hide the group preview.

Next, at (h), a reach occurs, and the second half of the variable display game begins. The decorative special symbol A in the left area 610A of the variable display area and the decorative special symbol B in the right area 610B are displayed small on either side of the top of the screen. The decorative special symbols A and B undergo a fine swaying fluctuation, maintaining a temporary stop state (for example, temporary stop at "4"). From then on, as shown in Figure 90, the game progresses in stages to N reach, SP1 reach, SP2 reach, and SP3 reach.

First, in (i), in the N Reach state, the presentation content is adjusted in accordance with the change scenario N17, and the main character, a tiger character, specific character 701 ("Torataro"), is displayed in gold. From then on, specific character 701 is displayed in gold until the temporary stop state after SP3 Reach ends.

Next, in (j), in the SP1 reach state, the protagonist's specific character 701 encounters the rival tiger character 702. Note that because character 702 does not correspond to the specific character wait mode, Torataro wait mode, it is displayed in white (weak parameters), for example (it could also be green or red), as an effect that is not subject to effect content adjustment according to the change scenario. From then on, character 702 is displayed in white until the SP3 reach ends.

When an SP1 reach begins, the end of the variable display game is approaching, so the presentation style display 731 and operation prompt image 732 are hidden on the display screen, and changing the detail mode is also not possible. However, this is not limited to this, and the presentation style display 731 and operation prompt image 732 may be displayed on the display screen until the end of the variable display game (end of the temporary stop state), and changing the detail mode may also be possible.

Next, at (k), in the SP2 reach state, a battle scene begins in which the main character, a specific character 701, fights against the rival tiger character 702.

Next, in (l), in the SP3 reach state, the weapon of the main character's specific character 701 becomes a tank, and the specific character 701 is displayed riding on the tank. The image 816 of smoke from the tank's firing is displayed in gold, indicating that the presentation has been adjusted in accordance with change scenario N17. The tank image 814 may be displayed in gold, indicating that the presentation has been adjusted in accordance with change scenario N17, or it may be displayed in white, indicating that the presentation is not subject to the presentation adjustments in accordance with the change scenario. Note that here, as in (g), a swarm preview occurs, but the swarm preview is executed using multiple white predetermined images (star marks ☆), indicating that the presentation is not subject to the presentation adjustments in accordance with the change scenario.

Next, in (m) of Figure 91C, just like (o) of Figure 71, the decorative special pattern C in 610C in the middle area of the variable display area 610 temporarily stops at the same pattern (for example, "4") as the decorative special patterns A and B. In (m), the same effect as (o) of Figure 71 is executed, but the specific character 701 is displayed in gold.

Next, at (n), as with (ka) in Figure 71, the variable display game ends, the decorative special symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 and the decorative reduced symbols in the variable display area stop changing, and a big win symbol (or small win symbol) such as "444" is displayed on the display screen as the decorative stopped symbol. After that, a fanfare effect or the like is followed by a round effect.

[Screen transition example 2]
92 is an example (Example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the fourth embodiment. Note that FIG. 92 corresponds to the case where there is a second half change to gold (a change to gold in the second half fluctuation section) in FIG. 90.

In Example 2 (Figure 92) and Example 1 (Figure 91), the state is the same until state (d) elapses. However, in Example 2, the performance parameter change scenario N11 (weak → weak in the first half of the change, weak → gold in the second half of the change) is set according to the allocation corresponding to the specific character wait mode (Figure 86). In Figure 92, the specific character wait mode (Torataro wait mode) continues from state (d) until the end of the variable display game.

Furthermore, in Example 2, unlike (e)-(g) in Example 1, the step-up preview effect is not executed. Following (d), in (g1), the step-up preview effect is not executed, and the group preview is executed with multiple predetermined images (star mark ☆) in white (weak presentation parameter). The group preview, which is not subject to presentation content adjustment according to the change scenario, may be executed with predetermined images in green or red (medium or strong presentation parameter). Furthermore, by adjusting the content of the background presentation according to change scenario N11, the background displayed in a white or blue-based display color (weak presentation parameter) on the display screen is maintained until the later (j1). Note that, as mentioned above, the background does not have to be a white or blue-based display color, and a default display color (other than green, red, or gold) may be associated with the weak presentation parameter.

In the specific character waiting mode of Figure 92, before the gold specific character 701 ("Torataro") is displayed at (j1), the presentation is adjusted so that the specific character 701 is not displayed (does not appear on the display screen) in the variable display game being executed, or is displayed only in white or blue (weak presentation parameters). This makes the player wait with even stronger anticipation for the appearance of the gold specific character 701, increasing the excitement of the game.

Next, in (h1), a reach occurs, just like in (h) of Figure 91, but the background is the same as in (g1).

Next, in (i1), in the N reach state, the companion character 703 is displayed. The background is the same as (g1). Because the companion character 703 does not correspond to the specific character waiting mode, Torataro waiting mode, it is not subject to adjustment of the presentation content according to the change scenario, and is therefore displayed in white (weak parameters), for example (it could also be green or red).

Next, at (j1), in the SP1 reach state, companion character 703 encounters rival tiger character 702. Note that, as with (j) in Figure 91, character 702 does not correspond to the specific character waiting mode, Tiger Taro waiting mode, and is therefore not subject to adjustment of the presentation content according to the change scenario, and is displayed, for example, in white (weak parameters) (it could also be green or red).

However, at (j1), the presentation content is adjusted in accordance with change scenario N11, and as a line preview presentation 818, the main character, a tiger character, specific character 701 ("Torataro"), is displayed in gold, and the line "It's time for a change" is displayed in gold text in a speech bubble from specific character 701. At the same time, the voice of this line is output from the speaker at maximum volume (strongest presentation parameter). From then on, specific character 701 is displayed in gold until the temporary stop state after SP3 reach ends.

Originally, dialogue preview effect 818 would have displayed a character other than specific character 701 (third character) in red (strong effect parameters, third parameter) and the dialogue in red text (third character effect, effect determined in B2011 of the variable effect setting process). However, the content of the effect is adjusted in accordance with change scenario N11 (B3001), and the other character (third character) that would have been displayed is replaced with specific character 701 (first character, "Torataro"), and the display color of the character and dialogue is changed from the original red (strong effect parameters, third parameter) to gold (strongest effect parameters, second parameter). In this way, when a predetermined effect with a high probability of winning, in which specific character 701 and his dialogue are displayed in gold, appears in specific character waiting mode, the player is pleased and their interest in the game increases.

Next, the effects from (k) onwards are executed in the same way as in Figure 91, but the specific character 701 is displayed in gold (the strongest effect parameter).

[Screen transition example 3]
Fig. 93 is an example (Example 3) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in relation to the fourth embodiment. Note that Fig. 92 corresponds to the case where the gold predetermined display effect (tiger cut-in notice (TC)) of Fig. 90 appears.

In Example 3 (Figure 93) and Example 1 (Figure 91), the state is the same until state (d) has passed. However, in Example 3, unlike (e)-(g) in Example 1, the step-up preview effect is not executed. Then, after (d), in (e1), the step-up preview effect is not executed, and the specified display effect (tiger cut-in preview (TC)) is executed with gold (the strongest effect parameter). Note that in Figure 93, the specific character waiting mode (Tiger Taro waiting mode) continues from state (d) until the end of the variable display game.

In the predetermined display effect, the specific character 701 ("Torataro") is displayed in gold within a frame 820. The frame 820 occupies most of the display screen of the display device 41 and is displayed on a layer in front of the currently changing special decorative symbols and other effects. The frame 820 and the specific character 701 displayed therein are displayed so as to obscure the currently changing special decorative symbols and other effects. The color within the frame 820, i.e., the background color of the specific character 701, is a color other than gold (e.g., yellow), but may be displayed in gold to match the specific character 701. Within the frame 820, a text display 822 (a line) such as "The tiger is here" is displayed as a predetermined display. In addition, the line "The tiger is here" may be output from the speaker in conjunction with the predetermined display effect, and the effect button 25 may vibrate to produce a vibration sound. This allows the player to recognize that a highly anticipated jackpot effect (the predetermined display effect) has occurred, even if they are not looking at the display screen of the display device 41 and miss the predetermined display effect. The effect button 25 is equipped with a vibration means (vibration source) such as a motor and is capable of vibrating.

In the specific character waiting mode of Figure 93, before the gold specific character 701 ("Torataro") is displayed at (e1), the presentation is adjusted so that the specific character 701 is not displayed (does not appear on the display screen) in the variable display game being executed, or is displayed only in white or blue (weak presentation parameters). This makes the player wait with even stronger anticipation for the appearance of the gold specific character 701, increasing the excitement of the game.

As explained in the time chart of Figure 90, after a predetermined display effect (tiger cut-in announcement (TC)) in gold is executed at (e1), the effects from (h) onwards are executed in the same way as in Figure 91, but some effects, such as the effect displaying the specific character 701 and the background effects, are displayed in gold (the strongest effect parameters). In this way, in the specific character waiting mode, even after a predetermined display effect in gold, a flashy effect with high expectations is executed in gold, so the player will wait in the specific character waiting mode for the predetermined display effect to appear, increasing the player's interest in the game. Note that in normal mode, adjustment of the effect content (B3002) is not performed, and some of the effects may be executed in a color other than gold even after the predetermined display effect (tiger cut-in announcement (TC)).

In addition, since the effects from (h) onwards only need to be recognized by the player as being flashy due to the specified gold display effects, the specific character 701 and background may be displayed in red (strong effect parameter) instead of gold.

Examples 1, 2, and 3 of screen transitions have been explained above, but characters are a type of object, and in Figures 91 to 93, characters may be replaced with other objects that represent objects, etc.

[Step Up Preview]
Figure 94 is a diagram illustrating step-up preview effects according to the fourth embodiment as examples 1 and 2.

In Example 1, as a normal step-up preview performance, the characters displayed in window 810 change from character 703 to character 706 to character 707 to character 702 as they move from the first stage (SU1) to the fourth stage (SU4), and the color of the characters as a performance parameter changes from white to green to red to gold. Additionally, as the stage (step) progresses, the size of window 810 and the characters displayed therein increases, but it is also possible for the size to remain unchanged from the first stage (SU1) to the fourth stage (SU4). The color within window 810, i.e., the color of the character's background, may be the same color as the character, or it may always be displayed in the same color (e.g., yellow) at each stage and be a different color from the character.

The step-up preview effect may end at a predetermined intermediate stage without progressing to the fourth stage (SU4). The likelihood of a jackpot can be announced depending on how far the step-up preview effect progresses (which predetermined stage it is). The likelihood of a jackpot increases as the predetermined stages at which the step-up preview effect ends are in the order of first stage (SU1) → second stage (SU2) → third stage (SU3) → fourth stage (SU4).

When the step-up preview performance is adjusted in performance content (B3001) according to the change scenario, it is changed from the normal (original) step-up preview performance, the character is replaced with a specific character 701 (first character, "Torataro"), and the character's display color is also changed to gold. This replacement is performed when the step-up preview performance ends (or can be performed before it ends). This replacement allows the step-up preview performance to be used as a trigger to execute the performance parameter change mode of the change scenario.

Note that the size of window 810, the size of the character displayed therein, and the display position of window 810 on the display screen are the same before and after the replacement. Furthermore, the color within window 810, i.e., the background color of the character, is the same before and after the replacement, as long as it is always the same color (e.g., yellow). In this embodiment, the step-up effect that displays the character has at least some commonality in aspects other than the character before and after the character replacement. This allows for smooth character replacement and reduces the sense of discomfort caused by a sudden change in the effect.

For example, as shown in (g) of FIG. 91B, in the third stage (SU3) where the step-up preview effect ends, the red character 707 (third character) is replaced with the gold specific character 701 (first character). That is, when a step-up effect (third character effect) in which a character 707 (third character) different from the specific character 701 is displayed in red (third parameter) is selected (B2011), the red character 707 (third character) is replaced with the gold specific character 701 (first character). In this way, in the specific character waiting mode, replacing the predetermined effect with a high probability of winning, in which the specific character 701 corresponding to the specific character waiting mode is displayed in gold, with an effect in which another character (character 707) is displayed in a different color (red) in the specific character waiting mode, increases the player's enjoyment and the enjoyment of the game.

Also, for example, if the step-up preview effect ends in the fourth stage (SU4), the display color remains gold (second parameter), but the gold character 702 (second character) is replaced with the gold specific character 701 (first character). That is, if a step-up effect (second character effect) in which a character 702 different from the specific character 701 is displayed in gold (second parameter) is selected (B2011), the gold character 702 (second character) is replaced with the gold specific character 701 (first character). In this way, in the specific character waiting mode, replacing the predetermined effect with a high probability of winning, in which the specific character 701 corresponding to the specific character waiting mode is displayed in gold, with an effect in which another character (character 702) is displayed in gold (the same color) reduces the sense of incongruity and increases the player's enjoyment of the game.

In order to avoid any sense of incongruity, it is also possible to configure the system so that characters are not replaced with characters of different colors as in the third stage (SU3) of Example 1, but are instead replaced with characters of the same color as in the fourth stage (SU4) of Example 1.

Furthermore, with regard to the replacement of the display color, as in the second stage (SU2) of (f) in Figure 91A, before the effect parameter changes to gold, the display color may be replaced from the original green (medium effect parameter) to blue (weak effect parameter) in accordance with change scenario N17.

In Example 2, as a normal step-up preview effect, the character displayed in window 810 from the first stage (SU1) to the fourth stage (SU4) is the same specific character 701 at all stages, and the color as a character effect parameter changes from white → blue → gold (or blue) → gold. Also, as the stage (step) progresses, the size of window 810 and the character displayed therein increases, but it is also possible to configure the size not to change from the first stage (SU1) to the fourth stage (SU4).

In Example 2, the display color changes from blue (weak effect parameter) to gold (strongest effect parameter) at a certain stage as a normal step-up preview effect, in accordance with the display color change pattern (weak → gold) corresponding to change scenario N11 or N17. In Example 2, this replacement is executed in the third stage (SU3) or fourth stage (SU4). In this way, by storing image data for the step-up preview effect of Example 2 corresponding to change scenario N11 or N17 in advance in the effect control device 300, effect content adjustment (B3001) according to change scenario N11 or N17 can be smoothly executed. Furthermore, the step-up preview effect of Example 2 can be used as a trigger to execute the effect parameter change pattern of change scenario N11 or N17.

In addition, since the image data is common between the third stage (SU3) and fourth stage (SU4) in the case of replacement in Example 1 and the third stage (SU3) (in the case of gold) and fourth stage (SU4) in the normal step-up preview performance in Example 2, the amount of data stored in the image ROM 325 of the performance control device 300 can be reduced.

[Predetermined display effect (Tiger Cut-in Notice (TC))]
FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a predetermined display effect (tiger cut-in notice (TC)) according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 90, the predetermined display effect can be executed at any two of five timings. It is also possible to configure the predetermined display effect to be executed at all five timings.

In the predetermined display effect, the specific character 701 ("Torataro") is displayed in gold (the strongest effect parameter) within a frame 820. The color within the frame 820, i.e., the background color of the specific character 701, is a color other than gold (e.g., yellow), but may be displayed in gold to match the specific character 701. Within the frame 820, a text display 822 (dialogue) is displayed as a predetermined display.

The likelihood of a jackpot indicated by the predetermined display effect varies depending on the type of text display 822 (line). For example, the likelihood of a jackpot increases (increases) in the following order: "Tiger Appears" < "Big Chance" < "Hottest Hit." Therefore, the predetermined display effect can be executed multiple times while changing the likelihood of a jackpot, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In this embodiment, the specified display presentation format is the same for all detailed modes (presentation formats), including normal mode and specific character waiting mode. However, this is not limited to this, and a character corresponding to each detailed mode may be displayed within frame 820. For example, in specific character waiting mode, the corresponding specific character 701 ("Torataro") is displayed within frame 820, but in Torami waiting mode, a character ("Torami") may be displayed within frame 820 instead of specific character 701 ("Torataro"). Also, in normal mode, the display color of specific character 701 may be changed by lottery, and a specific character 701 of a display color other than gold may be displayed within frame 820.

[Predictive performance]
96 is a time table showing the progress of the look-ahead effect (look-ahead notice effect) according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 96, for several examples (cases 1 to 5), the look-ahead effect that occurs is indicated by a circle "O".

In the above-mentioned Figures 85-94, for simplicity of explanation, the look-ahead section basically only considers the reserved shift at the start of the special chart change display game based on the start memory (the start of the change). However, the look-ahead section may also be a section that starts from the entry of the game ball that generates the start memory. Therefore, Figure 96 shows the look-ahead performance from the occurrence of one start memory (reserved) (the entry of the game ball) throughout the special chart change display game based on that start memory.

As a predictive effect, first, when a game ball enters the game (when a hold occurs), a hold change notice and a screen shake effect can occur. The screen shake effect is a so-called shake vision effect, in which the variable display area 610, etc., is deformed into an irregular shape and appears to be tilted diagonally, and when the deformation is repeated, it appears as if the display screen is shaking. The screen shake effect is executed from when a game ball enters the game (when a hold occurs) throughout the special chart change display game based on the hold.

If a hold occurs when another hold has already occurred, during the stoppage of the variable display game based on the previously occurred hold, the decorative stop symbol (B2012) can be set to a specific stop symbol (chance symbol) to execute a chance symbol pre-reading effect. Furthermore, when the next variable display game starts during the stoppage of the variable display, it is possible to execute a hold change notice during the hold shift or a flash effect at the start of the variable display. For example, the flash effect at the start of the variable display is an effect in which multiple LEDs for effects on the board decoration device 46 or frame decoration device 18 momentarily emit strong light.

As shown in cases 1 to 5, various pre-reading effects selected by the pre-reading lottery process (B1712) are executed. However, if the pre-reading effect is customized, when the pre-reading effect first appears for one start memory (reserved), the effect control device 300 generates a special sound from the speaker and causes multiple effect LEDs to light up in a special LED light-emitting pattern. Here, a customized pre-reading effect is, for example, when the high-reliability pre-reading mode (see the third embodiment) is selected. In this way, a special sound and a special LED light-emitting pattern are generated along with the first of the multiple pre-reading effects to be executed, thereby alerting the player to the start of the pre-reading effect. Even if the player misses the pre-reading effect because he or she is not looking at the display screen of the display device 41, the special sound and special LED light-emitting pattern allow the player to recognize that a high-potential effect (predetermined display effect) has occurred.

[Actions and Effects of the Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment includes a presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control device 300) capable of controlling presentations related to a game (a variable display game, a special symbol variable display game), and can generate a state advantageous to the player depending on the outcome of the game (e.g., when the outcome of the game is a big win or a small win). The gaming machine 10 includes a selection means (e.g., a customization means, i.e., a display screen (presentation style display 731, etc.) and an operation means (e.g., a cross key switch 450)) that allows the player to select a presentation style (e.g., a detailed mode, a stage) through operation by the player. The presentation control means can set the change pattern (e.g., weak (white, blue) → weak, weak → medium (green), weak → gold, gold → gold, etc.) of parameters related to at least some of the presentations (e.g., presentation parameters such as display color). When a predetermined presentation style (for example, a specific character waiting mode (Torataro waiting mode)) is selected, the presentation control means is capable of executing a presentation with the first parameter (for example, weak (white, blue)) from the start of the game until the change to the second parameter (for example, gold) in a changing mode in which the first parameter changes. The expectation that the game will result in a special result (for example, a big win or a small win) is lower for a presentation executed with the first parameter (for example, weak (white, blue)) than for a predetermined presentation (for example, a presentation displaying the specific character 701) executed with the second parameter (for example, gold).

With this gaming machine 10, in a predetermined presentation style, according to the setting of the parameter change mode related to the presentation, a presentation with a first parameter (e.g., weak (white, blue)) with a low probability of producing a special result can be executed from the start of the game, and then a predetermined presentation with a second parameter (e.g., gold) with a higher probability of producing a special result than the first parameter can be executed, surprising the player and increasing their interest in the game. Furthermore, by making it impossible to predict the probability of producing a special result before the predetermined presentation is executed (the probability may be known by chance), the value of the predetermined presentation can be increased. Furthermore, if there is a predetermined parameter (e.g., blue, green in color) with a lower probability of producing a special result than the second parameter (e.g., gold in color), the first parameter (e.g., white in color) may have an even lower probability of producing a special result than the predetermined parameter. Furthermore, when the degree of expectation of a special result changes with a step-by-step parameter (for example, when the degree of expectation changes in color from white → blue → green → red → gold), a first parameter (for example, white) may have an even lower degree of expectation than a predetermined parameter (for example, blue or green) that has an expectation several steps lower than a second parameter (for example, gold).

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined presentation style is selected, the presentation control means can execute the predetermined presentation corresponding to the predetermined presentation style using the second parameters. Therefore, in a predetermined presentation style (e.g., a specific character waiting mode), the player will wait for a predetermined presentation corresponding to the predetermined presentation style, making the game more interesting and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the presentation control means can select the parameter change mode from a plurality of change modes by allocation. When a predetermined presentation style (for example, specific character waiting mode) is selected, the presentation control means can select the parameter change mode from some of the plurality of change modes by allocation. Some of the plurality of change modes includes a change mode from a first parameter to a second parameter. Therefore, in the predetermined presentation style, presentation control is simplified and the number of selectable change modes is reduced, which adds variety to the presentation in the predetermined presentation style and increases the enjoyment of the game. Note that, for example, when a presentation style different from the predetermined presentation style (for example, normal mode) is selected, the presentation control means can select the parameter change mode from the plurality of change modes by allocation.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is equipped with a game control means (e.g., a game control device 100) capable of controlling the progress of the game. The game control means is capable of sending instructions (e.g., a variation command) corresponding to the game execution time (e.g., a variation time) to the effect control means. The effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined display effect (tiger cut-in notice (TC)) that displays a first character (e.g., specific character 701 "Torataro"). When a predetermined effect style is selected, the effect control means sets the allocation rate (lottery probability) of the parameter change mode depending on the content of the instruction (game execution time) and whether or not the predetermined display mode is performed. Therefore, the change mode set by allocation (lottery) can be easily allocated (easily selected) in various ways depending on the content of the instruction (game execution time) and whether or not the predetermined display mode is performed, thereby increasing the variety of effects and enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined presentation style is selected, the presentation control means sets the parameter change pattern for each of multiple sections within the game, so that the expectation level (e.g., jackpot expectation level) for the presentation that can be set for the previous section (previous section: e.g., first half variable section) is equal to or lower than the expectation level for the predetermined presentation with the second parameter that can be set for the subsequent section (e.g., second half variable section). Therefore, the expectation level for the presentation related to the game increases over time, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined presentation style is selected, the presentation control means can execute a first character presentation in which a first character (e.g., specific character 701) is displayed with a second parameter (e.g., gold) as the predetermined presentation style. When a second character presentation in which a second character (e.g., character 702) different from the first character is displayed with a second parameter (e.g., gold) is selected, the presentation control means replaces the second character in the second character presentation with the first character having the second parameter (Figure 94). Therefore, in a predetermined presentation style, a highly anticipated predetermined presentation in which a first character (e.g., specific character 701) is displayed with a second parameter (e.g., gold) can be executed in place of a presentation in which a second character (e.g., character 702) is displayed with a second parameter (e.g., gold), thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game while reducing the sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the first character presentation and the second character presentation are presentations that share commonalities in aspects other than the characters themselves (for example, dialogue previews and step-up presentations). This allows for a smooth transition from the second character to the first character, and reduces the sense of discomfort felt when the presentation changes.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined presentation style is selected, the presentation control means can execute a first character presentation in which the first character (e.g., specific character 701) is displayed with a second parameter (e.g., gold) as the predetermined presentation. When a third character presentation in which a third character (e.g., character 707) different from the first character is displayed with a third parameter (e.g., strong (red)) is drawn, the third character in the third character presentation is set to the first character having the second parameter (Figure 94). Therefore, in the predetermined presentation style, a highly anticipated predetermined presentation in which the first character (e.g., specific character 701) is displayed with a second parameter (e.g., gold) can be executed in place of a presentation in which the third character (e.g., character 707) is displayed with a third parameter (e.g., strong (red)), thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game. Alternatively, a predetermined effect can be executed in which a predetermined character (first character, for example, specific character 701) is displayed with a second parameter (for example, gold), and if a character effect (third character effect) in which a character different from the predetermined character (third character, for example, character 707) is displayed with a third parameter (for example, strong (red)) is drawn, the character in that character effect (third character, for example, character 707) is set to a predetermined character having the second parameter. Therefore, in a predetermined effect style, a highly anticipated predetermined effect in which a predetermined character (for example, specific character 701) is displayed with a second parameter (for example, gold) can be executed in place of an effect in which a character different from the predetermined character (for example, character 707) is displayed with a third parameter (for example, strong (red)), increasing the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the first character presentation and the third character presentation are presentations that share commonalities in aspects other than the characters themselves (for example, dialogue previews and step-up presentations). This allows for a smooth transition from the third character to the first character, while minimizing the sense of discomfort felt when the presentation changes.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined display effect (e.g., a tiger cut-in announcement (TC)) that displays the first character. The appearance rate (average number of appearances) of the predetermined display effect in one game is higher when the game results in a special result (e.g., a big win or small win) in a predetermined presentation style (e.g., a specific character waiting mode) than when the game results in a special result in a presentation style different from the predetermined presentation style (e.g., normal mode). Therefore, in a predetermined presentation style, the player will have high expectations for the appearance of the predetermined display effect, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the effect control means can execute a predetermined display effect (e.g., a tiger cut-in preview (TC)) that displays the first character together with a predetermined display (e.g., text display 822 (dialogue)) at multiple times during the game. The expectation level indicated by the predetermined display effect varies depending on the type of predetermined display. Therefore, the predetermined display effect can be executed multiple times while changing the expectation level by changing the predetermined display, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when a predetermined presentation style is selected, the presentation control means is capable of executing a predetermined presentation corresponding to the predetermined presentation style (e.g., a specific character waiting mode) using a second parameter (e.g., gold), and is also capable of executing at least some of the presentations after the predetermined presentation using the second parameter (e.g., gold). Therefore, the player will perceive the subsequent presentations as more spectacular when a predetermined presentation style appears, and will begin to wait for the predetermined presentation style to appear, increasing the player's interest in the game. For example, if a change mode (e.g., a change mode for a step-up preview presentation) from a first parameter (e.g., weak (white, blue)) to a third parameter (e.g., strong (red)) is set by lottery, the predetermined presentation corresponding to the predetermined presentation style will be executed using the second parameter (e.g., gold), and at least some of the presentations after the predetermined presentation will be executed using the second parameter (e.g., gold).

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, the effect control means is capable of executing a predetermined display effect (e.g., a tiger cut-in preview (TC)) that displays a predetermined character (first character: e.g., specific character 701), and when a predetermined effect style (e.g., specific character waiting mode) is selected, at least some of the effects following the execution of the predetermined display effect are executed with the second parameter (e.g., gold) or the third parameter (e.g., strong (red)). Therefore, the player feels that the appearance of the predetermined display effect has influenced the subsequent effects, and begins to wait for the appearance of the predetermined display effect in the predetermined effect style, increasing the player's interest in the game.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and variations are possible within the scope of its technical concept, and it is clear that these also fall within the technical scope of the present invention. For example, it is possible to replace the time-saving state with a probability variable state. For example, the presentation control device can execute part of the processing executed by the game control device, or conversely, the game control device can execute part of the processing executed by the presentation control device. For example, multiple embodiments and multiple modified examples can be combined in various ways. Furthermore, for example, the present invention can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, and it is intended to include all modifications that are equivalent in meaning and content to the claims.

For example, when the above-described embodiment is applied to a slot machine, the gaming media used in the game are medals (coins) instead of gaming balls, and the number of prize balls is replaced by the number of medals paid out. The number of gaming media used is the number of medals inserted into the slot machine. In a slot machine, the payout rate (base) as performance information is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine, and the bonus ratio is the ratio (%) of the number of medals paid out through various bonuses to the total number of medals paid out over a specified period.

Furthermore, for example, in so-called enclosed gaming machines (smart pachinko machines and smart slot machines), gaming media (gaming balls, medals) circulate within the gaming machine and are not paid out as gaming value onto a tray (such as upper tray 21), but gaming value is awarded as numerical data instead of gaming media. The number of winning gaming balls and the number of medals paid out in a non-enclosed gaming machine become the number of awarded gaming values, which are the number of gaming values awarded (amount of gaming value), in an enclosed gaming machine, and can be stored and managed as numerical data. Furthermore, for example, the number of balls fired (or number of balls dispensed) and the number of medals inserted, which are the number of gaming media used in a non-enclosed gaming machine, become the number of used gaming values, which are the number of gaming values used, in an enclosed gaming machine, and can be stored and managed as numerical data.

10 gaming machine 25 effect button 30 gaming board 32 gaming area 34 normal start gate 36 first start winning port (first start winning area)
37 Normal variable winning device (second start winning area)
38 First special variable prize winning device 39 Second special variable prize winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 50 Collective display device (LED)
86 Specific area (V winning slot)
100 Game control device (main board)
200 Payout control device 300 Performance control device (sub-board)
701 Character 702 Character 707 Character 731 Presentation style display 732 Operation promotion image 741 Effect

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means capable of executing performances related to a game,
an operation unit capable of accepting operations by a player;
A selection means for selecting one of a first presentation style, a second presentation style, and a third presentation style based on an operation received by the operation unit;
an adjustment unit that adjusts the volume of the sound output by the sound output unit based on the operation received by the operation unit,
The performance control means
When any of the presentation styles is selected, a presentation according to the selected presentation style is displayed on a display means;
In the performance according to the first performance style, a first target image corresponding to the first performance style can be displayed on the display means, and a first target sound corresponding to the first performance style can be output from the sound output means;
In the performance using the second performance style, a second target image corresponding to the second performance style can be displayed on the display means, and a second target sound corresponding to the second performance style can be output from the sound output means,
In the performance by the third performance style, a third target image corresponding to the third performance style can be displayed on the display means, and a third target sound corresponding to the third performance style can be output from the sound output means,
The selected presentation style can be reset based on an operation received by the operation unit;
When resetting the selected rendering style based on the operation received by the operation unit, the volume adjusted based on the operation received by the operation unit is not reset,
In a performance according to the first performance style selected by the selection means, when a display performance is executed in which the first target image corresponding to the first performance style and the third target image corresponding to the third performance style not selected by the selection means are displayed on the display means, the first target sound corresponding to the first performance style is output from the sound output means;
In a performance using the second performance style selected by the selection means, when a display performance is executed in which the second target image corresponding to the second performance style and at least one of the first target image corresponding to the first performance style not selected by the selection means and the third target image corresponding to the third performance style not selected by the selection means are displayed on the display means, the second target sound corresponding to the second performance style is output from the sound output means.
Gaming machine.